529322
279
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/285
Pagina verder
F1
All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication.
However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any time so that our
policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.
This manual applies to all Hyundai models and includes descriptions and expla-
nations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you may find
material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.
OWNER'S MANUAL
Operation
Maintenance
Specifications
F2
A070A01A-AAT
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI
Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the
performance, safety or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited
warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations
established by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal or state agencies.
A080A01S-AAT
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible
for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic
systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instruc-
tions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose
to install one of these devices.
!
F3
A090A01A-AAT
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE.
These titles indicate the following:
WARNING:
This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other persons
if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.
CAUTION:
This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the caution
is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.
NOTE:
This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.
!
!
F4
A110A01A-AAT
VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting
a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such
data as:
o How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
o Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
F5
A040A01A-AAT
FOREWORD
Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating
people who drive Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we
build is something of which we're very proud.
Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested
that you read it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you
receive from your new car.
The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an
authorized Hyundai dealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and
any other assistance that may be required.
A050A07A-AAT
HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA
Note: Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai,
please leave the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.
CAUTION:
Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that
do not meet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet
the specifications listed on Page 9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual and
which also appear in the Service Station Information on the back cover of the Owner's Manual.
Copyright 2009 Hyundai Motor America. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission
of Hyundai Motor America.
!
F6
A100A03A-AAT
Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts
1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?
Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same
parts used by Hyundai Motor Company
to manufacture vehicles. They are de-
signed and tested for the optimum safety,
performance, and reliability to our cus-
tomers.
2. Why should you use genuine parts?
Hyundai Genuine Parts are engineered
and built to meet rigid manufacturing
requirements. Using imitation, counter-
feit or used salvage parts is not covered
under the Hyundai New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty or any other Hyundai
warranty. In addition, any damage to or
failure of Hyundai Genuine Parts caused
by the installation or failure of an imita-
tion, counterfeit or used salvage part is
not covered by any Hyundai Warranty.
3. How can you tell if you are purchasing
Hyundai Genuine Parts?
Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts
Logo on the package (see below).
Hyundai Genuine Parts exported to the
United States are packaged with labels
written only in English.
Hyundai Genuine Parts are only sold
through authorized Hyundai
Dealerships.
To find the closest authorized dealer
call 1-800-826-CARS
A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L
A100A03L
F7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
5
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
10
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS &
BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
INDEX
F8
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS (I)
B250A01NF-AAT
ONF018001N
F9
1. Door lock/unlock button
2. Outside rearview mirror control switch*
3. Central door lock switch*
4. Power window lock switch*
5. Power window switches*
6. Trunk lid release lever
7. Fuel filler lid opener button
8. Panel Brightness Control Knob (Rheostat Switch)
9. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Switch
CAUTION:
When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument cluster
nor on the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas
(Instrument cluster, instrument panel or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the air
freshener does leak onto these areas, wash them with water immediately.
!
10. Power Adjustable Pedals Switch*
11. Steering wheel tilt
12. Hood release lever
13. Brake pedal
14. Accelerator pedal
15. Clutch pedal*
16. Fuse box
* : if installed
F10
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS (II)
B250B01NF-AAT
ONF018002N
F11
1. Driver’s air bag
2. Light control / Turn signals
3. Instrument cluster
4. Wiper/Washer
5. Cruise control switch*
6. Ignition switch
7. "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" Indicator
8. Digital clock*
9. Audio controls*
10. Heating/Air conditioning control panel*
CAUTION:
When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument cluster
nor on the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas
(Instrument cluster, instrument panel or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the air
freshener does leak onto these areas, wash them with water immediately.
!
11. Hazard warning flasher switch
12. Seat warmer*
13. Shift lever
14. Cigarette lighter
15. Power outlet
16. Ashtray
17. Passenger’s air bag
18. Vent controls
19. Glove box
* : if installed
YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE
F12
B255A02NF-AAT
INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
High Beam Indicator Light
Door Ajar Warning Light
Seat Belt Reminder Light and Chime
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
ABS Service Reminder Indicator (If Installed)
Low Oil Pressure Warning Light
Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level
Warning Light
Charging System Warning Light
SRS (Airbag) Warning Light
Cruise Indicator Light
Check Engine - Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator
Lights
Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level Warning Light
Front Fog Light Indicator Light (If Installed)
Cruise SET Indicator Light
Low Fuel Level Warning Light
Trunk Lid Open Warning Light
* More detailed explanations of these items will be found beginning on page 1-52.
Low Tire Pressure Telltale (If Installed)
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) Malfunction
Telltale (If Installed)
F13
!
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:
Items contained in motor vehicles or
emitted from them are known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or reproductive harm.
These include:
o Gasoline and its vapors
o Engine exhaust
o Used engine oil
o Interior passenger compartment
components and materials
o Component parts which are subject
to heat and wear
In addition, battery posts, terminals and
related accessories contain lead, lead
compounds and other chemicals known
to the State of California to cause cancer
and reproductive harm.
1
Fuel Recommendations ................................................ 1-2
Breaking in Your New Hyundai ..................................... 1-3
Keys.............................................................................. 1-3
Door Locks ................................................................... 1-4
Theft-Alarm System ...................................................... 1-8
Windows ..................................................................... 1-11
Seats........................................................................... 1-14
Seat Belts.................................................................... 1-22
Child Restraint System ............................................... 1-27
Advanced Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG)
System (SRS) ........................................................... 1-35
Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ...................... 1-50
Warning and Indicator Lights ...................................... 1-52
Trip Computer ............................................................. 1-61
Multi-Function Light Switch ......................................... 1-63
Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch ........................ 1-66
Sunroof ....................................................................... 1-72
Mirror ........................................................................... 1-77
Homelink Mirror ........................................................... 1-79
Hood Release ............................................................. 1-89
Cruise Control ............................................................. 1-92
Manual Heating and Cooling Control System ............. 1-96
Automatic Heating and Cooling Control System ....... 1-104
Antenna ..................................................................... 1-110
Stereo Sound System ............................................... 1-112
Audio System ............................................................ 1-115
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
1
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
2
!
B010A01NF-A
FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS
CAUTION:
Your Hyundai's New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty may not cover damage to the fuel
system and any performance problems
that are caused by the use of fuels con-
taining methanol or fuels containing
MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over
15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)
B010B01A-AAT
What About Gasohol?
Gasohol (a mixture of 90% unleaded
gasoline and 10% ethanol or grain alcohol)
may be used in your Hyundai. However, if
your engine develops driveability
problems, the use of 100% unleaded
gasoline is recommended. Fuels with
unspecified quantities of alcohol, or
alcohols other than ethanol, should not be
used.
B010A02NF-AAT
Use Unleaded Gasoline
Unleaded gasoline with a Pump Octane
Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number
91) or higher must be used in your
Hyundai.
B010C01A-AAT
Use of MTBE
Hyundai recommends that fuels
containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl
Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content
2.7% weight) should not be used in your
Hyundai.
Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol.
(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may reduce
vehicle performance and produce vapor
lock or hard starting.
B010D01A-AAT
Do Not Use Methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol)
should not be used in your Hyundai. This
type of fuel can reduce vehicle
performance and damage components of
the fuel system.
!
UNLEADED
FUEL ONLY
WARNING:
o Do not "top off" after the nozzle auto-
matically shuts off when refueling.
o Tighten the cap until it clicks, otherwise
the "
" check engine light will
illuminate.
o Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an accident.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
3
KEYSBREAKING IN YOUR NEW
HYUNDAI
B010F01A-AAT
Operation in Foreign Countries
If you are going to drive your Hyundai in
another country, be sure to:
o Observe all regulations regarding reg-
istration and insurance.
o Determine that acceptable fuel is
available.
B010E01A-AAT
Gasolines for Cleaner Air
To help contribute to cleaner air, Hyundai
recommends that you use gasolines
treated with detergent additives, which
help prevent deposit formation in the
engine. These gasolines will help the
engine run cleaner and enhance perfor-
mance of the Emission Control System.
B020A01S-AAT
During the First 1,200 Miles (1,931
Km)
No formal "break-in" procedure is required
with your new Hyundai. However, you can
contribute to the economical operation
and durability of your Hyundai by observing
the following recommendations during the
first 1,200 miles (1,931 km).
o Don't drive faster than 55 MPH (88 km/
h).
o While driving, keep your engine speed
(rpm, or revolutions per minute) between
2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.
o Use moderate acceleration. Don't start
quickly or depress the accelerator pedal
fully.
o For the first 200 miles (322 km), try to
avoid hard stops.
o Don't lug the engine (in other words,
don't drive so slowly in too high a gear
that the engine "bucks":shift to a lower
gear).
o Whether going fast or slow, vary your
speed from time to time.
o Don't let the engine idle longer than 3
minutes at one time.
o Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,200
miles (1,931 km) of operation.
B030A01NF-GAT
For greater convenience, your Hyundai
has two master keys and a sub key. The
master keys will open all locks on your
vehicle. The sub key will only function in
the ignition and the door locks.
Leaving your sub key with a parking atten-
dant will ensure that the glove box com-
partment may not be unlocked in your
absence.
B030A01NF-A
Master key
Sub key
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
4
DOOR LOCKS
!
B040A01A-AATB030C01JM-AAT
ILLUMINATED IGNITION SWITCH
Whenever either front door is opened, the
ignition switch will be illuminated for your
convenience, provided the ignition switch
is not in the "ON" position.
The light will go off approximately 10
seconds after closing the door or when the
ignition switch is turned on.
WARNING:
o Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
Before you drive away (especially if
there are children in the car), be sure
that all the doors are securely closed
and locked so that the doors cannot
be opened from the inside. This helps
ensure that the doors will not be
opened accidentally. Also, when
combined with the proper use of seat
belts, locking the doors helps keep
occupants from being ejected from
the car in case of an accident.
o Before opening the door, always look
for and avoid oncoming traffic.
B030B01NF-GAT
Record Your Key Number
A code number is attached on the number
tag that came with the keys to your Hyundai.
This key number tag should not be left with
the keys but kept in a safe place, not in the
vehicle. The key number should also be
recorded in a place where it can be found
in an emergency.
If you need additional keys, or if you should
lose your keys, your authorized Hyundai
dealer can make new keys if you can
supply the key number.
B030B01NF-A
B030C01E
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
5
B040B01NF-AAT
Locking, unlocking front doors with
a key
o The door can be locked or unlocked
with a key.
o Lock the door by turning the key toward
the front of the vehicle and unlock it by
turning the key toward the rear.
NOTE:
The driver's door can be unlocked by
turning the key once toward the rear. If
you wish to unlock all doors, turn the key
again toward the rear within 4 seconds.
B040C02Y-AAT
Locking from the Outside
The doors can be locked without a key. To
lock the doors from the outside, first push
the inside lock switch (1) to the "LOCK"
position, so that the red mark on the switch
is not visible, then close the door.
The door will not lock if the key is left in the
ignition switch when the front doors are
closed. This is normal operation.
NOTE:
o When locking the door this way, be
careful not to lock the door with the
key left in the vehicle.
o To discourage theft, always remove
the ignition key, close all windows and
lock all doors when leaving your ve-
hicle unattended.
ONF048005
LOCK
UNLOCK
ONF048006N
B040D01NF-AAT
Locking from the Inside
To lock the doors from the inside, simply
close the door and push the lock switch to
the "LOCK" position.
NOTE:
o When the door is locked, the red mark
on the switch is not visible.
o The driver's and front passenger's
doors can be opened by pulling the
inside door handle even if the inside
lock switch is pushed to the "LOCK"
position.
ONF048007N
LOCK
UNLOCK
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
6
ONF048008N-2
ONF048008N-1
Driver's side
Front passenger's side
B040E04A-AAT
Child-Protector Rear Door Lock
Your Hyundai is equipped with left and
right side "child-protector" rear door locks.
When the lock mechanism is engaged, the
rear door cannot be opened from the inside.
Its use is recommended whenever there
are small children in the rear seat.
To engage the child-protector feature so
that the door cannot be opened from the
inside, move the child-protector lever to
the " " position and close the door. Move
the lever to the " " position when normal
door operation is desired.
To open the door from the outside, pull the
outside door handle.
B040G02NF-AAT
Central Door Locks
The central door locking switch is located
on the driver's and front passenger's
armrest. It is operated by depressing the
door lock switch. If any door is open when
the switch is depressed to the "LOCK"
position, the door will remain locked when
closed.
NOTE:
o When depressing the front portion of
the driver's or front passenger's door
lock switch, all vehicle doors will lock.
o When depressing the rear portion of
these switches, all vehicle doors will
unlock.
WARNING:
Be careful not to pull the inside door
handle while driving. If you pull the inside
door handle, the door can be opened and
you may be ejected from the vehicle and
can be injured or killed.
!
LOCK
UNLOCK
UNLOCK
LOCK
HNF2011-1
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
7
!
WARNING:
Be careful not to pull the inside door
handle while driving. If you pull the inside
door handle, the door can be opened and
you may be ejected from the vehicle and
can be injured or killed.
o The driver's and front passenger's
doors can be opened by pulling the
inside door handle even if the front
portion of the driver's or front
passenger's central door locking
switch has been depressed to lock
the doors.
o If the door is locked/unlocked mul-
tiple times in rapid succession with
either the vehicle key or door lock
switch, the system may stop operat-
ing temporarily in order to protect the
circuit and prevent damage to sys-
tem components.
D050400ANF
Auto door lock/unlock feature
(If Installed)
o All doors will be automatically locked
when shifting the transaxle shift lever
out of P(Park).
o All doors will be automatically unlocked
when shifting the transaxle shift lever
into P(Park).
NOTE:
An authorized Hyundai dealer can acti-
vate or deactivate the auto door lock/
unlock features.
If you want to activate or deactivate the
auto door lock/unlock features, consult
an authorized Hyundai dealer.
B070F02NF-AAT
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
CAUTION:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
!
ONF048011L
NOTE:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
8
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM
B070A01A-AAT
This system is designed to provide
protection from unauthorized entry into the
car. This system is operated in three stages
: the first is the "Armed" stage, the second
is the "Alarm" stage and the third is the
"Disarmed" stage. If triggered, the system
provides an audible alarm with blinking of
the turn signal lights.
B070B02NF-AAT
Armed Stage
HMR
Park the car and stop the engine. Arm the
system as described below.
1) Remove the ignition key from the ignition
switch.
NOTE:
The transmitter will not work if any of
following occur:
- The ignition key is in ignition switch.
- You exceed the operating distance
limit (10 m).
- The battery in the transmitter is weak.
- Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
- The weather is extremely cold.
- The transmitter is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio station or
an airport which can interfere with
normal operation of the transmitter.
When the transmitter does not work cor-
rectly, open and close the door with the
ignition key. If you have a problem with
the transmitter, contact an authorized
Hyundai Dealer.
NOTE:
Keep the transmitter away from water or
any liquid. If the keyless entry system is
inoperative due to exposure to water or
liquids, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer vehicle warranty.
Locking doors
1. Close all doors.
2. Push the "LOCK (1)" button on the trans-
mitter.
3. At the same time, all doors lock and the
turn signal lights will blink once to
indicate that the system is armed.
Unlocking doors
1. Push the "UNLOCK (2)" button on the
transmitter.
2. At the same time, the driver's door
unlocks and the turn signal lights will
blink twice to indicate that the system is
disarmed.
NOTE:
If you wish to unlock all the doors, press
the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter
again within 4 seconds.
Releasing the trunk lid
Push the trunk lid release button (3) on the
transmitter for longer than 1 second.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
9
2) Make sure that the engine hood and
trunk lid are closed and latched.
3) Lock the doors using the transmitter of
the keyless entry system or key.
After completion of the steps above, the
turn signal lights will blink once and the
system will be armed.
The system can also be armed by locking
the doors with the key; however, the turn
signal lights are not operated.
If any door, trunk lid or engine hood is not
opened or the ignition key is not inserted
in the ignition switch within 30 seconds,
the system will be rearmed.
NOTE:
1) If any door, trunk lid or engine hood
remains open, the system will not be
armed.
2) If this happens, rearm the system as
previously described.
NOTE:
Do not arm the system until all passen-
gers have left the car. If the system is
armed while a passenger(s) remains in
the car, the alarm may be activated when
the remaining passenger(s) leaves the
car.
B075D01CM-AAT
Disarmed Stage
If the following conditions are met, the
system will be disarmed.
o When the doors are unlocked with the
transmitter or the ignition key.
After depressing unlock button, you
must open the doors within 30 seconds
or all doors will automatically lock again
and theft-alarm system will be armed.
o When the ignition switch is in the "ON"
position.
The turn signal lights will blink twice when
the door is unlocked with the transmitter.
The alarm will be deactivated when:
o The lock/unlock button on the transmit-
ter is pressed.
o The doors are unlocked with the igni-
tion key.
o The ignition switch is in the "ON" posi-
tion for 30 seconds.
NOTE:
When the system is disarmed while the
"DOOR" button of the interior light is
depressed, the interior light will illumi-
nate for 30 seconds.
B070C01NF-AAT
Alarm Stage
The alarm will be activated if any of the
following occurs while the car is parked
and the system is armed.
1) A front or rear door is opened without
using the transmitter or the ignition key.
2) The trunk lid is opened without using
the transmitter or the ignition key.
3) The engine hood is opened.
The alarming horn will sound and the turn
signal lights will blink continuously for 27
seconds (This will repeat 2 times). To turn
off the system, unlock the door or trunk lid
with the transmitter or the ignition key.
CAUTION:
Avoid trying to start the engine while the
system is armed.
!
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
10
HNF2005
Battery
2. Remove the old battery from the case
and note the polarity. Make sure the
polarity of the new battery is the
same(+side facing up), then insert it in
the transmitter.
B070E02NF-GAT
Replacing the battery
When the transmitter's battery begins to
get weak, it may take several pushes on
the button to lock or unlock the doors, and
the LED will not light. Replace the battery
as soon as possible.
Battery type : CR2032
Replacement instructions:
1. Carefully separate the case with a coin
as shown in the illustration.
ONF048120
B070E01NF-AAT
Panic Warning
1. Push the "PANIC" button on the backside
of the transmitter.
2. At the same time, the alarm horn will
sound and the turn signal lights will
blink continuously for 30 seconds.
3. To turn off the system, push the "PANIC"
button again on the backside of the
transmitter.
7B070E02NF-A
!
CAUTION:
An inappropriately disposed battery can
be harmful to the environment and hu-
man health.
Dispose the battery according to your
local law(s) or regulation.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
11
WINDOWS
1. Driver's door power window switch
2. Front passenger's door power window
switch
3. Rear passenger's door power window
switch (left side)
4. Rear passenger's door power window
switch (right side)
5. Window lock switch
B060D01NF-GAT
ONF048012N-1
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
12
B060A02NF-GAT
POWER WINDOWS
The power windows operate when the
ignition key is in the "ON" position. The
main switches are located on the driver's
armrest and control the front and rear
windows on both sides of the vehicle. The
windows may be opened by depressing
the appropriate window switch and closed
by pulling up the switch. To open the win-
dow on the driver's side, press the switch
halfway down. The window moves as long
as the switch is operated.
ONF048014N-1
Auto Up/Down Window
(Driver's side)
The auto up/down window is controlled by
the main switch on the driver's armrest.
To fully open the window automatically,
press the switch fully down. To fully close
the window automatically, pull the switch
fully up. In automatic operation, the win-
dow will fully open or close even if you let
go of the switch. To stop the window at the
desired position while the window is in
operation, pull up or depress and release
the switch to the opposite direction of the
movement.
NOTE:
If the battery has been recharged or
disconnected, the auto up/down window
system must be reset as follows;
1. Turn the ignition key to "ON" position.
2. Pull up the driver's window switch
until the window is fully closed and
continue pulling up the driver's win-
dow switch for at least 0.2 second.
If the auto up/down window is not reset,
the feature may not operate properly.
Open
Close
NOTE:
While driving with the rear windows down
or with the sunroof in an open (or partially
open position), your vehicle may dem-
onstrate a wind buffeting or pulsation
noise. This noise is a normal occurrence
and can be reduced or eliminated by
taking the following actions. If the noise
occurs with one or both of the rear win-
dows down, partially lower both front
windows approximately one inch. If you
experience the noise with the sunroof
open, slightly reduce the size of the
sunroof opening.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
13
!
!
WARNING:
o Passengers can be injured if their
head, hands or other body parts are
trapped by a closing window. Always
check for obstructions before raising
any window.
o NEVER leave the ignition key in the
vehicle.
o NEVER leave any child unattended in
the vehicle. Even very young children
may inadvertently cause the vehicle
to move, entangle themselves in the
windows, or otherwise injure
themselves or others.
o Do not attempt to operate the main
switch on the driver's door and a
switch on another door in opposing
directions at the same time. If this is
done, the window will stop and cannot
be opened or closed.
WARNING:
o The automatic reverse feature for the
driver’s window is only active when
the “auto up” feature is used by fully
pulling up the switch. The automatic
reverse feature will not operate if the
window is raised using the halfway
position on the power window switch.
o Always check for obstructions before
raising any window to avoid injuries or
vehicle damage. If an object less than
0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter is caught
between the window glass and the
upper window channel, the automatic
reverse window may not detect the
resistance and will not stop and
reverse direction.
B060C02NF-AAT
Automatic Reverse Window
(Driver's side)
If the upward movement of the window is
blocked by an object or part of the body, the
window will detect the resistance and will
stop upward movement. The window will
then lower approximately 11.8 in.(30cm)
to allow the object to be cleared.
Window lock (Driver's side)
ONF048015L
In order to prevent operation of the pas-
senger front and rear windows, a window
lock switch is provided on the armrest of
the driver's door. To disable the power
windows, press the window lock switch. To
revert to normal operation, press the win-
dow lock switch a second time.
NOTE:
The power windows can be operated for
30 seconds after the ignition key is
turned to the "ACC" or "LOCK" posi-
tions, or removed from the ignition
switch.
If the front doors are opened during this
30 second period, the power windows
can no longer be operated without the
ignition key turned to the "ON" position.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
14
B080C02A-AAT
Adjusting Seatback Angle
To recline the seatback, lean forward to
take your weight off it, then pull up on the
recliner control lever at the outside edge of
the seat. Now lean back until the desired
seatback angle is achieved.
ONF038003
!
B080B03A-AAT
Adjusting Seat Forward and
Rearward
To move the seat toward the front or rear,
pull the lock release lever upward. This will
release the seat on its track so you can
move it forward or rearward to the desired
position. When you find the position you
want, release the lever and slide the seat
forward or rearward on its track until it locks
into the desired position and cannot be
moved further.
WARNING:
After adjusting the seat, always check
that it is securely locked into place by
attempting to move the seat forward or
rearward without using the lock release
lever. Sudden or unexpected movement
of the driver's seat could cause you to
lose control of the vehicle resulting in an
accident.
ONF038002
SEATS
B080A02A-AAT
ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATS
!
WARNING:
o Never adjust the driver’s seat while
the vehicle is moving. Any sudden or
unexpected movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control of the
vehicle resulting in an accident. Only
adjust the driver’s seat when the
vehicle is stationary.
o Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close
to the airbag. Position the seat so that
you can sit as far back as possible
from the airbag and still comfortably
reach all controls.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
15
!
WARNING:
Riding with a reclined seatback in-
creases your chance of serious or fatal
injuries in the event of a collision or
sudden stop. The protection of your
restraint system (seat belts and airbags)
is greatly reduced by reclining your seat.
Seat belts must be snug against your
hips and chest to work properly. The
more the seatback is reclined, the greater
the chance that an occupant's hips will
slide under the lap belt or the occupant's
neck will strike the shoulder belt. Drivers
and passengers should always sit well
back in their seats, properly belted, and
with the seatbacks upright.
B080E01CM-AAT
Headrest
The driver's and front passenger's seats
are equipped with a headrest for the
occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort for
the driver and front passenger, but also
helps protect the head and neck in the
event of a collision.
OMG038400
To lock the seatback into position, release
the recliner control lever.
B080D02JM-AAT
Adjustable Headrests
Headrests are designed to help reduce
the risk of neck injuries.
To raise the headrest, pull it up. To lower
the headrest, push it down while pressing
the lock knob. To remove the headrest,
raise it as far as it can go then press the lock
knob while pulling upward. This should
only be done when the seat is not occupied.
B080D01NF
Lock knob
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
16
o Do not operate the vehicle with the
headrests removed as injury to the
occupants may occur in the event of
an accident. Headrests may provide
protection against neck injuries when
properly adjusted.
o Do not adjust the headrest position of
the driver's seat while the vehicle is in
motion.
B082D01CM-AAT
Removal
To remove the headrest, raise it as far as
it can go then press the release button (1)
while pulling the headrest up (2).
To reinstall the headrest, put the headrest
poles (3) into the holes while pressing the
release button (1). Then adjust it to the
appropriate height.
ONF039041
WARNING:
Make sure the headrest locks in position
after adjusting it to properly protect the
occupants.
!
!
WARNING:
o For maximum effectiveness in case
of an accident, the headrest should be
adjusted so the middle of the head-
rest is at the same height of the center
of gravity of an occupant's head. Gen-
erally, the center of gravity of most
people's head is similar with the height
of the top of their eyes. Also, adjust
the headrest as close to your head as
possible. For this reason, the use of a
cushion that holds the body away from
the seatback is not recommended.
B080D01JM
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
17
B080E01Y-AAT
Lumbar Support Control
(Driver's Seat Only) (If Installed)
To adjust the lumbar support, turn the
handle on the outboard or left side of the
seat. To increase the amount of lumbar
support, pull the lever forward. To decrease
it, push the lever toward the rear.
1. Minimum support
2. Maximum support
ONF038006
2
B090A02Y-AAT
POWER DRIVER'S SEAT (If Installed)
The driver's seat can be adjusted by using
the control knobs on the left side of the seat.
Before driving, adjust the seat to the proper
position so as to easily control the steering
wheel, pedals and switches on the
instrument panel.
CAUTION:
Do not operate two knobs at the same
time.
!
B080F01NF-GAT
Seat Height Adjustment
(Driver's Seat Only)
To raise or lower the seat, raise or lower the
control lever to the desired seat height.
ONF038004
1
B083D01NF-AAT
Active Headrests
The active headrest is designed to move
forward and upward during a rear impact.
This helps to prevent the driver's and front
passenger's head from moving backward
and thus helps prevent neck injuries.
HNF2041-1
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
18
B090D01NF-AAT
Adjusting Seatback Angle
Pull the upper portion of the control knob
forward or rearward to recline the seatback
to the desired position. Release the control
knob and the seatback will remain in that
position.
B090C01Y-AAT
Seat Cushion Height Adjustment
Move the front portion of the control knob
up or down to raise or lower the front part
of the seat cushion. Move the rear portion
of the control knob up or down to raise or
lower the rear part of the seat cushion.
HNF2038
HNF2037
Pull the control knob forward or rearward
to move the seat forward or rearward to the
desired position. Release the control knob
and the seat will remain at that position.
!
WARNING:
o Never adjust a driver’s seat while the
vehicle is moving. Any sudden or
unexpected movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control of the
vehicle resulting in an accident. Only
adjust the driver’s seat when the
vehicle is stationary.
o Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close
to the airbag. Position the seat so that
you can sit as far back as possible
from the airbag and still comfortably
reach all controls.
B090B01NF-GAT
Adjusting Seat Forward and Rear-
ward
HNF2036
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
19
!
WARNING:
Riding with a reclined seatback
increases your chance of serious or
fatal injuries in the event of a collision or
sudden stop. The protection of your
restraint system (seat belts and airbags)
is greatly reduced by reclining your seat.
Seat belts must be snug against your
hips and chest to work properly. The
more the seatback is reclined, the greater
the chance that an occupant's hips will
slide under the lap belt or the occupant's
neck will strike the shoulder belt. Drivers
and passengers should always sit well
back in their seats, properly belted, and
with the seatbacks upright.
B100A01NF-AAT
SEAT WARMER (If Installed)
The seat warmer is provided to warm the
front seats during cold weather. With the
ignition key in the "ON" position, push
either of the switches to warm the driver's
seat or the front passenger's seat.
During mild weather or under conditions
where the operation of the seat warmer is
not needed, keep the switches in the "OFF"
position.
o Each time you push the button, the
temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows:
ONF038007
o The seat warmer defaults to the OFF
position whenever the ignition switch is
turned on.
NOTE:
o The seat warmer may not operate if
the ambient temperature is warm.
o If the seat warmer doesn't operate
when the ambient temperature is
lower than 75°F (24°C), it must be
checked at an authorized dealer.
OFF HIGH (
) LOW ( )
!
WARNING:
Do not turn on the seat warmers, if the
seat is occupied by someone who cannot
monitor the temperature and turn off the
seat warmer, if it becomes too warm.
The seat warmers should not be turned
on when children, the elderly, ill people,
and sleeping people occupy the seat.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
20
B085D02CM-AAT
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the head-
rest, push and hold the release button (2)
on the headrest support and lower the
headrest to the desired position (3).
B085E01CM-AAT
Rear Seat
Headrest
The rear seat(s) is equipped with head-
rests in all the seating positions for the
occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides comfort for
passengers, but also helps protect the
head and neck in the event of a collision.
ONF039401
!
WARNING:
Make sure the headrest locks in position
after adjusting it to properly protect the
occupants.
B085F01CM-AAT
Removal
To remove the headrest, raise it as far as
it can go then press the release button (1)
while pulling the headrest up (2).
To reinstall the headrest, put the headrest
poles (3) into the holes while pessing the
release button (1). Then adjust it to the
appropriate height.
ONF029046
*
HNF2045
1
2
3
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
21
!
WARNING:
The purpose of the folding rear
seatbacks is to allow you to carry longer
objects than could otherwise be
accommodated. Do not allow
passengers to sit on top of the folded
down seatback, while the car is moving
as this is not a proper seating position
and no seat belts are available for use.
This could result in serious injury or
death in case of an accident or sudden
stop. Objects carried on the folded down
seatback should not extend higher than
the top of the front seats. This could allow
cargo to slide forward and cause injury
or damage during sudden stops.
B110A01NF-GAT
FOLDING REAR SEATBACKS
o To unlock the seatback, pull the
seatback release lever, then pull for-
ward on the seatback panel.
o When you return the seatback to its
upright position, always be sure it has
locked into position by pulling and
pushing on the top of the seatback.
B110A01NF
!
WARNING:
B080D02TG-1
o For maximum effectiveness in case
of an accident, the headrest should be
adjusted so the middle of the head-
rest is at the same height of the center
of gravity of an occupant's head. Gen-
erally, the center of gravity of most
people's head is similar with the height
of the top of their eyes. Also, adjust
the headrest as close to your head as
possible. For this reason, the use of a
cushion that holds the body away from
the seatback is not recommended.
o Do not operate vehicle with the head-
rests removed as injury to the occu-
pants may occur in the event of an
accident. Headrests may provide pro-
tection against neck injuries when
properly adjusted.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
22
SEAT BELTS
B150B04Y-AAT
Infant or Small Child
All 50 states have child restraint laws. You
should be aware of the specific
requirements in your state. Child and/or
infant safety seats must be properly placed
and installed in the rear seat. Information
about the use of these restraints begins on
page 1-27.
!
B150A02S-AAT
SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS
WARNING:
All occupants of the vehicle must wear
their seat belts at all times. Seat belts
and child restraints reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries for all occupants
in the event of a collision or sudden stop.
Without a seat belt, occupants could be
shifted too close to a deploying airbag,
strike the interior structure or be thrown
from the vehicle. Properly worn seat
belts greatly reduce these hazards. Even
with advanced airbags, unbelted
occupants can be severely injured by a
deploying airbag. Always follow the
precautions about seat belts, airbags
and occupant safety contained in this
manual.
!
WARNING:
Every person in your vehicle needs to be
properly restrained at all times, including
infants and children. Never hold a child
in your arms or lap when riding in a
vehicle. The violent forces created
during a crash will tear the child from
your arms and throw the child against
the interior. Always use a child restraint
appropriate for your child's height and
weight, see page 1-27.
NOTE:
Small children are best protected from
injury in an accident when properly re-
strained in the rear seat by a child
restraint system that meets the
requirements of the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards. Before buying
any child restraint system, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it meets
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
213. The restraint must be appropriate
for your child's height and weight. Check
the label on the child restraint for this
information. See information beginning
on page 1-29.
!
B140A01S-AAT
REAR SEAT WARNING
For the safety of all passengers, luggage
or other cargo should not be piled higher
than the top of the seatback. In addition,
do not place objects on the rear shelf as
they may move forward during braking
or in an accident and may strike and
injure vehicle passengers.
B140A01NF-A
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
23
WARNING:
Riding with a reclined seatback in-
creases your chance of serious or fatal
injuries in the event of a collision or
sudden stop. The protection of your
restraint system (seat belts and airbags)
is greatly reduced by reclining your seat.
Seat belts must be snug against your
hips and chest to work properly. The
more the seatback is reclined, the greater
the chance that an occupant's hips will
slide under the lap belt causing serious
internal injuries or the occupant's neck
could strike the shoulder belt. Drivers
and passengers should always sit well
back in their seats, properly belted (see
page 1-25), and with the seatbacks up-
right.
!
B150E01A-AAT
Injured Person
A seat belt should be used when an injured
person is being transported. When this is
necessary, you should consult a physician
for recommendations.
B150F01A-AAT
One Person Per Belt
Two people (including children) should
never attempt to use a single seat belt. This
could increase the severity of injuries in
case of an accident.
B150G02A-AAT
Do Not Lie Down
To reduce the chance of injuries in the
event of an accident and to achieve
maximum effectiveness of the restraint
system, all passengers should be sitting
up and the front seats should be in an
upright position when the car is moving. A
seat belt cannot provide proper protection
if the person is lying down in the rear seat
or if the front seat is in a reclined position.
B150D01A-AAT
Pregnant Women
The use of a seat belt is recommended for
pregnant women to lessen the chance of
injury in an accident. When a seat belt is
used, the lap belt portion should be placed
as low and snugly as possible on the hips,
not across the abdomen. For specific
recommendations, consult a physician.
B150C02A-AAT
Larger Children
Children who are too large for child restraint
systems should always occupy the rear
seat and use the available lap/shoulder
belts. The lap portion should be fastened
snug on the hips and as low as possible.
Check belt fit periodically. A child's
squirming could put the belt out of position.
Children are afforded the most safety in the
event of an accident when they are
restrained by a proper restraint system in
the rear seat. If a larger child (over age 13)
must be seated in the front seat, the child
should be securely restrained by the
available lap/shoulder belt and the seat
should be placed in the rearmost position.
Children under the age of 13 should be
restrained securely in the rear seat. NEVER
place a child under the age of 13 in the front
seat. NEVER place a rear facing child seat
in the front seat of a vehicle.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
24
!
B160A02A-AAT
CARE OF SEAT BELTS
Seat belt systems should never be disas-
sembled or modified. In addition, care
should be taken to assure that seat belts
and belt hardware are not damaged by
seat hinges, doors or other abuse.
WARNING:
When you return the rear seatback to its
upright position after the rear seatback
was folded down, be careful not to
damage the seat belt webbing or buckle.
Be sure that the webbing or buckle does
not get caught or pinched in the rear
seat. A seat belt with damaged webbing
or buckle will not be as strong and could
possibly fail during a collision or sudden
stop, resulting in serious injury.
B160B01A-AAT
Periodic Inspection
It is recommended that all seat belts be
inspected periodically for wear or damage
of any kind. Parts of the system that are
damaged should be replaced as soon as
possible.
B160C01A-AAT
Keep Belts Clean and Dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If
belts become dirty, they can be cleaned by
using a mild soap solution and warm water.
Bleach, dye, strong detergents or abrasives
should not be used because they may
damage and weaken the fabric.
B160D01A-AAT
When to Replace Seat Belts
Entire in-use seat belt assembly or
assemblies should be replaced if the
vehicle has been involved in an accident.
This should be done even if no damage is
visible. Additional questions concerning
seat belt operation should be directed to
your Hyundai Dealer.
B170A02NF-AAT
HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEAT
SHOULDER BELT
You can adjust the height of the shoulder
belt anchor to one of 4 positions for
maximum comfort and safety.
If the height of the adjusting seat belt is too
near your neck, you will not be getting the
most effective protection. The shoulder
portion should be adjusted so that it lies
across your chest and midway over your
shoulder nearest the door and not your
neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor,
lower or raise the height adjuster into an
appropriate position.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up. To
lower it, push it down while pressing the
height adjuster button.
HNF2049-A
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
25
B180A02NF-AAT
SEAT BELT-Driver's 3-Point System
with Emergency Locking Retractor
To Fasten Your Belt
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab into the
buckle. There will be an audible "click"
when the tab locks into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to the
proper length only after the lap belt portion
is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly
around your hips. If you lean forward in a
slow, easy motion, the belt will extend and
let you move around. If there is a sudden
stop or impact, however, the belt will lock
into position. It will also lock if you try to lean
forward too quickly.
B180A01NF
NOTE:
o If you are not able to pull out the seat
belt from the retractor, firmly pull the
belt out and release it. Then you will be
able to pull the belt out smoothly.
o If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition key is turned from
the "OFF" position to the "ON" or
"START" position, the seat belt warn-
ing light will blink and the warning
chime will sound for approximately
six seconds to remind the driver to
fasten the driver's seat belt.
!
Release the button to lock the anchor into
position. Try sliding the height adjuster to
make sure that it has locked into position.
WARNING:
o Verify the shoulder belt anchor is
locked into position at the appropriate
height. Never position the shoulder
belt across your neck or face.
Improperly positioned seat belts can
cause serious injuries in an accident.
o Failure to replace seat belts after an
accident could leave you with
damaged seat belts that will not
provide protection in the event of
another collision leading to personal
injury or death. Replace your seat
belts after being in an accident as
soon as possible.
!
WARNING:
o Adjust the shoulder belt height when
you sit well back in the seat.
o When adjusting the shoulder belt
height, grip the height adjuster button
securely and slide the height adjuster
up or down.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
26
B190A02NF-AAT
SEAT BELTS-Front Passenger and
Rear Seat 3-Point System with
Combination Locking Retractor
To Fasten Your Belt
Combination retractor type seat belts are
installed in the rear seat positions to help
accommodate the installation of child
restraint systems. Although a combination
retractor is also installed in the front
passenger seat position, Hyundai strongly
recommends that children always be seated
in the rear seat. NEVER place any infant
restraint system in the front seat of the
vehicle.
This type of seat belt combines the features
of both an emergency locking retractor seat
belt and an automatic locking retractor seat
belt. To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab into the
buckle. There will be an audible "click"
when the tab locks into the buckle. When
not securing a child restraint, the seat belt
operates in the same way as the driver's
seat belt (Emergency Locking Retractor
Type). It automatically adjusts to the proper
length only after the lap belt portion of the
seat belt is adjusted manually so that it fits
snugly around your hips. When the seat belt
is fully extended from the retractor to allow
the installation of a child restraint system,
the seat belt operation changes to allow the
belt to retract, but not to extend (Automatic
Locking Retractor Type). See page 1-32.
NOTE:
o Although the combination retractor
provides the same level of protection
for seated passengers in either
emergency or automatic locking
modes, it is recommended that seated
passengers use the emergency
locking feature for improved
convenience. The automatic locking
function is intended to facilitate child
restraint installation. To convert from
the automatic locking feature to the
emergency locking operation mode,
allow the unbuckled seat belt to fully
retract.
o The front passenger's seat belt
warning light on the center fascia
panel blinks until the front passenger's
seat belt is fastened to remind the
front passenger to fasten the front
passenger's seat belt, when the
ignition key is turned from the "OFF"
position to "the "ON" or "START"
position.
WARNING:
o For maximum restraint system pro-
tection, the seat belts must always be
used whenever the car is moving.
o Seat belts are most effective when
seatbacks are in the upright position.
o Children age 12 and younger must
always be properly restrained in the
rear seat. Never allow children to ride
in the front passenger seat. If a child
over 13 must be seated in the front
seat, he/she must be properly belted
and the seat should be moved as far
back as possible.
o Never wear the shoulder belt under
your arm or behind your back. An
improperly positioned shoulder belt
can cause serious injuries in a crash.
The shoulder belt should be positioned
midway over your shoulder across
your collarbone.
o Avoid wearing twisted seat belts. A
twisted belt can't do its job as well. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be
sure the belt webbing is straight and
not twisted.
o Be careful not to damage the belt web-
bing or hardware. If the belt webbing or
hardware is damaged, replace it.
!
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
27
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
B230A01NF-AAT
Children riding in the car should sit in the
rear seat and must always be properly
restrained to minimize the risk of injury in
an accident, sudden stop or sudden
maneuver. According to accident statistics
provided by the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seats than in the front seat. Larger
children not in a child restraint should use
one of the seat belts provided.
All 50 states have child restraint laws. You
should be aware of the specific
requirements in your state. Child and/or
infant safety seats must be properly placed
and installed in the rear seat. You must use
a commercially available child restraint
system that meets the requirements of the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(FMVSS). Child restraint systems are
designed to be secured in vehicle seats by
lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap/
shoulder belt, or by a tether anchor and/or
LATCH anchors (if installed).
Children could be injured or killed in a
crash if their restraints are not properly
secured. For small children and babies, a
child seat or infant seat must be used.
Before buying a particular child restraint
system, make sure it fits your car seat and
seat belts, and fits your child. Follow all the
instructions provided by the manufacturer
when installing the child restraint system.
The seat belt is released by pressing the
release button in the locking buckle. When
it is released, the belt should automatically
draw back into the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the belt to be
sure it is not twisted, then try again.
B210A01A-AAT
To Release the Seat Belt
B210A01NF
WARNING:
You should place the lap belt portion as
low as possible and snugly across your
hips, not on your waist. If the lap belt is
located too high on your waist, it may
increase the chance of injury in the event
of a collision. Both arms should not be
under or over the belt. Rather, one should
be over and the other under, as shown in
the illustration.
Never wear the seat belt under the arm
nearest the door.
!
B200A01A-AAT
Adjusting Your Seat Belt
B200A01NF
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
28
!
WARNING:
o A child restraint system must be
placed in the rear seat. Never install a
child or infant seat on the front
passenger's seat. Should an accident
occur and cause the passenger side
airbag to deploy, it could severely
injure or kill an infant or child seated in
an infant or child seat. Thus only use
a child restraint in the rear seat of your
vehicle.
o A safety belt or child restraint system
can become very hot if it is left in a
closed vehicle on a sunny day, even if
the outside temperature does not feel
hot. Be sure to check the seat cover
and buckles before placing a child
there.
o When the child restraint system is not
in use, store it in the trunk or fasten it
with a safety belt so that it will not be
thrown forward in the case of a sudden
stop or an accident.
o Children may be seriously injured or
killed by an inflating airbag. All
children, even those too large for child
restraints, must ride in the rear seat.
!
WARNING:
To reduce the chance or serious or fatal
injuries:
o Children of all ages are safer when re-
strained in the rear seat. A child riding in
the front passenger seat can be force-
fully struck by an inflating airbag result-
ing in serious or fatal injuries.
o Always follow the instructions for instal-
lation and use of the child restraint maker.
o Always make sure the child seat is se-
cured properly in the car and your child
is securely restrained in the child seat.
o Never hold a child in your arms or lap
when riding in a vehicle. The violent
forces created during a crash will tear
the child from your arms and throw the
child against the car’s interior.
o Never put a seat belt over yourself and
a child. During a crash, the belt could
press deep into the child causing seri-
ous internal injuries.
o Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle – not even for a short time. The
car can heat up very quickly, resulting in
serious injuries to children inside. Even
very young children may inadvertently
cause the vehicle to move, entangle
themselves in the windows, or lock them-
selves or others inside the vehicle.
o Never allow two children, or any two
persons, to use the same seat belt.
o Children often squirm and reposition
themselves improperly. Never let a
child ride with the shoulder belt under
their arm or behind their back. Always
properly position and secure children
in rear seat.
o Never allow a child to stand-up or
kneel on the seat or floor of a moving
vehicle. During a collision or sudden
stop, the child can be violently thrown
against the vehicle's interior, resulting
in serious injury.
o Never use an infant carrier or a child
safety seat that "hooks" over a
seatback, it may not provide adequate
security in an accident.
o Seat belts can become very hot, es-
pecially when the car is parked in
direct sunlight. Always check seat
belt buckles before fastening them
over a child.
o Always store or secure a child seat,
even when it is not in use. During a
collision or sudden stop, the child seat
could be thrown inside the vehicle.
!
WARNING:
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
29
2. Route the child restraint seat tether strap
over the seatback.
B230C02NF
Rear seat package tray
Tether Strap
Child Restraint Hook Holders
B230C05A-AAT
Installing a Child Restraint Seat with
the "Tether Anchorage" System
Three child restraint hook holders are
located on the rear seat package tray.
To install the child restraint seat
1. Open the tether anchor cover on the
rear seat package tray.
B230C01NF
Tether Anchor
Cover Child Re-
straint Hook Holder
Hook Front of Vehicle
B230B01NF-AAT
Using a Child Restraint System
For small children and babies, the use of
a child seat or infant seat is required. This
child seat or infant seat should be of
appropriate size for the child and should
be installed in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. It is further
required that the seat be placed in the
vehicle's rear seat. Your vehicle is provided
with three child restraint hook holders for
installing the child seat or infant seat.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
30
!
For vehicles with adjustable headrests,
route the tether strap under the head-
rest and between the headrest posts,
otherwise route the tether strap over the
top of the seatback.
3. Connect the tether strap hook to the
child restraint hook holder and tighten
to secure the seat.
WARNING:
o A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a collision if the child restraint
is not properly anchored. Always
follow the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.
o Never mount more than one child re-
straint to a single tether or to a single
lower anchorage point. The increased
load caused by multiple seats may
cause the tethers or anchorage points
to break, causing serious injury or
death.
B230D06E-AAT
Securing the Child Restraint Seat
with the "Child Seat Lower Anchor"
system
Some child seat manufacturers make safety
seats that are labeled as LATCH or LATCH-
compatible child seats. LATCH stands for
"Lower anchors and Tethers for Children".
These seats include two rigid or webbing
mounted attachments that connect to two
LATCH anchors at specific seating posi-
tions in your vehicle. This type of child seat
eliminates the need to use seat belts to
attach the child seat. LATCH anchors have
been provided in your vehicle. The LATCH
anchors are located in the left and right
outboard rear seating positions. Their loca-
tions are shown in the illustration. There is
no LATCH anchor provided for the center
rear seating position.
B230D01NF
!
WARNING:
o A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a collision if the child restraint
is not properly anchored. Always
follow the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.
o Never install a child restraint using
the LATCH lower anchors at the cen-
ter position of the rear seat. In a
crash, the LATCH lower anchors may
break if a car seat is improperly placed
in the center position resulting in se-
rious or fatal injuries. Only place a
LATCH or LATCH-compatible child
seat in the left or right out-board rear
seating positions (as shown) to the
appropriate LATCH anchors pro-
vided.
o Never mount more than one child
restraint to a single tether or to a
single lower anchorage point. The
increased load caused by multiple
seats may cause the tethers or
anchorage points to break, causing
serious injury or death.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
31
!
Child restraint symbols are located on the
left and right rear seatbacks to indicate the
position of the lower anchors for child
restraints.
B230D02NF
Lower Anchor
Lower Anchor
Position Indicator
B230D03NF
Follow the child seat manufacturer's in-
structions to properly install safety seats
with LATCH or LATCH-compatible attach-
ments.
Once you have installed the LATCH child
restraint seat, assure that the seat is
properly attached to the LATCH and tether
anchors. Also, test the safety seat before
you place the child in it. Tilt the seat from
side to side. Also try to tug the seat forward.
Check to see if the anchors hold the seat
in place.
!
o When using the vehicle’s “LATCH”
system to install a child restraint sys-
tem in the rear seat, all unused ve-
hicle rear seat belt metal latch plates
or tabs must be latched securely in
their seat belt buckles and the seat
belt webbing must be retracted be-
hind the child restraint to prevent the
child from reaching and taking hold of
unretracted seat belts. Unlatched
metal latch plates or tabs may allow
the child to reach the unretracted
seat belts which may result in stran-
gulation and a serious injury or death
to the child in the child restraint.
WARNING:
WARNING:
A child can be seriously injured or killed
in a collision if the child restraint is not
properly anchored to the car and the
child is not properly restrained in the
child restraint. Always follow the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions for
installation and use.
!
CAUTION:
Do not allow the rear seat belt webbing to
get scratched or pinched by the child-
seat latch and LATCH anchor during the
installation.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
32
B230G04Y-AAT
Child Restraint System Installation
on Rear Seats
OCM019300
On outboard rear seats
B235G02NF
On rear seat center position
To install a child restraint system in the rear
seats, extend the shoulder/lap belt entirely
from its retractor until a "click" is felt. This
will engage the seat belt retractor automatic
locking feature, which allows the seat belt
to retract but not extend. Install the child
restraint system, buckle the seat belt and
allow the seat belt to take up any slack.
Make sure that the lap portion of the belt is
tight around the child restraint system and
the shoulder portion of the belt is positioned
so that it cannot interfere with the child's
head or neck. Also, double check to be
sure that the retractor has engaged the
Automatic Locking feature by trying to
extend webbing out of the retractor. If the
retractor is in the Automatic Locking mode,
the belt will be locked. After installation of
the child restraint system, try to move it in all
directions to be sure the child restraint
system is securely installed. If you need to
tighten the belt, pull more webbing toward
the retractor. When you unbuckle the seat
belt and allow it to retract, the retractor will
automatically revert back to its normal
seated passenger Emergency Locking
usage condition.
!
WARNING:
o If the retractor is not in the Automatic
Locking mode, the child restraint can
move when your vehicle turns or stops
suddenly. A child can be seriously
injured or killed if the child restraint is
not properly anchored to the car,
including setting the retractor to the
Automatic Locking mode.
o Do not install any child restraint
system in the front passenger seat.
Should an accident occur and cause
the passenger side airbag to deploy,
it could severely injure or kill an infant
or child seated in an infant or child
seat. Therefore, only use a child
restraint system in the rear seat of
your vehicle.
NOTE:
o Before installing the child restraint
system in any seating position, read
the instructions supplied by the child
restraint system manufacturer.
o If the seat belt does not operate as
described, have the system checked
immediately by your authorized
Hyundai dealer.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
33
!
1. SRS airbag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
B180B01NF-L
1
2
3
Driver's airbag
Passenger's
airbag
WARNING:
To obtain maximum benefit from a pre-
tensioner seat belt:
o The seatbelt must be worn correctly and
adjusted to the proper position (see
pages 1-24 and 1-27). Please read and
follow all of the important information
and precautions about your vehicle’s
occupant safety features – including
seat belts and advanced airbags – that
are provided in this manual.
!
CAUTION:
Do not put anything near the buckle.
Placing objects near the buckle can ad-
versely affect the buckle pre-tensioner
and may increase the risk of personal
injury in the event of a collision.
If the system senses excessive seat belt
tension on the driver or passenger's seat
belt when the pre-tensioner activates, the
load limiter inside the pre-tensioner will
release some of the pressure on the
affected seat belt.
The seat belt pre-tensioner system consists
mainly of the following components. Their
locations are shown in the illustration:
B180B03NF-AAT
Pre-tensioner Seat Belt
Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with
driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner
seat belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner
is to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly
against the occupant's body in certain
frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat
belts can be activated alone or, where the
frontal collision is severe enough, together
with the airbags.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if the
occupant tries to lean forward too quickly,
the seat belt retractor will lock into position.
In certain frontal collisions, the pre-
tensioner will activate and pull the seat belt
into tighter contact against the occupant's
body. The buckle pre-tensioner (which is
installed in the buckle) will also pull the
seat belt into the buckle.
OMG035300
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
34
!
o Be sure you and your passengers
always wear seat belts and wear them
properly.
NOTE:
o Both the driver's and front
passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts
will be activated in certain frontal col-
lisions. The pre-tensioner seat belts
can be activated alone or, where the
frontal collision is severe enough,
together with the airbags.
The pre-tensioners will not be
activated if the seat belts are not being
worn at the time of the collision.
o When the pre-tensioner seat belts are
activated, a loud noise may be heard
and fine dust, which may appear to be
smoke, may be visible in the
passenger compartment. These are
normal operating conditions and are
not hazardous.
o Although it is harmless, the fine dust
may cause skin irritation and should
not be breathed for prolonged periods.
Wash all exposed skin areas thor-
oughly after an accident in which the
pre-tensioner seat belts were acti-
vated.
WARNING:
!
CAUTION:
o Because the sensor that activates
the SRS airbag is connected with the
pre-tensioner seat belt, the SRS airbag
warning light
on the instrument
panel will illuminate for approximately
6 seconds after the ignition key has
been turned to the "ON" position, and
then it should turn off.
o If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not
working properly, this warning light
will illuminate even if there is no
malfunction of the SRS airbag. If the
SRS airbag warning light does not
illuminate when the ignition key is
turned to "ON", or if it blinks for a
second and remains illuminated after
illuminating for approximately 6 sec-
onds, or if it illuminates while the ve-
hicle is being driven, please have an
authorized Hyundai dealer inspect the
pre-tensioner seat belt or SRS airbag
system as soon as possible.
!
WARNING:
o Pre-tensioners are designed to oper-
ate only one time. After activation,
pre-tensioner seat belts must be re-
placed. All seat belts, of any type,
should always be replaced after they
have been worn during a collision.
o The pre-tensioner seat belt assembly
mechanisms become hot during acti-
vation. Do not touch the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies for several min-
utes after they have been activated.
o Do not attempt to inspect or replace
the pre-tensioner seat belts yourself.
This must be done by an authorized
Hyundai dealer.
o Do not strike the pre-tensioner seat
belt assemblies.
o Do not attempt to service or repair the
pre-tensioner seat belt system in any
manner.
o Improper handling of the pre-tensioner
seat belt assemblies, and failure to heed
the warnings not to strike, modify, in-
spect, replace, service or repair the
pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies may
lead to improper operation or inadvert-
ent activation and serious injury.
o Always wear the seat belts when driv-
ing or riding in a motor vehicle.
o If the vehicle or pre-tensioner seat
belt must be discarded, contact an
authorised Hyundai dealer.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
35
B240D01NF-AAT
ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT (AIRBAG) SYSTEM
(SRS)
1. Driver's front airbag
2. Passenger's front airbag
3. Side impact airbag
4. Curtain airbag
HNF2052
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
36
The SRS uses sensors to gather informa-
tion about the driver's and front passenger's
seat position, the driver's and front
passenger's seat belt usage and impact
severity.
The driver's and front passenger's seat
track position sensors, which are installed
on the seat track, determine if the seats are
fore or aft of a reference position. The seat
belt buckle sensors determine if the driver
and front passenger's seat belts are
fastened. These sensors provide the ability
to control the SRS deployment based on
how close the driver's seat is to the steering
wheel, how close the passenger's seat is
to the instrument panel, whether or not the
seat belts are fastened, and how severe
the impact is.
The advanced SRS offers the ability to
control the airbag inflation with two levels.
A first stage level is provided for moderate-
severity impacts. A second stage level is
provided for more severe impacts.
According to the impact severity, seating
position and seat belt usage, the
SRSCM(SRS Control Module) controls the
airbag inflation. Failure to properly wear
seat belts can increase the risk or severity
of injury in an accident.
CAUTION:
If a seat track position sensor or an
occupant classification system is not
working properly, the SRS airbag warn-
ing light
on the instrument panel will
illuminate because the SRS airbag warn-
ing light is connected with the seat track
position sensor and the occupant clas-
sification system. If the SRS airbag warn-
ing light does not illuminate when the
ignition key is turned to the "ON" posi-
tion, remains illuminated after approxi-
mately 6 seconds when the ignition key
is turned to the "ON" position, or if it
illuminates while the vehicle is being
driven, have an authorized Hyundai
dealer inspect the advanced SRS airbag
system as soon as possible.
!
Additionally, your Hyundai is equipped
with an occupant classification system in
the front passenger's seat. The occupant
classification system detects the presence
of a passenger in the front passenger's
seat and will turn off the front passenger's
airbag under certain conditions. For more
detail, see "Occupant Classification Sys-
tem" later in this section.
B240A03NF-AAT
Driver's and Passenger's Front
Airbag
Your Hyundai is equipped with an ad-
vanced Supplemental Restraint (Air bag)
System and lap/shoulder belts at both the
driver and passenger seating positions.
The indications of the system's presence
are the letters "SRS AIRBAG" embossed
on the airbag pad cover in the steering
wheel and the passenger's side front panel
pad above the glove box.
The Hyundai SRS consists of airbags
installed under the pad covers in the center
of the steering wheel and the passenger's
side front panel above the glove box.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide the
vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger
with additional protection than that offered
by the seat belt system alone in case of a
frontal impact of sufficient severity.
Driver's Front Airbag
ONF038013
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
37
!!
WARNING:
Always use seat belts and child restraints
– every trip, every time, everyone!
Airbags inflate with considerable force
and in the blink of an eye. Seat belts help
keep occupants in proper position to
obtain maximum benefit from the airbag.
Even with advanced airbags, improperly
belted and unbelted occupants can be
severely injured when the airbag inflates.
Always follow the precautions about seat
belts, airbags and occupant safety
contained in this manual.
To reduce the chance of serious or fatal
injuries and receive the maximum safety
benefit from your restraint system:
o Never place a child in any child or
booster seat in the front seat (see
child restraints 1-27).
o ABC – Always Buckle Children in the
back seat. It is the safest place for
children of any age to ride.
o Front and side impact airbags can
injure occupants improperly
positioned in the front seats.
o Move your seat as far back as
practical from the front airbags, while
still maintaining control of the vehicle.
o Never sit or lean unnecessarily close
to the front or side airbags.
!
WARNING:
o Modification to the seat structure can
adversely affect the seat track position
sensor and cause the airbag to deploy
at a different level than should be pro-
vided.
o Do not place any objects underneath
the front seats as they could damage
the seat track position sensor or
interfere with the occupant classifica-
tion system.
o Do not place any objects that may cause
magnetic fields near the front seat.
These may cause a malfunction of the
seat track position sensor.
NOTE:
o Be sure to read information about the
SRS on the labels provided on the back-
side of the sun visor.
o Advanced airbags are combined with
pre-tensioner seat belts to help provide
enhanced occupant protection in frontal
crashes. Front airbags are not intended
to deploy in collisions in which sufficient
protection can be provided by the pre-
tensioner seat belt.
o If you are considering modification of
your vehicle due to a disability, please
contact the Hyundai Customer Assis-
tance Center at 1-800-633-5151.
o Never lean against the door or center
console – always sit in an upright posi-
tion.
o Do not allow an adult passenger to ride
in the front seat when the "Passenger
Airbag OFF" indicator is illuminated,
because the airbag will not deploy in the
event of a moderate or severe frontal
crash.
o Never place objects over or near any
airbag module (front or side impact
airbags), because these objects can
injure passengers in a crash.
o Never place covers, blankets or after-
market seat warmers on the passenger
seat as these may interfere with the
occupant classification system.
o Do not tamper or disconnect SRS wiring
or other components. Injuries could
result from inadvertent deployment or
failure of the airbag to deploy in a crash.
o If the SRS airbag warning light (see pg
1-52) remains illuminated while the ve-
hicle is being driven, have an autho-
rized Hyundai dealer inspect the airbag
system as soon as possible.
o Airbags can only be used once – have
an authorized Hyundai dealer replace
the airbag immediately after
deployment.
WARNING:
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
38
!
WARNING:
o Move your seat as far back as
practical from the front airbags, while
still maintaining control of the vehicle.
You and your passengers should
never sit or lean unnecessarily close
to the airbags. Improperly positioned
drivers and passengers can be
severely injured by inflating airbags.
o No objects should be placed over or
near the airbag modules on the steer-
ing wheel, instrument panel, and the
front passenger's panel above the
glove box, because any such object
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
crash severe enough to cause the
airbags to deploy.
o If the airbags deploy, they must be
replaced by an authorized Hyundai
dealer. Deployed airbags WILL NOT
inflate again and will provide no
protection in subsequent collisions.
o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS
wiring or other components of the
SRS system. Doing so could result in
injury, due to accidental deployment
of the airbags or by rendering the SRS
inoperative.
!
WARNING:
o The SRS is designed to deploy the
front airbags only when an impact is
sufficiently severe and when the
impact angle is less than 30° from the
forward longitudinal axis of the
vehicle. The front airbags will not
deploy in side, rear or rollover im-
pacts. Additionally, the airbags will
only deploy once. Seat belts must be
worn at all times.
o Front airbags are not intended to de-
ploy in side-impact, rear-impact or
rollover crashes. In addition, front
airbags will not deploy in frontal
crashes below the deployment
threshold.
!
WARNING:
o Even though your vehicle is equipped
with the occupant classification sys-
tem, do not install a child restraint
system in the front passenger seat
position. A child restraint system
must never be placed in the front seat.
The infant or child could be severely
injured or killed by an airbag deploy-
ment in case of an accident.
o Children younger than 13 years must
always be properly restrained in the
rear seat. Never allow children to ride
in the front passenger seat. If a child
over 13 must be seated in the front
seat, he or she must be properly belted
and the seat should be moved as far
back as possible.
o For maximum safety protection in all
types of crashes, all occupants in-
cluding the driver should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an
airbag is also provided at their seating
position to minimize the risk of severe
injury or death in the event of a crash.
Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close
to the airbag while the vehicle is in
motion.
B240A02NF
Rear impact
Side Impact
Rollover
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
39
12. Side Impact Airbag Module
13. Curtain Airbag Module
The SRSCM continually monitors all
elements while the ignition is "ON" to
determine if a frontal or near-frontal impact
is severe enough to require airbag
deployment or pre-tensioner seat belt
deployment.
The SRS airbag warning light on the in-
strument panel will illuminate for about 6
seconds after the ignition key is turned to
the "ON" position or after the engine is
started, after which the airbag warning
light should go out.
!
WARNING:
o Sitting improperly or out of position
can result in serious or fatal injury in
a crash. All occupants should sit
upright with the seat back in an upright
position, centered on the seat cushion
with their seat belt on, legs comfortably
extended and their feet on the floor
until the vehicle is parked and the
ignition key is removed.
o The SRS airbag system must deploy
very rapidly to provide protection in a
crash. If an occupant is out of position
because of not wearing a seat belt, the
airbag may forcefully contact the oc-
cupant causing serious or fatal
injuries.
B240B03NF-AAT
SRS Components and Functions
The SRS consists of the following compo-
nents:
1. Front Impact Sensor
2. "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" Indicator
(Front passenger's seat only)
3. SRS air bag warning light
4. Knee Bolster
5. Passenger's Airbag Module
6. Driver's Airbag Module
7. SRS Control Module (SRSCM)
8. Occupant Classification System
(Front passenger's seat only)
9. Driver's Seat Track Position Sensor
10. Side Impact Sensor
11. Retractor Pre-tensioner Assemblies
B240B01NF-B
B240B01L
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
40
B240B02L
Upon deployment, tear seams molded
directly into the pad covers will separate
under pressure from the expansion of the
airbags. Further opening of the covers
then allows full inflation of the airbags.
A fully inflated airbag, in combination with
a properly worn seat belt, slows the driver's
forward motion, reducing the risk of head
and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the airbag
immediately starts deflating, enabling the
driver to maintain forward visibility and the
ability to steer or operate other controls.
B240B03L
The airbag modules are located both in the
center of the steering wheel and in the front
passenger's panel above the glove box.
When the SRSCM detects a sufficiently
severe impact to the front of the vehicle, it
will automatically deploy the front airbags.
CAUTION:
o Do not install or place any accesso-
ries (drink holder, cassette holder,
sticker, etc.) on the front passenger's
panel above the glove box in a vehicle
with a passenger's airbag. Such ob-
jects may become dangerous pro-
jectiles and cause injury if the
passenger's airbag inflates.
o When installing a container of liquid
air freshener inside the vehicle, do
not place it near the instrument cluster
nor on the instrument panel surface.
If there is any leakage from the air
freshener onto these areas
(instrument cluster, instrument panel
or air ventilator), it may damage these
!
ONF038014
Passenger's Front Airbag
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
41
!
Passenger's Front Airbag
B240B05L
!
Always wash all exposed skin areas
thoroughly with lukewarm water and
a mild soap after an accident in which
the airbags were deployed.
o The SRS can function only when the
ignition key is in the "ON" position. If
the SRS airbag warning light does not
illuminate, or continuously remains
on after illuminating for about 6
seconds when the ignition key is
turned to the "ON" position, or after
the engine is started, comes on while
driving, the SRS is not working
properly. If this occurs, have your
vehicle immediately inspected by
your Hyundai dealer.
o Before you replace a fuse or discon-
nect a battery terminal, turn the igni-
tion key to the "LOCK" position and
remove the ignition key. Never remove
or replace the airbag related fuse(s)
when the ignition key is in the "ON"
position. Failure to heed this warning
will cause the SRS airbag warning
light to illuminate.
parts. If the liquid from the air fresh-
ener does leak onto these areas, wash
them with water immediately.
WARNING:
o If an airbag deploys, there may be a
loud noise followed by a fine dust
released in the vehicle. These
conditions are normal and are not
hazardous - the airbags are packed in
this fine powder. The dust generated
during airbag deployment may cause
skin or eye irritation as well as
aggravate asthma for some persons.
WARNING:
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYS-
TEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an occupant
classification system in the front
passenger's seat.
The occupant classification system is de-
signed to detect the presence of a prop-
erly-seated front passenger and deter-
mine if the passenger's front air bag should
be enabled (may inflate) or not. The driver's
front air bag is not affected or controlled by
the occupant classification system.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
42
B990A04NF-AAT
Main components of occupant clas-
sification system
o A detection device located within the
front passenger seat cushion.
o Electronic system to determine whether
passenger air bag systems (both front
and side) should be activated or deac-
tivated.
o A warning light located on the instru-
ment panel which illuminates the words
"PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicat-
ing the front passenger air bag system
is deactivated.
o The instrument panel air bag warning
light is interconnected with the occu-
pant classification system.
If the front passenger seat is occupied by
a person that the system determines to be
of adult size, and he/she sits properly (sit-
ting upright with the seatback in an upright
position, centered on the seat cushion with
their seat belt on, legs comfortably ex-
tended and their feet on the floor), the
"PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator
will be turned off and the front passenger's
air bag will be able to inflate, if necessary,
in frontal crashes.
You will find the "PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" indicator on the center facia panel.
This system detects the conditions 1~4 in
the following table and activates or
deactivates the front passenger air bag
based on these conditions.
ONF038024N
Always be sure that you and all vehicle
occupants are seated and restrained prop-
erly (sitting upright with the seat in an
upright position, centered on the seat cush-
ion, with the person’s legs comfortably
extended, feet on the floor, and wearing
the safety belt properly) for the most effec-
tive protection by the air bag and the safety
belt.
o The OCS (Occupant Classification Sys-
tem) may not function properly if the
passenger takes actions which can
defeat the detection system. These in-
clude:
(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.
(2) Leaning against the door or center
console.
(3) Sitting towards the sides or the front
of the seat.
(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or
resting them on other locations which
reduce the passenger weight on the
front seat.
(5) Improperly wearing the safety belt.
(6) Reclining the seat back.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
43
!
Condition and operation in the front pas-
senger occupant classification system
WARNING:
Riding in an improper position or placing
weight on the front passenger's seat
when it is unoccupied by a passenger
adversely affects the occupant classifi-
cation system (OCS).
o Never place feet on the front passen-
ger seatback.
OVQ036014N
o Never put a heavy load in the front
passenger seat or seatback pocket.
OVQ036013N
Front
passenger
airbag
Activated
Deactivated
Deactivated
Activated
Condition
detected by
the occupant
classification
system
1. Adult*
1
2. Child*
2
or
child restraint
system*
3
3. Unoccupied
4. There is a
malfunction
in the
system
SRS
warning
light
Off
Off
Off
On
"Passenger
air bag off"
indicator light
Off
On
On
Off
*1)The system judges a person of adult
size as an adult. When a smaller adult
sits in the front passenger seat, the
system may recognize him/her as a
child depending on his/her physique
and posture.
*2)Do not allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat. When a larger child
who has outgrown a child restraint sys-
tem sits in the front passenger seat, the
system may recognize him/her as an
adult depending on his/her physique
or posture.
*3)Never install a child restraint system on
the front passenger seat.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
44
When an adult is seated in the front passen-
ger seat, if the "PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" indicator is on, turn the ignition key to
"LOCK" and ask the passenger to sit prop-
erly (sitting upright with the seat back in an
upright position, centered on the seat cush-
ion with their seat belt on, legs comfortably
extended and their feet on the floor). Restart
the engine and have the person remain in
that position. This will allow the system to
detect the person and to enable the pas-
senger air bag.
o Never excessively recline the front
passenger seatback.
1KMN3665
1KMN3662
o Never place feet on the dashboard.
o Never sit with hips shifted towards
the front of the seat.
1KMN3663
1KMN3664
o Never lean on the door or center con-
sole.
o Never sit on one side of the front
passenger seat.
Proper position
B990A01O
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
45
!
!
NOTE:
The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indi-
cator illuminates for about 4 seconds
after the ignition key is turned to the
"ON" position or after the engine is
started. If the front passenger seat is
occupied, the occupant classification
sensor will then classify the front pas-
senger after several more seconds.
!
WARNING:
If the occupant classification system is
not working properly, the SRS air bag
warning light on the instrument panel will
illuminate because the passenger's front
air bag is connected with the occupant
classification system. If there is a mal-
function of the occupant classification
system, the "PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF" indicator will not illuminate and the
passenger's front air bag will inflate in
frontal impact crashes even if there is no
occupant in the front passenger's seat.
If the SRS air bag warning light does not
illuminate when the ignition key is turned
to the "ON" position, remains illumi-
nated after approximately 6 seconds
when the ignition key is turned to the
"ON" position, or if it illuminates while
the vehicle is being driven, have an au-
thorized Hyundai dealer inspect the oc-
cupant classification system and the
SRS air bag system as soon as possible.
If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indica-
tor is still on, ask the passenger to move to
the rear seat.
WARNING:
Do not allow an adult passenger to ride
in the front seat when the "PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF" indicator is illuminated,
because the airbag will not deploy in the
event of a crash. If the "PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF" indicator remains illumi-
nated after the passenger repositions
themselves properly and the car is re-
started, Hyundai recommends that pas-
senger move to the rear seat because
the passenger's front airbag will not de-
ploy.
The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indi-
cator will not change according to the
occupants posture after the vehicle has
been running for 30 seconds. Front seat
passengers must stay properly seated
to avoid serious injury from a deploying
airbag. For more information see page
1-44.
WARNING:
Do not put a heavy load in the front
passenger seatback pocket or on the
front passenger seat. Do not hang onto
the front passenger seat. Do not hang
any items such as seatback table on the
front passenger seatback. Do not place
feet on the front passenger seatback.
Do not place any items under the front
passenger seat. Any of these could in-
terfere with proper sensor operation.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
46
!
WARNING:
o Even though your vehicle is equipped
with the occupant classification sys-
tem, never install a child restraint
system in the front passenger's seat.
A deploying air bag can forcefully
strike a child resulting in serious inju-
ries or death. Any child age 12 and
under should ride in the rear seat.
Children too large for child restraints
should use the available lap/shoulder
belts. No matter what type of crash,
children of all ages are safer when
restrained in the rear seat.
o If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"
indicator is illuminated when the front
passenger's seat is occupied by an
adult and he/she sits properly (sitting
upright with the seatback in an upright
position, centered on the seat cushion
with their seat belt on, legs comfortably
extended and their feet on the floor),
have that person sit in the rear seat.
o Do not modify or replace the front
passenger seat. Don't place anything
on or attach anything such as a blanket
or after market seat heater to the
front passenger seat. This can
adversely affect the occupant classi-
fication system.
o Do not sit on sharp objects such as tools
when occupying the front passenger
seat. This can adversely affect the occu-
pant classification system.
o Do not use accessory seat covers on
the front seats.
o Accident statistics show that children
are safer if they are restrained in the
rear, as opposed to the front seat. It is
recommended that child restraints be
secured in a rear seat, including an infant
riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child
riding in a forward-facing child seat and
an older child riding in a booster seat.
o Air bags can only be used once – have
an authorized Hyundai dealer replace
the air bag immediately after
deployment.
o A smaller-stature adult who is not seated
correctly (for example: seat excessively
reclined, leaning on the door or center
console or hips shifted forward in the
seat) can cause a condition where the
advanced frontal air bag system senses
less weight than if the occupant were
seated properly (sitting upright with the
seatback in an upright position, cen-
tered on the seat cushion with their seat
belt on, legs comfortably extended and
their feet on the floor). This condition can
result in an adult potentially being
misclassified and illumination of the
"PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator.
B990B05Y-AAT
Side Impact Airbag
Your Hyundai is equipped with a side
impact airbag in each front seat. The
purpose of the airbag is to provide the
vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger
with additional protection than that offered
by the seat belt alone. The side impact
airbags are designed to deploy only during
certain side-impact collisions, depending
on the crash severity, angle, speed and
point of impact. The side impact airbags
are not designed to deploy in all side
impact situations.
B990B02LZ
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
47
!
o For best protection from the side im-
pact airbag system and to avoid being
injured by the deploying side impact
airbag, both front seat occupants
should sit in an upright position with
the seat belt properly fastened. The
driver's hands should be placed on
the steering wheel at the 9:00 and
3:00 positions. The passenger's arms
and hands should be placed on their
laps.
o Do not use any accessory seat covers.
o Use of seat covers could reduce or
prevent the effectiveness of the sys-
tem.
o Do not install any accessories on the
side or near the side impact airbag.
o Do not place any objects over the
airbag or between the airbag and
yourself.
o Do not place any objects (an umbrella,
bag, etc.) between the front door and
the front seat. Such objects may be-
come dangerous projectiles and
cause injury if the supplemental side
impact airbag inflates.
o To prevent unexpected deployment
of the side impact airbag that may
result in personal injury, avoid impact
to the side impact sensor when the
ignition key is on.
WARNING:
WARNING:
o The side impact airbag is
supplemental to the driver's and the
passenger's seat belt systems and is
not a substitute for them. Therefore
your seat belts must be worn at all
times while the vehicle is in motion.
The airbags deploy only in certain
side impact conditions severe enough
to cause significant injury to the
vehicle occupants.
!
ONF038022
Side impact
sensor
B990C01LZ-GAT
Curtain Airbag
Curtain airbags are located along both
sides of the roof rails above the front and
rear doors.
They are designed to help protect the
heads of the front seat occupants and the
rear outboard seat occupants in certain
side impact collisions.
The curtain airbags are designed to deploy
only during certain side impact collisions,
depending on the crash severity, angle,
speed and impact. The curtain airbags are
not designed to deploy in all side impact
situations, collisions from the front or rear
of the vehicle or in most rollover situations.
HLZ2051
Curtain Airbag
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
48
o If the airbags inflate, they must be
replaced by an authorized Hyundai
dealer.
o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS
wiring, or other components of the
SRS system. Doing so could result in
injury, due to accidental inflation of
the airbags or by rendering the SRS
inoperative.
o If components of the airbag system
must be discarded, or if the vehicle
must be scrapped, certain safety
precautions must be observed. Your
Hyundai dealer knows these precau-
tions and can give you the necessary
information. Failure to follow these
precautions and procedures could in-
crease the risk of personal injury.
o If your car was flooded and has soaked
carpeting or water on flooring, you
shouldn't try to start the engine; have
the car towed to an authorized Hyundai
dealer.
!
WARNING:
B240C03NF-AAT
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-free and
so there are no parts you can safely service
by yourself. If the SRS airbag warning light
does not illuminate, or continuously re-
mains on, have your vehicle immediately
inspected by your Hyundai dealer.
Any work on the SRS system, such as
removing, installing, repairing, or any work
on the steering wheel must be performed
by a qualified Hyundai technician. Improper
handling of the SRS system may result in
serious personal injury.
WARNING:
o Do not install a child restraint system
in the front passenger seat position.
A child restraint system must never
be placed in the front seat. The infant
or child could be severely injured by
an airbag deployment in case of an
accident.
o Modification to SRS components or
wiring, including the addition of any
kind of badges to the pad covers or
modifications to the body structure,
can adversely affect SRS perfor-
mance and lead to possible injury.
o For cleaning the airbag pad covers,
use only a soft, dry cloth or one which
has been moistened with plain water.
Solvents or cleaners could adversely
affect the airbag covers and proper
deployment of the system.
o No objects should be placed over or
near the airbag modules on the
steering wheel, instrument panel, and
the front passenger's panel above
the glove box, because any such
object could cause harm if the vehicle
is in a crash severe enough to cause
the airbags to inflate.
!
HSM393
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
49
B240D02NF-AAT
Additional Safety Precautions
o Never let passengers ride in the cargo
area (trunk) or on top of a folded-down
back seat. All occupants should sit
upright, fully back in their seats with
their seat belts on and their feet on the
floor.
o Passengers should not move out of or
change seats while the vehicle is mov-
ing. A passenger who is not wearing a
seat belt during a crash or emergency
stop can be thrown against the inside of
the vehicle, against other occupants, or
out of the vehicle.
o Each seat belt is designed to restrain
one occupant. If more than one person
uses the same seat belt, they could be
seriously injured or killed in a collision.
o Do not use any accessories on seat
belts. Devices claiming to improve oc-
cupant comfort or reposition the seat
belt can reduce the protection provided
by the seat belt and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.
o Passengers should not place hard or
sharp objects between themselves
and the airbags. Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap or in your mouth can
result in injuries if an airbag inflates.
o Keep occupants away from the airbag
covers. All occupants should sit upright,
fully back in their seats with their seat
belts on and their feet on the floor. If
occupants are too close to the airbag
covers, they could be injured if the
airbags inflate.
o Do not attach or place objects on or
near the airbag covers. Any object
attached to or placed on the front or side
impact airbag covers could interfere
with the proper operation of the airbags.
o Do not modify the front seats. Modifi-
cation of the front seats could interfere
with the operation of the supplemental
restraint system sensing components
or side impact airbags.
o Do not place items under the front
seats. Placing items under the front
seats could interfere with the operation
of the supplemental restraint system
sensing components and wiring
harnesses.
!
WARNING:
o Sitting improperly or out of position
can cause occupants to be shifted too
close to a deploying airbag, strike the
interior structure or be thrown from
the vehicle resulting in serious injury
or death.
o Always sit upright with the seatback
in an upright position, centered on the
seat cushion with your seat belt on,
legs comfortably extended and your
feet on the floor.
o Never hold an infant or child on your
lap. The infant or child could be seriously
injured or killed in the event of a crash.
All infants and children should be
properly restrained in appropriate child
safety seats or seat belts in the rear seat.
Adding Equipment to or Modifying
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle.
If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle's frame, bumper system, front
end or side sheet metal or ride height, this
may affect the operation of your vehicle's
airbag system.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
50
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATOR
LIGHTS
B260A02NF-AAT
ONF048038N
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
51
1. Tachometer
2. Low Tire Pressure Telltale
3. TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) Malfunction Telltale
4. Door Ajar Warning Light
5. Seat Belt Warning Light (Driver's side)
6. High Beam Indicator Light
7. Turn Signal Indicator Lights
8. Speedometer
9. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Lights
(If Installed)
10. Front Fog Light Indicator Light (If Installed)
11. ABS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI) (If Installed)
12. Coolant Temperature Gauge
13. Fuel Gauge
14. Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light
15. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light
16. Charging System Warning Light
17. Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level Warning Light
18. Check Engine - Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
19. SRS (Airbag) Warning Light
20. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light (If Installed)
21. Odometer/ Trip Odometer/ Trip Computer (If Installed)
22. CRUISE Indicator Light
23. Cruise SET Indicator Light
24. Trunk Lid Open Warning Light
25. Low Fuel Warning Light
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
52
WARNING AND INDICATOR
LIGHTS
B260B01JM-AAT
SRS (Airbag) Warning Light
The SRS warning light comes on for about
6 seconds after the key is turned to the "ON"
position or after the engine is started, after
which it will go out.
This light also comes on when the SRS is
not working properly. If the airbag warning
light does not come on, or continuously
remains on after operating for about 6
seconds when you turned the ignition key
to the "ON" position or started the engine,
or if it comes on while driving, have the
SRS inspected by an authorized Hyundai
dealer.
B260D01A-AAT
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The blinking green arrows on the
instrument panel show the direction
indicated by the turn signals. If the arrow
comes on but does not blink, blinks more
rapidly than normal, or does not illuminate
at all, a malfunction in the turn signal system
is indicated. Your dealer should be
consulted for repairs.
The driver's seat belt warning light and
chime will activate to the following table
when the ignition switch is in "ON" position.
B265E01TG-AAT
Seat Belt Warning Light and
Chime (Driver's Side)
*1) Warning pattern repeats 11 times with
interval 24 seconds. If the driver's seat
belt is buckled, the light will stop within
6 seconds and chime will stop immedi-
ately.
*2) The light will stop within 6 seconds and
chime will stop immediately.
Conditions Warning Pattern
Seat Belt Vehicle Speed Light-Blink Chime-Sound
Unbuckled
Buckled
Unbuckled
Above 6 mph
(10 km/h)
Below 3 mph
(5 km/h)
6 seconds
6 seconds None
6 seconds
6 seconds *1)
Stop *2)
6 seconds None
Buckled
Unbuckled
Below 3 mph
(5 km/h)
3 mph~6 mph
Above 6 mph
(10 km/h)
6 sec. on / 24 sec. off
(11 times)
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
53
The front passenger's seat belt warning
light will activate to the following table
when the ignition switch is in "ON" position.
Seat Belt Warning Light
(Front Passenger's Side)
*1) The seat belt warning light will go off if
the vehicle speed decreases below 3
mph (5 km/h). And if the vehicle speed
increases above 3 mph (5 km/h), the
warning light will blink again.
NOTE:
o You can find the front passenger's
seat belt warning light on the center
fascia panel.
o Although the front passenger seat is
not occupied, the seat belt warning
light will blink for 6 seconds.
o The seat belt warning light can blink
when a briefcase or purse is placed
on the front passenger seat.
Conditions Warning Pattern
Seat Belt Vehicle Speed Light-Blink
Unbuckled
Buckled
6 seconds
Continuously
6 seconds
Continuously *1)
None
Unbuckled
Above 6mph
(10 km/h)
Buckled
Unbuckled
Above 6mph
(10 km/h)
Below 6mph
(10 km/h)
B260F01A-AAT
High Beam Indicator Light
The high beam indicator light comes on
whenever the headlights are switched to
the high beam or flash position.
B260A01Y-GAT
Front Fog Light Indicator Light
(If Installed)
This fog indicator light comes on when the
ignition key is turned to the "ON" position
and the front fog light switch is on.
B260G01A-AAT
Low Oil Pressure Warning
Light
CAUTION:
If the low oil pressure warning light stays
on while the engine is running, serious
engine damage may result. The oil pres-
sure warning light comes on whenever
there is insufficient oil pressure. In nor-
mal operation, it should come on when
the ignition switch is turned on, then go
out when the engine is started. If the oil
pressure warning light stays on while
the engine is running, there is a serious
malfunction.
If this happens, stop the car as soon as
it is safe to do so, turn off the engine and
check the oil level. If the oil level is low,
fill the engine oil to the proper level and
start the engine again. If the light stays
on with the engine running, turn the en-
gine off immediately. In any instance
where the oil light stays on when the
engine is running, the engine should be
checked by a Hyundai dealer before the
car is driven again.
!
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
54
The brake fluid level warning light indi-
cates that the brake fluid level in the brake
master cylinder is low and hydraulic brake
fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 speci-
fications should be added. After adding
fluid, if no other trouble is found, the car
should be immediately and carefully driven
to a Hyundai dealer for inspection. If further
trouble is experienced, the vehicle should
not be driven at all but taken to a dealer by
a professional towing service.
Your Hyundai is equipped with dual-
diagonal braking systems. This means
you still have braking on two wheels even
if one of the dual systems should fail. With
only one of the dual systems working,
more than normal pedal travel and greater
pedal pressure are required to stop the
car. Also, the car will not stop in as short a
distance with only half of the brake system
working. If the brakes fail while you are
driving, shift to a lower gear for additional
engine braking and stop the car as soon as
it is safe to do so.
B260J01NF-AAT
Charging System Warning
Light
The charging system warning light should
come on when the ignition is turned on,
then go out when the engine is running. If
the light stays on while the engine is
running, there is a malfunction in the
electrical charging system. If the light comes
on while you are driving, have the system
checked by your Hyundai dealer as soon
as possible.
B260K01S-AAT
Trunk Lid Open Warning Light
This light remains on unless the trunk lid is
completely closed and latched.
!
B260H02A-AAT
Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid
Level Warning Light
WARNING:
If you suspect brake trouble, have your
brakes checked by a Hyundai dealer as
soon as possible. Driving your car with
a problem in either the brake electrical
system or brake hydraulic system is
dangerous, and could result in a serious
injury or death.
Warning Light Operation
The parking brake/brake fluid level
warning light should come on when the
parking brake is applied and the ignition
switch is turned to "ON" or "START". After
the engine is started, the light should go
out when the parking brake is released.
If the parking brake is not applied, the
warning light should come on when the
ignition switch is turned to "ON" or "START",
then go out when the engine starts. If the
light comes on at any other time, you should
slow the vehicle and bring it to a complete
stop in a safe location off the roadway.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
55
B260L02HP-GAT
Door Ajar Warning Light and
Chime
The door ajar warning light warns you that
a door is not completely closed and the
chime warns you that the key is in the
ignition switch.
NOTE :
The warning chime only sounds
whenever the key is in the ignition switch
and the driver's side front door is open
simultaneously. The chime sounds until
the key is removed from the ignition
switch or the driver's side front door is
closed.
B260M01A-AAT
Low Fuel Level Warning Light
The low fuel level warning light comes on
when the fuel tank is approaching empty.
When it comes on, you should add fuel as
soon as possible. Driving with the fuel
level warning light on or with the fuel level
below "E" can cause the engine to misfire
and damage the catalytic converter.
B260N02A-AAT
Check Engine - Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)
This light illuminates when there is a
malfunction of an exhaust gas related
component, and the system is not
functioning properly so that the exhaust
gas regulation values are not satisfied. This
light will also illuminate when the ignition key
is turned to the "ON" position, and will go out
in a few seconds after the engine is started.
If it illuminates while driving, or does not
illuminate when the ignition key is turned to
the "ON" position, take your car to your
nearest authorized Hyundai dealer and have
the system checked.
!
B260P02Y-GAT
ABS Service Reminder
Indicator (SRI) (If Installed)
When the key is turned to the "ON" position,
the Anti-Lock Brake System indicator will
come on and then go off in a few seconds.
If the ABS SRI remains on, comes on while
driving, or does not come on when the key
is turned to the "ON" position, this indicates
that there may be a problem with the ABS.
If this occurs, have your vehicle checked
by your Hyundai dealer as soon as
possible. The normal braking system will
still be operational, but without the
assistance of the anti-lock brake system.
WARNING:
If both the ABS SRI and Parking Brake/
Brake fluid level warning lights remain
"ON" or come on while driving, there
may be a problem with E.B.D. (Electronic
Brake Force Distribution).
If this occurs, avoid sudden stops and
have your vehicle checked by your
Hyundai dealer as soon as possible.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
56
B265C01NF-AAT
Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) Indicator Lights
(If Installed)
The electronic stability control indicators
change operation according to the ignition
switch position and whether the system is
in operation or not.
They will illuminate when the ignition key
is turned to the "ON" position, but should go
out after three seconds. If the ESC or ESC-
OFF indicator stays on, take your car to
your authorized Hyundai dealer and have
the system checked. See section 2 for
more information about the ESC.
B260Q02NF-GAT
CRUISE Indicator Light
The cruise indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the cruise
control ON/OFF button on the steering
wheel is pulled.
The indicator light turns off when the cruise
control ON/OFF button is pushed again.
Information about the use of cruise control
begins on page 1-92.
B260R01NF-GAT
Cruise SET Indicator Light
The Cruise SET indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster is illuminated when the cruise
control "COAST/SET" or "RES/ACCEL" switch
is pushed. The Cruise SET indicator light
does not illuminate when the cruise control
"CANCEL" switch is pushed or the system is
disengaged. To disengage the cruise control
system, refer to "To cancel the cruise speed"
on page 1-93.
B260S01NF-GAT
Low Windshield Washer Fluid
Level Warning Light
The low windshield washer fluid warning light
comes on when the washer fluid reservoir is
approaching empty. When it comes on, add
washer fluid at your earliest opportunity.
B270A01O-AAT
BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING
SOUND
The front and rear disc brake pads have wear
indicators that should make a high-pitched
squealing or scraping noise when new pads
are needed. The sound may come and go or
be heard all the time when the vehicle is
moving. It may also be heard when the brake
pedal is pushed down firmly. Excessive rotor
damage will result if the worn pads are not
replaced. See your Hyundai dealer immedi-
ately.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
57
!
!
WARNING:
Significantly low tire pressure makes
the vehicle unstable and can contribute
to loss of vehicle control and increased
braking distances.
Continued driving on low pressure tires
will cause the tires to overheat and fail.
B260W02JM-GAT
Low tire pressure telltale
The low tire pressure telltale comes on for
3 seconds after the ignition key is turned to
the "ON" position.
If the warning light does not come on, the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System is not
working properly. If this occurs, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized Hyundai
dealer as soon as possible.
This warning light will also illuminate if one
or more of your tires are significantly under-
inflated. You should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible. If the warning
light illuminates while driving, reduce
vehicle speed immediately and stop the
vehicle. Avoid hard braking and overcor-
recting at the steering wheel. Inflate the
tires to the proper pressure as indicated on
the vehicle’s tire information placard.
After adjusting the tire pressure of each
wheel correctly, if the low pressure telltale
light stays “ON” continuously, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System is not working
properly. If this occurs, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized Hyundai dealer
as soon as possible.
B265W02JM-GAT
TPMS (Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System) malfunction
indicator
TPMS malfunction indicator comes on for
3 seconds after the ignition key is turned to
the "ON" position. If the warning light does
not come on, or continuously remains on
after coming on for about 3 seconds when
you turned the ignition key to the "ON"
position, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System is not working properly. If this
occurs, have your vehicle checked by an
authorized Hyundai dealer as soon as
possible.
The warning light also comes on and stays
on when there is a problem with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System.
If this happens, the system may not monitor
the tire pressure. Have the system checked
by an authorized Hyundai dealer as soon
as possible.
WARNING:
o The TPMS cannot alert you to severe
and sudden tire damage caused by
external factors.
o If you feel any vehicle instability, im-
mediately take your foot off the
accelerator and slowly move to a safe
position off the road.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
58
!
B290A03A-AAT
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
WARNING:
Never remove the radiator cap when the
engine is hot. The engine coolant is under
pressure and could erupt and cause
severe burns. Wait until the engine is
cool before adding coolant to the
reservoir.
The normal range is approximately in the
middle between "H" and "C". If it moves
across the dial to "H" (HOT), pull over and
stop as soon as possible and turn off the
engine. Then open the hood and, after the
engine has cooled, check the coolant level
(See "If the engine overheats" on the page
3-4.) and the water pump drive belt. If you
suspect cooling system trouble, have your
cooling system checked by a Hyundai dealer
as soon as possible.
ONF048043N
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
B280A02NF-AAT
FUEL GAUGE
The needle on the gauge indicates the
approximate fuel level in the fuel tank. The
fuel capacity is given in section 9.
NOTE:
The " " symbol means, the fuel filler
lid is located on the left side of the ve-
hicle.
ONF048044N
CAUTION:
Avoid driving with a very low fuel level. If
you run out of fuel, it could cause the
engine to misfire and result in excessive
loading of the catalytic converter.
!
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
59
B300A02A-AAT
SPEEDOMETER
Your Hyundai's speedometer is calibrated
in miles per hour and kilometers per hour.
ONF048040N
B310B01NF-AAT
ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER
1. Odometer
The odometer records the total distance
traveled in miles. You will also find the
odometer useful to determine when
periodic maintenance should be
performed.
NOTE:
Federal law forbids alteration of the odom-
eter of any vehicle with the intent to
change the mileage registered on the
odometer. The alteration may void your
warranty coverage.
ONF048051N
B330A03A-AAT
TACHOMETER
The tachometer registers the speed of
your engine in revolutions per minute (rpm).
CAUTION:
The engine should not be raced to such
a speed that the needle enters the red
zone on the tachometer face. This can
cause severe engine damage and may
void your warranty coverage.
!
ONF048042N
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
60
ONF048048N
ONF048050
To shift from TRIP A to TRIP B, press the
TRIP switch.
TRIP A: Distance you have traveled from
your origination point to a first
destination.
TRIP B: Distance from the first destina-
tion to the final destination.
When the RESET switch is pressed for 1
second, the trip odometer will reset to 0.
Pushing in the TRIP switch behind the left
side of the steering wheel when the igni-
tion switch is turned "ON" will display two
trip odometers in miles.
ONF048049
2. Trip Odometer
(Without Trip Computer)
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
61
Pushing in the TRIP switch when the ignition
switch is in "ON" position changes the
display as follows;
ONF048049
TRIP SWITCH RESET SWITCH
Push in the RESET switch more than 1
second to initialize the displayed informa-
tion such as tripmeter, average fuel con-
sumption and drive time.
ONF048050
TRIP COMPUTER
B400B01NF-AAT
(If Installed)
The trip computer is a microcomputer-
controlled driver information gauge that
displays information related to driving, such
as estimated tripmeter, drive time, average
fuel consumption and distance to empty
on the LCD.
TRIPMETER A
TRIPMETER B
DISTANCE TO EMPTY
AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION
DRIVE TIME
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
62
2. Distance to Empty (Miles)
o When the remaining distance is below
30 miles (50 km), “---” will be displayed
and the distance to empty indicator will
blink.
NOTE:
o The distance to empty can differ from
the actual tripmeter according to
driving conditions.
o The distance to empty can vary ac-
cording to the driving conditions, driv-
ing pattern or vehicle speed.
o This mode indicates the estimated dis-
tance to empty from the current fuel
level in the fuel tank.
o The trip computer may not register ad-
ditional fuel if less than 1.36 gallons (6
liters) of fuel are added to the vehicle.
ONF048054N
ONF048053N
1. Tripmeter (Miles)
o This mode indicates the total distance
travelled since the last tripmeter reset.
Total distance is also reset to zero if the
battery is disconnected.
o Pressing the RESET switch for more
than 1 second, when the tripmeter is
being displayed, clears the tripmeter to
zero.
o The meter's working range is from 0 to
999.9 miles.
ONF048048N
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
63
MULTI-FUNCTION LIGHT
SWITCH
B340A01A-AAT
COMBINATION TURN SIGNAL,
HEADLIGHT AND HIGH-BEAM
SWITCH
Turn Signal Operation
Pulling down on the lever causes the turn
signals on the left side of the car to blink.
Pushing upwards on the lever causes the
turn signals on the right side of the car to
blink. As the turn is completed, the lever
will automatically return to the center
position and turn off the turn signals at the
same time. If either turn signal indicator
light blinks more rapidly than usual, goes
on but does not blink, or does not go on at
all, there is a malfunction in the system.
Check for a burned-out fuse or bulb or see
your Hyundai dealer.
4. Drive Time
o This mode indicates the total time from
the starting of the engine to the ignition
key "OFF" after resetting. When the
RESET switch is pushed, it will be
initialized to '0:00'. If the ignition switch
is turned to OFF for more than 2 hours,
it will be reset automatically.
o The drive time will be initialized to '0:00'
after being displayed to '99:59'.
ONF048055N
3. Average Fuel Consumption (MPG)
o This mode calculates the average fuel
consumption from the total fuel used
and the distance since the last average
consumption reset.
o The total fuel used is calculated from the
fuel consumption input.
o Average fuel consumption is reset to
zero if the battery is disconnected.
o To reset the average fuel consumption
to zero (--), press the RESET switch for
more than 1 second. If the fuel is refilled
more than 1.36 gallons (6 liters), it will
be reset automatically.
o When you drive 0.5 mile and less after
resetting, the average fuel consumption
will be displayed to '--'.
ONF048122N
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
64
B340C04A-AAT
Headlight Switch
To operate the headlights, turn the barrel
on the end of the multi-function switch. The
first position turns on the parking lights,
sidelights, tail lights and instrument panel
lights. The second position turns on the
headlights.
NOTE:
The ignition must be in the "ON" position
to turn on the headlights.
ONF048060
Parking Light Auto Off
o The purpose of this feature is to prevent
the battery from being discharged. The
system automatically turns off the head-
lights and parking lights when the driver
removes the ignition key and opens the
driver-side door.
o With this feature, the parklight will be
turned off automatically if the driver parks
on the side of road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on when
the ignition key is removed, perform the
following :
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and ON
again using the light switch on the
steering column.
B340B01A-AAT
Lane Change Signal
To indicate a lane change, move the lever
up or down to a point where it begins
flashing.
The lever will automatically return to the
center position when released.
ONF048064
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
65
B340E01A-AAT
Headlight Flasher
To flash the headlights, pull the switch
lever toward you, then release it. The
headlights can be flashed even though the
headlight switch is in the "OFF" position.
ONF048062
B340G01LZ-AAT
Auto Light (If Installed)
ONF048061
To operate the automatic light feature, turn
the barrel on the end of the multi-function
switch. If you set the multi-function switch
to "AUTO", the tail lights and headlights
will be turned automatically on or off ac-
cording to external illumination conditions.
NOTE:
Turn the lights manually in foggy, cloudy
and rainy conditions.
B340D01A-AAT
High-beam Switch
To turn on the headlight high beams, push
the lever forward (away from you). The
High Beam Indicator Light will come on at
the same time. For low beams, pull the
lever back toward you.
ONF048063
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
66
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND
WASHER SWITCH
B350A01A-AAT
The windshield wiper switch has three
positions:
1. Intermittent wiper operation
2. Low-speed operation
3. High-speed operation
NOTE:
To prevent damage to the wiper system,
do not attempt to wipe away heavy accu-
mulations of snow or ice. Accumulated
snow and ice should be removed
manually. If there is only a light layer of
snow or ice, operate the heater in the
defrost mode to melt the snow or ice
before using the wiper.
ONF049066N
(1)
(2)
(3)
FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH
B360B01L-AAT
(If Installed)
To turn on the front fog lights, place the
switch (1) in the "ON" position. They will
light when the headlight switch is in the
second position.
NOTE:
If you turn on the headlight high beams,
the front fog lights will be turned off.
ONF048065
NOTE:
o Never place anything over the sensor
(1) located on the instrument panel to
ensure better auto light system con-
trol.
o Don't clean the sensor using a win-
dow cleaner.
o If your vehicle has window tint or other
types of coating on the windshield, the
AUTO light system may not work prop-
erly.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
67
B350C01NF-AAT
Adjustable Intermittent Wiper
Operation
To use the intermittent wiper feature, place
the wiper switch in the "INT" position. With
the switch in this position, the interval
between wipes can be varied from
approximately 1 to 18 seconds by turning
the interval adjuster barrel (1).
ONF049066N
Mist Wiper Operation
If a single wipe is desired to clear mist,
push the windshield wiper and washer
control lever upwards.
B350B01O-GAT
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the windshield washer, pull the
wiper/washer lever toward the steering
wheel. When the washer lever is operated,
the wipers automatically make two passes
across the windshield. The washer
continues to operate until the lever is
released.
NOTE:
o Do not operate the washer more than
15 seconds at a time or when the fluid
reservoir is empty.
o In icy or freezing weather, be sure the
wiper blades are not frozen to the
glass prior to operating the wipers.
o In areas where water freezes in winter,
use windshield washer antifreeze.
ONF049068N
ONF049066N
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
68
ONF048071N
ONF048072
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the rear
window defroster to operate.
CAUTION:
Do not clean the inner side of the rear
window glass with an abrasive type of
glass cleaner or use a scraper to remove
foreign deposits from the inner surface
of the glass as this may cause damage
to the defroster elements.
!
B380A02NF-AAT
The rear window defroster switch also
activates the outside rearview mirror
heaters.
The rear window defroster and heated
outside rearview mirrors are turned on by
pushing in the switch. To turn the defroster
off, push the switch a second time. The rear
window defroster automatically turns itself
off after about 20 minutes. To restart the
defroster cycle, push in the switch again
after it has turned itself off.
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER
SWITCH
With Manual A/C
With Automatic A/C
HAZARD WARNING SYSTEM
B370A01A-AAT
The hazard warning system should be
used whenever you find it necessary to
stop the car in a hazardous location. When
you must make such an emergency stop,
always pull off the road as far as possible.
The hazard warning lights are turned on by
pushing in the hazard switch. This causes
all turn signal lights to blink. The hazard
warning lights will operate even though
the key is not in the ignition.
To turn the hazard warning lights off, push
the switch a second time.
ONF048057
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
69
INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT
CONTROL (RHEOSTAT)
B410A01A-AAT
The instrument panel lights can be made
brighter or dimmer by turning the instrument
panel light control knob.
CIGARETTE LIGHTER
B420A02A-AAT
For the cigarette lighter to work, the key
must be in the "ACC" position or the "ON"
position.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the
way into its socket. When the element has
heated, the lighter will pop out to the "ready"
position.
Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed
in. This can damage the heating element
and create a fire hazard.
If it is necessary to replace the cigarette
lighter, use only a genuine Hyundai
replacement or its approved equivalent.
!
CAUTION:
Do not use electric accessories or equip-
ment other than the Hyundai genuine
parts in the socket.
ONF048039N
DIGITAL CLOCK
B400A01NF-GAT
There are two control buttons for the digital
clock. Their functions are:
H - Push "H" to advance the hour indi-
cated.
M - Push "M" to advance the minute
indicated.
Display conversion
- To change the 12 hour format to the
24 hour format, press the “H” and “M”
buttons at the same time for more
than 3 seconds.
For example, if the “H” and “M” buttons
are pressed for more than 3 seconds
while the time is 10:15 p.m., the
display will be changed to 22:15.
ONF048106N
ONF048101N
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
70
B450A01NF-GAT
Front Drink Holder
The drink holder for holding cups or cans
is located on the main console.
ONF048103
DRINK HOLDER
!
CAUTION:
o Use the power outlets only when the
engine is running and remove the plug
from the power outlet after using the
electric device. Using the power
outlets when the engine stops or keep-
ing the electric device plugged in for
many hours may cause the battery to
discharge.
o Do not use the power outlet to connect
electric accessories or equipment
that are not designed to operate on 12
volts.
o Some electronic devices can cause
electronic interference when plugged
into the power outlet. These devices
may cause excessive audio noise
and malfunctions in other electronic
systems or devices in your vehicle.
POWER OUTLETS
B500D02NF-AAT
(If Installed)
These supply 12V electric power to operate
electric accessories or equipment only
when the key is in the "ON" or "ACC"
position.
ONF048105
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
71
SEATBACK POCKET
B540B01E-GAT
(If Installed)
HNF2042
The seatback pockets for holding papers
are located on the backside of the front
seats.
!
CAUTION:
Place the drink holder in its closed
position while not in use.
HNF2185
B450B01NF-GAT
Rear Drink Holder
The rear drink holder for holding cups or
cans is located in the center of the rear seat
armrest.
!
WARNING:
o Use caution when using the drink hold-
ers. A spilled beverage that is very
hot can injure you or your passen-
gers. Spilled liquids can damage
interior trim and electrical compo-
nents.
o Do not place objects other than cups
or cans in the drink holder. These
objects can be thrown out in the event
of a sudden stop or an accident,
possibly injuring the passengers in
the vehicle.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
72
!
SUNROOF
B460A02Y-AAT
(If Installed)
Sun Shade
B460A01NF
Your HYUNDAI is equipped with a sliding
sunshade which you can manually adjust
to let in light with the sunroof closed, or to
block sunlight.
WARNING:
Never adjust the sunshade while driving.
This could result in loss of control and an
accident that may cause death, serious
injury, or property damage.
B460B01TG-GAT
Opening the Sunroof System
If your vehicle is equipped with this feature,
you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the
sunroof control buttons located on the
overhead console.
The sunroof can only be opened, closed,
or tilted when the ignition switch is in the
"ON" position.
ONF049200
Auto slide open
To use the auto slide feature, momentarily
(more than 1 second) press the SLIDE
OPEN button on the overhead console.
The sunroof will slide all the way open. To
stop the sunroof sliding at any point, press
any sunroof control button.
Manual slide open
Press the SLIDE OPEN button on the over-
head console for less than 0.5 second.
Auto slide close
To close the sunroof, press the TILT UP
button on the overhead console for more
than 1 second.
The sunroof will slide all the way close. To
stop at the desired point, press any sunroof
control button.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
73
!
Manual tilt down
To close the sunroof, press the SLIDE
OPEN button on the overhead console
and hold it until the sunroof is closed.
NOTE:
After washing the car or after there is
rain, be sure to wipe off any water that is
on the sunroof before operating it.
WARNING:
o Do not close a sunroof if anyone's
hands, arms or body are between the
sliding glass and the sunroof sash, as
this could result in injury.
o Do not place your head or arms out of
the sunroof opening at any time.
o While the vehicle is moving, always
keep the head, hands and other parts
of the body of all occupants away
from the roof opening. Otherwise, you
could be seriously injured if the ve-
hicle stops suddenly or if the vehicle
is involved in an accident.
!
B460C01TG-GAT
Tilting the Sunroof System
Auto tilt up
To use the auto tilt feature, momentarily
(more than 1 second) press the TILT UP
button on the overhead console. The
sunroof will tilt all the way open. To stop the
sunroof tilting at any point, press any
sunroof control button.
Manual tilt up
Press the TILT UP button on the overhead
console for less than 0.5 second.
Auto Reverse
If an object or part of the body is detected
while the sunroof is closing automatically,
it will reverse direction, and then stop.
Auto reverse function does not work if a tiny
obstacle is blocked between the sliding
glass and the sunroof sash. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the sunroof before
closing it.
WARNING:
Be careful that someone’s head, hands
and body are not trapped by a closing
sunroof.
Manual slide close
Press the TILT UP button on the overhead
console for less than 0.5 second.
ONF049200
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
74
!
CAUTION:
If the sunroof is not reset, it may not
operate properly.
B460E01NF-GAT
Resetting the sunroof
Whenever the vehicle battery is discon-
nected or discharged, you have to reset
your sunroof system as follows:
1. Turn the ignition key to the "ON" position.
2. Press the TILT UP button for more than
1 second to tilt up the sunroof completely
when the sunroof is fully closed. Then,
release the button.
3. Press and hold the TILT UP button once
again until the sunroof has returned to
the original position of TILT UP after it is
raised a little higher than the maximum
TILT UP position. Then, release the
button.
4. Press and hold the TILT UP button within
5 seconds until the sunroof is operated
as follows;
TILT DOWN SLIDE OPEN SLIDE
CLOSE
Then, release the button.
B480B01Y-AAT
Map Light
Push in the map light switch to turn the light
on or off. This light produces a spot beam
for convenient use as a map light at night
or as a personal light for the driver and the
passenger.
B480B01NF
INTERIOR LIGHT
Without sunroof
With sunroof
!
CAUTION:
o Do not open the sunroof in severely
cold temperatures or when it is
covered with ice or snow.
o Periodically remove any dirt that may
have accumulated on the guide rails.
o Do not press any sunroof control
button longer than necessary.
Damage to the motor or system com-
ponents could occur.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
75
B490A02NF-AAT
Interior Light
The interior courtesy light has two buttons.
The two buttons are:
o DOOR
In the "DOOR" position, the interior cour-
tesy light comes on when any door is
opened or when a door is unlocked by the
transmitter. The light goes out gradually 30
seconds after the door is closed. However
if the ignition switch is ON or all vehicle
doors are locked when the door is closed,
interior light will turn off even within 30
seconds.
HNF2110
CAUTION:
Do not leave this button pressed for an
extended period of time when the ve-
hicle is not running.
!
SUNGLASS HOLDER
!
B491A03O-AAT
The sunglass holder is located on the front
overhead console. Push the end of the
cover to open the sunglass holder.
WARNING:
o Do not keep objects except sunglass
inside the sunglass holder. Such ob-
jects can be thrown from the holder in
the event of a sudden stop or an acci-
dent, possibly injuring the passen-
gers in the vehicle.
o Do not open the sunglass holder while
the vehicle is moving. The rear view
mirror of the vehicle can be blocked
by an open sunglass holder.
HNF2183
oON
In the "ON" position, the light stays on at all
times.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
76
B500B01HP-DAT
MULTI BOX
To open the cover, push the cover. It can be
used for storing small items.
B500B01NF-GAT
Illuminated Glove Box
(If Installed)
Opening the glove box will automatically
turn on the light when the multi-function
switch is turned to the first position.
ONF048100N
!
STORAGE BOX
B500A01Y-AAT
GLOVE BOX
WARNING:
To avoid the possibility of injury in case
of an accident or a sudden stop, the
glove box door should be kept closed
when the car is in motion.
o To open the glove box, pull on the glove
box release lever.
o The glove box door can be locked (and
unlocked) with the key.
ONF048099
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
77
!
WARNING:
To avoid the possibility of injury in case
of an accident or a sudden stop, the
center console box lid should be kept
closed when the car is in motion.
OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
B510B01Y-AAT
Electric Type
The outside rearview mirrors can be
adjusted to your preferred rear vision, both
directly behind the vehicle, and to the rear
of the left and right sides.
The remote control outside rearview mirror
switch controls the adjustments for both
right and left outside mirrors.
To adjust the position of either
mirror:
1. Move the selecting switch (1) to the right
or left to activate the adjustable
mechanism for the corresponding door
mirror.
2. Adjust mirror angle by depressing the
appropriate perimeter switch as
illustrated.
ONF048035L
!
CAUTION:
o Do not operate the switch continu-
ously for an unnecessary length of
time.
o Scraping ice from the mirror face
could cause permanent damage. To
remove any ice, use a sponge, soft
cloth or approved de-icer.
!
WARNING:
Be careful when judging the size or dis-
tance of any object seen in the passen-
ger side rearview mirror. It is a convex
mirror with a curved surface, and any
objects seen in this mirror are closer
than they appear.
The center console box is used for storing
cassette tapes or small articles.
To use the center console box, pull up the
handle and lift the lid as shown.
CENTER CONSOLE
COMPARTMENT
B505A01NF-GAT
Center Console Box
ONF048098
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
78
The outside rearview mirror heater is actu-
ated in connection with the rear window de-
froster. To heat the outside rearview mirror
glass, push in the switch for the rear window
defroster. The rearview mirror glass will be
heated for defrosting or defogging and will
give you improved rear vision in inclement
weather conditions. Push the switch again to
turn the heater off. The outside rearview mirror
heater automatically turns itself off after 20
minutes.
B510D01HP-AAT
OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
HEATER
DAY/NIGHT INSIDE REARVIEW
MIRROR
B520A01A-AAT
Manual Type
Your Hyundai is equipped with a day/night
inside rearview mirror. The "night" position
is selected by flipping the tab at the bottom
of the mirror toward you. In the "night"
position, the glare of headlights of cars
behind you is reduced.
B520A01NF
ONF048071N
ONF048072
With Manual A/C
With Automatic A/C
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
79
HOMELINK MIRROR
B520C01NF-AAT
Automatic-Dimming Mirror
with Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass
Display and HomeLink
®
(If Installed)
Your vehicle comes with a Gentex Auto-
matic-Dimming Mirror with a Z-Nav™ Elec-
tronic Compass Display and an Integrated
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System.
During nighttime driving, this feature will
automatically detect and reduce rearview
mirror glare while the compass indicates
the direction the vehicle is pointed. The
HomeLink
®
Universal Transceiver allows
you to activate your garage door(s), electric
gate, home lighting, etc.
1. Channel 1 Button
2. Channel 2 Button
3. Status Indicator LED
4. Channel 3 Button
5. Rear Light Sensor
6. Dimming On/Off Button
7. Compass Control Button
8. Display
B520C01NF
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
80
Automatic-Dimming Night Vision
Safety™ (NVS
®
) Mirror
The NVS
®
Mirror in your vehicle is the most
advanced way to reduce annoying glare in
the rearview mirror during any driving
situation. For more information regarding
NVS
®
mirrors and other applications,
please refer to the Gentex website:
www.gentex.com.
CAUTION:
The NVS
®
Mirror automatically reduces
glare during driving conditions based
upon light levels monitored in front of the
vehicle and from the rear of the vehicle.
These light sensors are visible through
openings in the front and rear of the
mirror case. Any object that would
obstruct either light sensor will degrade
the automatic dimming control feature.
!
Automatic-Dimming Function
Your mirror will automatically dim upon
detecting glare from the vehicles traveling
behind you. The auto-dimming function
can be controlled by the Dimming ON/OFF
Button:
1. Pressing the
button turns the auto-
dimming function OFF which is
indicated by the green Status Indicator
LED turning off.
2. Pressing the
button again turns the
auto-dimming function ON which is
indicated by the green Status Indicator
LED turning on.
NOTE:
The mirror defaults to the "ON" position
each time the vehicle is started.
Compass Function
The Compass can be turned ON and OFF
and will remember the last state when the
ignition is cycled. To turn the display
feature ON/OFF:
1. Press and release the
button to turn
the display feature OFF.
2. Press and release the button again
to turn the display back ON.
Additional options can be set with press
and hold sequences of the
button and
are detailed below.
There is a difference between magnetic
north and true north. The compass in the
mirror can compensate for this difference
when it knows the Magnetic Zone in which
it is operating. This is set either by the dealer
or by the user. The operating Zone Numbers
for North America are shown in the figure on
the following section.
Z-Nav™ Compass Display
The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is also
equipped with a Z-Nav™ Compass that
shows the vehicle Compass heading in
the Display Window using the 8 basic
cardinal headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
81
To adjust the Zone setting:
1. Determine the desired Zone Number
based upon your current location on the
Zone Map.
2. Press and hold the
button for more
than 3 but less than 6 seconds, the
current Zone Number will appear on the
display.
3. Pressing and holding the
button again
will cause the numbers to increment (Note:
they will repeat …13, 14, 15, 1, 2, …).
Releasing the button when the desired
Zone Number appears on the display will
set the new Zone.
4. Within about 5 seconds the compass will
start displaying a compass heading again.
There are some conditions that can cause
changes to the vehicle magnets. Items such
as installing a ski rack or a CB antenna or
even some body repair work on the vehicle
can cause changes to the vehicle's magnetic
field. In these situations, the compass will
need to be re-calibrated to quickly correct for
these changes. To re-calibrate the compass:
1. Press and hold the
button for more
than 6 seconds. When the compass
memory is cleared a "C" will appear in the
display.
2. To calibrate the compass, drive the vehicle
in 2 complete circles at less than 5 MPH
(8 Km/h).
B520C05NF
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
82
!
Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System
The HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System
provides a convenient way to replace up to
three hand-held radio-frequency (RF)
transmitters with a single built-in device.
This innovative feature will learn the radio
frequency codes of most current
transmitters to operate devices such as
gate operators, garage door openers, entry
door locks, security systems, even home
lighting. Both standard and rolling code-
equipped transmitters can be programmed
by following the outlined procedures.
Additional HomeLink
®
information can be
found at: www.homelink.com or by calling
1-800-355-3515.
CAUTION:
Before programming HomeLink
®
to a
garage door opener or gate operator,
make sure that people and objects are
out of the way of the device to prevent
potential harm or damage. Do not use
HomeLink
®
with any garage door opener
that lacks the safety stop and reverse
features as required by U.S. federal
safety standards (this includes any
garage door opener model manufactured
before April 1, 1982). A garage door that
cannot detect an object - signaling the
door to stop and reverse - does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards.
Using a garage door opener without these
features increases the risk of serious
injury or death.
Programming HomeLink
®
NOTE:
o When programming a garage door
opener, it is advised to park the vehicle
outside of the garage.
o It is recommended that a new battery
be placed in the hand-held transmitter
of the device being programmed to
HomeLink
®
for quicker training and
accurate transmission of the radio-
frequency signal.
o Some vehicles may require the ignition
switch to be turned to the second (or
"accessories") position for program-
ming and/or operation of HomeLink.
o In the event that there are still pro-
gramming difficulties or questions
after following the programming steps
listed below, contact HomeLink
®
at:
www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-
3515.
Retain the original transmitter of the RF
device you are programming for use in
other vehicles as well as for future
HomeLink
®
programming. It is also
suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed HomeLink
®
buttons be
erased for security purposes.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
83
Standard Programming
To train most devices, follow these
instructions:
1. For first-time programming, press and
hold the two outside buttons, HomeLink
®
Channel 1 and Channel 3 Buttons, until
the indicator light begins to flash (after
20 seconds). Release both buttons. Do
not hold the buttons for longer than 30
seconds.
2. Position the end of your hand-held trans-
mitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm) away from the
HomeLink
®
buttons while keeping the
indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both
the HomeLink
®
and hand-held
transmitter button. DO NOT release the
buttons until step 4 has been completed.
4. While continuing to hold the buttons the
red Indicator Status LED will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink
®
successfully trains to the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink
®
button and observe the red
Status Indicator LED. If the indicator
light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and your device should
activate when the HomeLink
®
button is
pressed and released.
6. To program the remaining two
HomeLink
®
buttons, follow steps 2
through 5.
Rolling Code Programming
Rolling code devices which are "code-
protected" and manufactured after 1996
may be determined by the following:
o Reference the device owner's manual
for verification.
o The handheld transmitter appears to
program the HomeLink Universal
Transceiver but does not activate the
device.
o Press and hold the trained HomeLink
button. The device has the rolling code
feature if the indicator light flashes rapidly
and then turns solid after 2 seconds.
To train rolling code devices, follow these
instructions:
1. At the garage door opener receiver
(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate
the "learn" or "smart" button. This can
usually be found where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the motor-
head unit. Exact location and color of
the button may vary by garage door
opener brand. If there is difficulty
locating the training button, reference
the device owner's manual or please
visit our Web site at www.homelink.com.
2. Firmly press and release the "learn" or
"smart" button (which activates the
"training light").
NOTE:
There are 30 seconds in which to initiate
step3.
3. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
hold for two seconds and then release
the desired HomeLink
®
button. Repeat
the "press/hold/release" sequence a
second time to complete the
programming. (Some devices may
require you to repeat this sequence a
third time to complete the programming.)
4. Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink
®
button and observe the red
Status Indicator LED. If the indicator
light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and your device should
activate.
5. To program the remaining two
HomeLink
®
buttons, follow either steps
1 through 4 above for other Rolling
Code devices or steps 2 through 5 in
Standard Programming for standard
devices.
Gate Operator & Canadian Programming
During programming, your handheld trans-
mitter may automatically stop transmitting.
Continue to press the Integrated
HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System button
(note steps 2 through 4 in the Standard
Programming portion of this document)
while you press and re-press ("cycle") your
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
84
!
handheld transmitter every two seconds
until the frequency signal has been learned.
The indicator light will flash slowly and
then rapidly after several seconds upon
successful training.
Operating HomeLink
®
To operate, simply press and release the
programmed HomeLink
®
button. Activation
will now occur for the trained device (i.e.
garage door opener, gate operator, security
system, entry door lock, home/office
lighting, etc.). For convenience, the hand-
held transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink
®
But-
ton
To program a new device to a previously
trained HomeLink
®
button, follow these
steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
®
button. Do NOT release until step 4 has
been completed.
2. When the indicator light begins to flash
slowly (after 20 seconds), position the
handheld transmitter 1 to 3 inches away
from the HomeLink
®
surface.
3. Press and hold the handheld transmitter
button. The HomeLink
®
indicator light
will flash, first slowly and then rapidly.
4. When the indicator light begins to flash
rapidly, release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink
®
button and observe the red
Status Indicator LED. If the indicator
light stays on constantly, programming
is complete and your new device should
activate.
Erasing HomeLink
®
Buttons
Individual buttons cannot be erased.
However, to erase all three programmed
buttons:
1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink
®
buttons until the indicator light begins to
flash-after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for
longer than 30 seconds.
The Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System is now in the training (learn)
mode and can be programmed at any time
following the appropriate steps in the
Programming sections above.
FCC ID: NZLZTVHL3
IC: 4112A-ZTVHL3
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
WARNING:
The transceiver has been tested and
complies with FCC and Industry Canada
rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the
device.
NVS
®
is a registered trademark and Z-
Nav™ is a trademark of the Gentex
Corporation, Zeeland, Michigan.
HomeLink
®
is a registered trademark
owned by Johnson Controls, Incorporated,
Milwaukee, Wisconsin.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
85
!
PARKING BRAKE
B530A03A-AAT
Always engage the parking brake before
leaving the vehicle. This also turns on the
parking brake indicator light when the key
is in the "ON" or "START" position. Before
driving away, be sure that the parking
brake is fully released and the indicator
light is off.
WARNING:
Whenever leaving vehicle or parking
always set the parking brake as far as
possible and fully engage the vehicle's
transaxle into the park position. Vehicles
not fully engaged in park with the parking
brake set are at risk for moving
inadvertently and injuring yourself or
others.
o To release the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and pull up the parking
brake lever slightly. Secondly, depress
the release button and lower the parking
brake lever while holding the button.
CAUTION:
Driving with the parking brake applied
will cause excessive brake pad (or lining)
and brake rotor wear.
!
ONF058010
ONF058009
o To engage the parking brake, first apply
the foot brake and then without pressing
the release button in, pull the parking
brake lever up as far as possible. In
addition it is recommended that when
parking the vehicle on a gradient, the
shift lever should be positioned in the
appropriate low gear on manual trans-
mission vehicles or in the Park position
on automatic transaxle vehicles.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
86
!
WARNING:
o If a person becomes locked in the
trunk, pull the emergency trunk
release lever of the inside panel in the
trunk to open the trunk lid.
o Keep cars locked and keys out of the
reach of children. HYUNDAI recom-
mends parents teach children about
the emergency trunk release lever in
their vehicle and how to open the trunk
lid if they are accidentally locked in
the trunk.
ONF049132
B540B03E-AAT
Trunk Lid Emergency Latch Release
Your vehicle is equipped with a glow-in-
the dark emergency trunk release lever
located inside the trunk. It will glow after the
trunk is closed. When pulled, this lever will
release the trunk latch mechanism and
open the trunk.
!
WARNING:
The trunk lid should always be kept com-
pletely closed while the vehicle is in
motion. If it is left open or ajar, poisonous
exhaust gases may enter the car and
serious illness or death may result. See
additional warnings concerning exhaust
gases on page 2-2.
TRUNK LID
B540A01S-AAT
Remote Trunk Lid Release
To open the trunk lid, pull up the lid release
lever.
To close, lower the trunk lid, then press
down on it until it locks. To be sure the trunk
lid is securely fastened, always check by
trying to pull it up again.
ONF048010L
Type A
Type B
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
87
HIGH-MOUNTED REAR STOP
LIGHT
B550A02Y-AAT
In addition to the lower-mounted rear stop
lights on either side of the car, the high
mounted rear stop light in the center of the
rear window also lights when the brakes
are applied.
B550A01NF-A
REMOTE FUEL-FILLER LID RE-
LEASE
B560A04Y-AAT
The fuel-filler lid may be opened from
inside the vehicle by pushing the fuel-filler
lid opener switch located on the driver's
door.
NOTE:
If the fuel-filler lid will not open because
ice has formed around it, tap lightly or
push on the lid to break the ice and
release the lid. Do not pry on the lid. If
necessary, spray around the lid with an
approved de-icer fluid (do not use
radiator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle
to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.
ONF048018L
!
WARNING:
o Gasoline vapors are dangerous. Be-
fore refueling, always stop the engine
and never smoke or allow sparks and
open flames near the filler area.
o Never operate your vehicle without a
filler cap properly installed, flammable
vapors and gasoline could leak out in
dangerous situations such as a
collision or rollover. If the filler cap
must be replaced, only use genuine
Hyundai replacement parts.
HNF2021
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
88
B560B01L-GAT
Manual Fuel Filler Lid Release
If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened using
the remote opener, a manual opener
handle is located inside the trunk on the left
side. Open the fuel filler lid by pulling on
this handle as shown in the illustration.
ONF048021
!
WARNING:
- When using a portable fuel container,
be sure to place the container on the
ground while refueling. Static elec-
tricity discharge from the container
can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
While starting refueling, contact
should be maintained until the filling
is complete.
- Do not use cellular phones around a
gas station. The electric current or
electronic interference from cellular
phones can ignite fuel vapors caus-
ing a fire.
- When refueling, always turn the en-
gine off. Sparks by engine compart-
ment electrical equipment can ignite
fuel vapors causing a fire. After re-
fueling, check to make sure the fuel
filler cap is securely closed, and
then start the engine.
- Do not smoke or try to light cigarettes
around a gas station. Automotive
fuels are flammable.
o After refueling, make sure the fuel
cap is installed securely to prevent
fuel spillage in the event of an acci-
dent
o Tighten the cap until it clicks, otherwise
the "
" check engine light will illu-
minate
o If you open the fuel filler cap during
high ambient temperatures, a slight
"pressure sound" may be heard. This
is normal and not a cause for concern.
Whenever you open the fuel filler cap,
turn it slowly.
o Do not "top off" after the nozzle auto-
matically shuts off when refueling.
o Automotive fuels are flammable/ex-
plosive materials. When refueling,
please note the following guidelines
carefully.
- Before touching the fuel nozzle or
fuel filler cap, have one's hands in
contact with metal parts away from
the filler neck to discharge static
electricity.
- Do not get back in the vehicle while
refueling. Do not operate anything
that can produce static electricity.
Static electricity discharge can ignite
fuel vapors resulting in an explo-
sion.
!
WARNING:
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
89
HOOD RELEASE
B570A01NF-GAT
1. Pull the release knob to unlatch the
hood.
2. Pull the secondary latch up and lift the
hood.
ONF048016
HNF2024-E
SUN VISOR
B580A01NF-AAT
Your Hyundai is equipped with sun visors
to give the driver and front passenger
either frontal or sideward shade. To reduce
glare or to shut out direct rays of the sun,
turn the sun visor down.
Vanity mirrors are provided on the back of
the sun visor for the driver and front pas-
senger.
NOTE:
The Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) label containing useful information
can be found on the back of each sun
visor.
B580A01NF
!
3. Raise the hood by hand.
When closing the hood, slowly close the
hood and make sure it locks into place.
WARNING:
o Always double check to be sure that
the hood is firmly latched before
driving away. If it is not latched, the
hood could fly open while the vehicle
is being driven, causing a total loss of
visibility, which might result in an ac-
cident.
o Do not move the vehicle with the hood
in the raised position, as vision is
obstructed and the hood could fall or
be damaged.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
90
B600B01NF-GAT
Tilt and telescopic type
(If Installed)
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Push the lever downward fully to unlock.
2. Adjust upward or downward and
forward or backward to set the steering
wheel to the desired position.
3. After adjustment, securely tighten the
lever by pulling it upward.
ONF048031
STEERING WHEEL
B600A01NF-GAT
Tilt type
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever toward you and hold it to
unlock.
2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to the
desired position.
3. After adjustment, release the lever.
ONF048114
B500B01B-GAT
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Opening the lid of the vanity mirror will
automatically turn on the mirror light.
HNF2172
!
WARNING:
o Do not place the sun visor in such a
manner that it obscures visibility of
the roadway, traffic or other objects.
o Do not move the sun visor out to cover
the side window if there is an item
attended to it such as a garage door
remote control, pens, air fresheners
or the like. These objects could cause
injury if the curtain airbag is deployed.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
91
FRONT DOOR WARNING
LIGHT
B620A01S-AAT
A red light comes on when the front door is
opened. The purpose of this light is to
assist when you get in or out and also to
warn passing vehicles.
ONF078040
!
CAUTION:
After adjusting the steering wheel, try
moving it up and down to make sure it is
locked in position.
!
WARNING:
Do not attempt to adjust the steering
wheel while driving as this may result in
loss of control of the vehicle and serious
injury or death.
HORN
B610A01L-GAT
Press the pad on the steering wheel to
sound the horn.
ONF048032
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
92
B660B02NF-AAT
To Set the Cruise Speed
1. Pull the cruise control ON/OFF switch.
The "CRUISE" indicator light in the in-
strument cluster will illuminate. This
turns the system on.
2. Accelerate to desired cruising speed
above 40 km/h (25 mph).
ONF058020
REAR SEAT ARMREST
B611A01Y-AAT
This armrest is located in the center of the
rear seatback.
B611A01NF-A
CRUISE CONTROL
B660A02S-AAT
The cruise control system provides auto-
matic speed control for your comfort when
driving on straight, open freeways, toll
roads, or other noncongested highways.
This system is designed to function above
approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
NOTE:
Cruise control is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or other bad weather
conditions.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
93
B660D01NF-AAT
To Resume the Preset Speed
The vehicle will automatically resume the
speed set prior to cancellation when you
push the control switch "RESUME (+)" and
release it to return (when travelling above
25 mph).
If the control switch "RESUME(+)" is
selected, the cruise "SET" indicator in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
ONF058017
B660C01NF-AAT
To Cancel the Cruise Speed
To disengage the cruise control system,
push the control switch "CANCEL".
Additionally, the following actions will
disengage the system:
o Depress the brake pedal.
o Depress the clutch pedal (Manual
transaxle).
o Shift the selector lever to "N" position
(Automatic transaxle).
o Decrease the vehicle speed lower than
the memory speed by 9 mph (15 km/h).
o Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than 25 mph (40 km/h).
o Release the cruise control ON/OFF
switch.
ONF058018
ONF058019
3. Push the "SET ()" switch after you have set
the vehicle speed at the desired speed.
If the "SET ()" switch is selected, the
cruise "SET" indicator light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
4. Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal and the desired speed will
automatically be maintained.
5. To increase speed, temporarily depress
the accelerator pedal enough for the
vehicle to exceed the preset speed.
When you remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal, the vehicle will return
to the speed you have set.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed decreases more
than 9 mph (15 km/h) below the set speed
or decreases below 25 mph (40 km/h),
the cruise control system will automati-
cally cancel the set speed.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
94
B660F01NF-AAT
To Reset at a Slower Speed
1. Push the control switch "SET ()" and
hold it. While the control switch is
pushed, the vehicle speed will gradually
decrease.
If the "SET()" switch is selected, the
cruise "SET" indicator light in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
2. When the desired speed is obtained,
release the control switch.
ONF058019
B660E01NF-GAT
To Reset at a Faster Speed
1. Push the control switch "RESUME (+)"
and hold it.
If the control switch "RESUME(+)" is
selected, the cruise "SET" indicator in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to desired speed and release
the control switch. While the control
switch is held, the vehicle will gradually
gain speed.
!
WARNING:
o Keep the cruise control ON/OFF switch
off when not using the cruise control
to avoid inadvertently setting a speed.
o Use the cruise control system only
when traveling on open highways in
good weather.
o Do not use the cruise control when it
may not be safe to keep the car at a
constant speed, for instance, driving
in heavy or varying traffic, or on
slippery (rainy, icy or snow-covered)
or winding roads or over 6% up-hill or
down-hill roads.
o Pay particular attention to the driving
conditions whenever using the cruise
control system.
o During cruise-speed driving of a
manual transaxle vehicle, do not shift
into neutral without depressing the
clutch pedal, since the engine will be
overrevved. If this happens, depress
the clutch pedal or release the cruise
control ON/OFF switch.
o During normal cruise control
operation, when the "SET" switch is
activated or reactivated after apply-
ing the brakes, the cruise control will
energize after approximately 3
seconds. This delay is normal.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
95
CDP mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
CDC mode
It will function as the TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
MUTE Switch
o Pull the MUTE switch to silence the
sound.
o Once again press the MUTE switch to
restore the sound.
VOL ( / ) Switch
o Press the VOL ( ) switch to increase
volume.
o Press the VOL ( ) switch to decease
volume.
SEEK/PRESET ( / ) Switch
o If the button is pressed for 0.8 second or
more, it will work as follows in each
mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK select
button.
CDP mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
CDC mode
It will function as the DISC UP/DOWN
button.
o If the button is pressed for less than 0.8
second, it will work as follows in each
mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STATION
select buttons.
AUDIO REMOTE CONTROL
SWITCH
B610A03NF-AAT
(If Installed)
NOTE:
Do not operate audio remote control
switches simultaneously.
MODE Switch
Press the MODE switch to select Radio,
CD* (Compact Disc) and CDC* (Compact
Disc Changer).
Each press of the switch changes the display
as follows:
ONF048108L
* : if installed
RADIO (FM1 FM2 AM) CD* CDC*
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
96
B670E01A-AAT
Temperature Control
This is used to turn the heating system on
and off and to select the degree of heating
desired.
ONF048077
Cool
Warm
MANUAL HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL SYSTEM
1. Temperature control
2. Fan speed control
3. Mode selection knob
ONF048073
4. Air conditioning switch
5. Air intake control
6. Rear window defroster switch
B670A02NF-BAT
Rotary and Push Button Type
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
97
97
B670B02O-AAT
Fan Speed Control (Blower Control)
This is used to select the blower fan speed.
The blower fan speed, and the volume of
air delivered from the system, may be
controlled manually by setting the blower
control between the "1" and "4" position.
1 is the lowest fan speed and 4 is the
highest fan speed. Setting the fan speed
control knob to the "0" position turns off the
fan.
ONF048079
ONF048075
1. Side Defroster Nozzle
2. Side Ventilator
3. Windshield Defroster Nozzle
4. Center Ventilator
5. Rear Floor Vents
B670D02NF-AAT
Air Flow Control
The mode selection knob controls the di-
rection of the air flow through the ventila-
tion system. Air can be directed to the floor,
dashboard outlets, or windshield. Five
symbols are used to represent Face, Bi-
Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost air
position.
The MAX A/C mode is used to cool the
inside of the vehicle faster.
ONF048074
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
98
MAX A/C-Level (B, D) *
1
Air is discharged through the face level
vents.
If the "MAX A/C" mode is selected, the A/C
will turn on automatically and
"Recirculation" mode will be activated.
*
1
: See page 1-97
NOTE:
o The air intake control switch will
change to " " mode when the ignition
switch is turned "ON" with the MAX A/
C mode selected.
o When you change to another mode
from MAX A/C, the A/C and the air
intake control switch are set as shown
in the following chart.
* The A/C or the air intake control switch
returns to its former setting.
A/C
ON
ON or OFF *
ON or OFF *
ON
ON
Air Intake
Control Switch
or *
Floor-Level (C, E, A, D) *
1
Air is discharged through the floor vents,
windshield defroster nozzle, side defroster
nozzle and side ventilator.
If the "Floor" mode is selected, the "Fresh"
mode will be activated.
Floor-Defrost Level (A, C, E, D) *
1
Air is discharged through the windshield
defroster nozzle, the floor vents, side
defroster nozzle and side ventilator.
If the "Floor-Defrost" mode is selected,
"Fresh" mode will be activated.
Defrost-Level (A, D) *
1
Air is discharged through the windshield
defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and
side ventilator.
If the "Defrost" mode is selected, the "Fresh"
mode will be activated to improve
windshield defrosting.
Face-Level (B, D) *
1
Air is discharged through the face level
vents.
Bi-Level (B, D, C, E) *
1
Air is discharged through the face vents
and the floor vents. This makes it possible
to have cooler air from the dashboard
vents and warmer air from the floor outlets
at the same time.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
99
99
B670C03Y-AAT
Air Intake Control
This is used to select fresh outside air or
recirculation of inside air.
Fresh
Recirculation
With the " " mode selected, air enters the
vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled
according to the other functions selected.
With the " " mode selected, air from within
the passenger compartment is drawn
through the heating system and heated or
cooled according to the other functions
selected.
ONF048078
NOTE:
It should be noted that prolonged opera-
tion of the heating system in "
" mode
will give rise to fogging of the windshield
and side windows and the air within the
passenger compartment will become
stale. In addition prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the "
" mode
selected may result in the air within the
passenger compartment becoming ex-
cessively dry.
B710B01NF-GAT
Center Ventilator/Side Ventilator
The center ventilators are located in the
middle of the dashboard.
The side ventilators are located on each
side of the dashboard.
To change the direction of the air flow, turn
the control knob under the vents.
To control the amount of air, turn the control
knob on the left side of the vents. The vents
are opened when the vent knob is moved
to " " position. The vents are closed when
the vent knob is moved to " ". Keep these
vents clear of any obstructions.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
100
B700A02A-AAT
Bi-level Heating
Your Hyundai is equipped with bi-level
heating controls. This makes it possible to
have cooler air from the dashboard vents
and warmer air from the floor outlets at the
same time. To use this feature:
o Set the air intake control switch to the
fresh air ( ) position.
o Set the air flow control at the bi-level ( )
position.
o Adjust the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
o Set the temperature control between
"Cool" and "Warm".
B710A01A-AAT
Ventilation
To operate the ventilation system:
o Set the air intake control to the fresh air
( ) position.
o To direct all intake air to the dashboard
vents, set the airflow control to the face
( ) position.
o Adjust the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
o Set the temperature control between
"Cool" and "Warm".
B690A01O-AAT
Heating Controls
For normal heating operation, set the air
flow control to the floor ( ) position. (The
"Fresh" mode will be activated.)
For faster heating, the air intake control
switch should be set in the recirculate ( )
position.
If the windows fog up, set the air flow
control to the defrost ( ) position (The A/
C will turn on automatically and "Fresh"
mode will be activated.)
For maximum heat, move the temperature
control to "Warm".
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
101
101
B730A01L-AAT
Operation Tips
o To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from
entering the car through the ventilation
system, temporarily set the air intake
control at the position. Be sure to
return the control to the position
when the irritation has passed to keep
fresh air in the vehicle. This will help
keep the driver alert and comfortable.
o Air for the heating/cooling system is
drawn in through the grilles just ahead
of the windshield. Care should be taken
that these are not blocked by leaves,
snow, ice or other obstructions.
o To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to the
fresh air ( ) position and fan speed to
the desired position, turn on the air
conditioning system, and adjust
temperature control to desired tempera-
ture.
B740A01S-AAT
Air Conditioning Switch
The air conditioning is turned on or off by
pushing the A/C button on the heating/air
conditioning control panel.
ONF048080
B740B03O-AAT
Air Conditioning Operation
Cooling
To use the air conditioning to cool the
interior:
o Set the air flow control to the face ( )
position.
o Turn on the air conditioning switch by
pushing in on the switch. The air
conditioning indicator light should come
on at the same time.
o Set the air intake control to the fresh air
( ) position.
o Set the temperature control to "Cool".
("Cool" provides maximum cooling. The
temperature may be moderated by
moving the control toward "Warm".)
o Adjust the fan control to the desired
speed. For greater cooling, turn the fan
control to one of the higher speeds or
temporarily select the recirculate ( )
position on the air intake control.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
102
B740C02O-AAT
De-Humidified Heating
For dehumidified heating:
o Set the air flow control to the face ( )
position.
o Turn on the air conditioning switch. The
air conditioning indicator light should
come on at the same time.
o Set the air intake control to the fresh air
( ) position.
o Adjust the fan control to the desired
speed.
o For more rapid action, set the fan at one
of the higher speeds.
o Adjust the temperature control to provide
the desired amount of warmth.
B740D02Y-AAT
Operation Tips
o If the interior of the car is hot when you
first get in, open the windows for a few
minutes to expel the hot air.
o When you are using the air conditioning
system, keep all windows closed to
keep hot air out.
o When moving slowly, as in heavy traffic,
shift to a lower gear. This increases
engine speed, which in turn increases
the speed of the air conditioning
compressor.
o On steep grades, turn the air condition-
ing off to avoid the possibility of the
engine overheating.
o During winter months or in periods when
the air conditioning is not used regularly,
run the air conditioning once every
month for a few minutes. This will help
circulate the lubricants and keep your
system in peak operating condition.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
103
103
ONF048093 ONF048095N
DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING
B720A02E-AAT
Use the heating/ventilation system to defrost or defog the
windshield:
To remove interior fog on the windshield;
o Set the fan speed control between "1" and "4" position.
o Set the temperature control to the desired position.
o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position. (The
A/C will turn on automatically and the "Fresh" mode will be
activated.)
To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield;
o Set the fan speed control to position "3" or "4".
o Set the temperature control to warm.
o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position. (The
A/C will turn on automatically and the "Fresh" mode will be
activated.)
NOTE:
When the A/C is operated continuously on the floor-defrost level ( ) or defrost level ( ), it may cause fog to form on the exterior
windshield. If this occurs, set the air flow control to the face level position ( ) and fan speed control to the low position.
ONF048092
Manual A/C Automatic A/C
Manual A/C
Automatic A/C
ONF048094N
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
104
AUTOMATIC HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL SYSTEM
B970A01Y-AAT
(If lnstalled)
Your Hyundai is equipped with an auto-
matic heating and cooling control system
controlled by simply setting the desired
temperature.
B970B01NF-AAT
Heating and Cooling Controls
1. Driver's temperature control button
2. Fan speed control button
3. AUTO (automatic control) button
4. Dual temperature control selection but-
ton
5. OFF button
6. Air conditioning button
7. Air intake control button
8. Front wiper defrost button
9. Rear window defrost button
10. Mode selection button
11. Passenger's temperature control but-
ton
12. A/C display
ONF048082L
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
105
105
B970C02NF-AAT
Automatic Operation
The FATC (Full Automatic Temperature
Control) system automatically controls
heating and cooling as follows:
1. Push the "AUTO" switch. The indicator
light will illuminate confirming that the
Face, Floor and/or Bi-Level modes as
well as the blower speed and air
conditioner will be controlled
automatically.
And, the air conditioning will operate if
ambient temperature is higher than
35°F(1.5°C) and automatically turns off
if the ambient temperature drops below
33°F(0.6°C).
2. Push the "TEMP" button to set the de-
sired temperature.
The temperature will increase to the
maximum "HI" by pushing the up button.
The temperature will decrease to the
minimum "LO" by pushing the down
button.
ONF048083N
ONF048086
ONF048087
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature individually
1. Press the DUAL button to operate the
driver and passenger side temperature
individually. Pressing the right
temperature control button will
automatically switch to the DUAL mode
as well.
2. Press the left temperature control to
adjust the driver side temperature. Press
the right temperature control to adjust
the passenger side temperature.
When the driver side temperature is set to
the highest (HI) or lowest (LO) temperature
setting, the DUAL mode is deactivated for
maximum heating or cooling.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
106
B980A01Y-AAT
MANUAL OPERATION
The heating and cooling system can be
controlled manually as well by pushing
buttons other than the "AUTO" button. In
this state, the system sequentially works
according to the order of buttons selected.
The function of the buttons which are not
selected will be controlled automatically.
Press the "AUTO" button in order to convert
to automatic control of the system.
ONF048115
NOTE:
Never place anything over the sensor
which is located on the instrument panel
to ensure better control of the heating
and cooling system.
Adjusting the driver and passenger
side temperature equally
1. Press the DUAL button again to
deactivate DUAL mode. The passenger
side temperature will be set to the same
as the driver side temperature.
2. Press the left temperature control button.
The driver and passenger side
temperature will be adjusted equally.
Temperature conversion
If the battery has been discharged or dis-
connected, the temperature mode display
will reset to Fahrenheit.
This is normal condition. You can switch
the temperature mode between Fahrenheit
to Centigrade as follows;
While depressing the DUAL button, de-
press the MODE button for 3 seconds or
more. The display will change from Fahr-
enheit to Centigrade, or from Centigrade
to Fahrenheit.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
107
107
B980B01NF-GAT
Fan Speed Control
The fan speed can be set to the desired
speed by pressing the fan speed control
button. The higher the fan speed is, the
more air is delivered. Pressing the "OFF"
button turns off the fan.
ONF048089N
B670C03Y-AAT
Air Intake Control Switch
This is used to select fresh outside air or
recirculation of inside air.
To change the air intake control mode
(Fresh mode, Recirculation mode), push
the control button.
ONF048088
FRESH MODE
The indicator light on the button
goes on when the air intake
control is in fresh mode.
RECIRCULATION MODE
The indicator light on the button
is illuminated when the air intake
control is in recirculation mode.
With the "Fresh" mode selected,
air enters the vehicle from the
outside and is heated or cooled
according to the function
selected.
With the "Recirculation" mode selected,
air from within the passenger compart-
ment will be drawn through the heating
system and heated or cooled according to
the function selected.
NOTE:
It should be noted that prolonged opera-
tion of the heating system in "recircula-
tion" mode will give rise to fogging of the
windshield and side windows and the air
within the passenger compartment will
become stale. In addition, prolonged use
of the air conditioning with the "Recircu-
lation" mode selected may result in the
air within the passenger compartment
becoming excessively dry.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
108
Face-Level (B, D) *
1
When selecting the "Face-Level" mode,
the indicator light will come on, causing air
to be discharged through the face level
vents.
B980D01Y-AAT
Heating and Cooling System Off
Press the "OFF" button to stop the operation
of the heating and cooling system.
ONF048091
B980E01NF-GAT
Air Flow Control
This is used to direct the flow of air. Air can
be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets,
or windshield. Four symbols are used to
represent Face, Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-
Defrost position.
ONF048084N
Floor-Level (C, E, A, D) *
1
When selecting the "Floor-Level", the indi-
cator light will come on and the air will be
discharged through the floor vents,
windsheld defroster nozzle, side defroster
nozzle and side ventilator.
Bi-Level (B, D, C, E) *
1
When selecting the "Bi-Level", the indica-
tor light will come on and the air will be
discharged through the face vents and the
floor vents. This makes it possible to have
cooler air from the dashboard vents and
warmer air from the floor outlets at the
same time.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
109
109
Floor-Defrost Level (A, C, E, D) *
1
When selecting the "Floor-Defrost" mode,
the indicator light will come on and the air
will be discharged through the windshield
defroster nozzle, the floor vents, side
defroster nozzle and side ventilator.
If any of the temperature control switch, the
blower fan control switch, or the defrost
switch is selected in "Floor-Defrost" mode,
the A/C will turn on automatically and
"Fresh" mode will be activated.
*
1
: See page 1-97
B980F01NF-AAT
Defrost Switch
ONF048071N
ONF048072
Type A
When the "Defrost" button is pressed, the
fresh mode will be automatically selected
and the air will be discharged through the
windshield defroster nozzle, side defroster
nozzle and side ventilator. To assist in
defrosting, the air conditioning will oper-
ate if ambient temperature is higher than
35°F(1.5°C) and automatically turns off if
the ambient temperature drops below
33°F(0.6°C).
Type B
B760A01NF-AAT
Climate Control Air Filter (For Evapo-
rator And Blower Unit) (If Installed)
The climate control air filter is located in the
right side of the instrument panel.
It operates to decrease the amount of pol-
lutants entering the car.
To replace the climate control air filter,
refer to page 6-19.
HNF2181
Inside of
a vehicle
Evaporator core
FilterBlower
Outside air
Inside air
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
110
ANTENNA
B870D01Y-AAT
Glass Antenna
When the radio power switch is turned on
while the ignition key is in either the "ON"
or "ACC" position, your car will receive
both AM and FM broadcast signals through
the antenna in the rear window glass.
HNF2189-A
CAUTION:
o Do not clean the inner side of the rear
window glass with an abrasive type of
glass cleaner or use a scraper to
remove foreign deposits from the
inner surface of the glass as this may
cause damage to the antenna
elements.
o Avoid adding metallic coatings to the
rear window glass, such as Ni, Cd, etc.
These can disturb receiving AM and
FM broadcast signals.
!
CAUTION:
o Replace the filter every 10,000 miles
(15,000 km) or once a year.
If the car is being driven in severe
conditions such as dusty, rough roads,
more frequent climate control air filter
inspections and changes are re-
quired.
o When the air flow rate is suddenly
decreased, the system should be
checked at an authorized dealer.
!
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
111
111
The satellite antenna is installed on the
roof of your car to listen to a satellite radio
broadcast. This antenna is permanently
attached and can not be removed
NOTE:
In places such as tunnels, the satellite
broadcast signal is not available.
D281400AFD
Aux, USB and iPod
®
(if installed)
NOTE:
When using a portable audio device con-
nected to the power outlet, noise may
occur during playback. If this happens,
use the power source of the portable
audio device.
Type A
Type B
ONF048111
ONF048112
B875D01TG-AAT
AVN (AUDIO, VIDEO AND NAVIGA-
TION) System (If Installed)
If your vehicle has an AVN, you can refer
to the AVN operation manual provided
with AVN for the detailed function.
!
CAUTION:
This vehicle may include mercury-con-
taining devices installed by the manu-
facturer:
* High Intensity Discharge Headlamps
* Navigation Display
* Back-lit Instruments
Remove Devices Before Vehicle dis-
posal Upon Removal of Devices:
Please Reuse, Recycle, or Dispose as
Hazardous Waste
ONF048133N
B880A01NF-AAT
Satellite Antenna
* iPod
®
is a trademark of Apple Inc.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
112
STEREO SOUND SYSTEM
B750A02A-AAT
How Car Audio Works
AM broadcasts can be received at greater
distances than FM broadcasts. This is
because AM radio waves are transmitted
at low frequencies. These long, low
frequency radio waves can follow the
curvature of the earth rather than travelling
straight out into the atmosphere. In addition,
they curve around obstructions so that
they can provide better signal coverage.
AM and FM radio signals are broadcast
from transmitter towers located around
your city. They are intercepted by the radio
antenna on your car. This signal is then
received by the radio and sent to your car
speakers.
When a strong radio signal has reached
your vehicle, the precise engineering of
your audio system ensures the best
possible quality reproduction. However,
in some cases the signal coming to your
vehicle may not be strong and clear. This
can be due to factors such as the distance
from the radio station, closeness of other
strong radio stations or the presence of
buildings, bridges or other large
obstructions in the area.
FM broadcasts are transmitted at high fre-
quencies and do not bend to follow the
earth's surface. Because of this, FM broad-
casts generally begin to fade at short
distances from the station. Also, FM signals
are easily affected by buildings, mountains,
or other obstructions. These can result in
certain listening conditions which might
lead you to believe a problem exists with
your radio. The following conditions are
normal and do not indicate radio trouble:
Ionosphere
B750A02L
AM reception
Mountains
Buildings
Unobstructed
area
FM radio station
B750A03L
Ionosphere
FM reception
B750A01L
Obstructed area
Iron bridges
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
113
113
!
o Fading - As your car moves away from
the radio station, the signal will weaken
and sound will begin to fade. When this
occurs, we suggest that you select
another stronger station.
o Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or large
obstructions between the transmitter
and your radio can disturb the signal
causing static or fluttering noises to
occur. Reducing the treble level may
lessen this effect until the disturbance
clears.
o Station Swapping - As an FM signal
weakens, another more powerful sig-
nal near the same frequency may begin
to play. This is because your radio is
designed to lock onto the clearest signal.
If this occurs, select another station with
a stronger signal.
o Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals
being received from several directions
can cause distortion or fluttering. This
can be caused by a direct and reflected
signal from the same station, or by
signals from two stations with close
frequencies. If this occurs, select another
station until the condition has passed.
B750B05Y-AAT
Using a cellular phone or a two-way
radio
When a cellular phone is used inside the
vehicle, noise may be produced from the
audio equipment. This does not mean that
something is wrong with the audio
equipment. In such a case, use the cellular
phone at a place as far as possible from the
audio equipment.
WARNING:
Hyundai recommends that you never
use a cell phone while driving. This could
result in loss of control, and an accident
that may cause death, serious injury, or
property damage. You must stop at a
safe place to use a cellular phone.
NOTE:
Some states and cities have regulations
prohibiting the use of cell phones while
driving. You should be aware of the
specific requirements in your area.
B750A04L
B750A05L
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
114
CARE OF DISCS
B850A02L
B850A02F-AAT
Proper Handling
Damaged Disc
Do not attempt to play damaged, warped
or cracked discs. These could severely
damage the playback mechanism.
Storage
When not in use, place your discs in their
individual case and store them in a cool
place away from the sun, heat, and dust.
Do not grip or pull out the disc with your
hand while the disc is being pulled into the
unit by the self loading mechanism.
Handle your disc as shown. Do not drop
the disc. Hold the disc so you will not leave
fingerprints on the surface. If the surface is
scratched, it may cause the pickup to skip
signal tracks. Do not affix tape, paper, or
gummed labels on the disc. Do not write on
the disc.
Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the surface of
a disc could cause the pickup to skip signal
tracks. Wipe the surface clean with a clean
soft cloth. If the surface is heavily soiled,
dampen a clean soft cloth in a solution of
mild neutral detergent to wipe it clean. See
drawing.
B850A01L
Keep Your Discs Clean
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
115
AUDIO SYSTEM
PA710SA01NF-AAT
RADIO, SET UP, VOLUME CONTROL (PA710S) (If Installed)
NFF_USA_CDP_RADIO
1. FM Selection Button
2. AM Selection Button
3. XM Selection Button
4. CD/AUX Selection Button
5. Automatic Channel Selection Button
6. Power ON/OFF
7. SCAN Button
8. MUTE Button
9. Information Display Button
10. SET UP Button
11. TUNE/ENTER Button
12. CAT(FLDR) Button
13. Pre-set Button
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
9
12
11
13
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
116
PA710SB01NF-AAT
1. FM Selection Button
Turns to FM mode and toggles FM1 and
FM2 when the button is pressed each time.
2. AM Selection Button
Turns to AM mode, selects the AM.
3. XM Selection Button
Turns to XM mode, and toggles in the order
of XM1XM2XM3···XM1··· when the
button is pressed each time.
4. CD/AUX Selection Button
If there is a CD in the CDP DECK it turns to
CD mode, and if a device is connected to
AUX then it toggles.
CDAUXCD··· when the button is
pressed each time.(It will not turn to AUX if
the auxiliary device is not connected)
5. Automatic Channel Selection
Button
o When the [SEEK ]button is pressed,
it reduces the band frequency by 200khz
to automatically select channel. Stops
at the previous frequency if no channel
is found.
o When the [SEEK
]button is pressed,
it increases the band frequency by
200khz to automatically select chan-
nel. Stops at the previous frequency if
no channel is found.
6. Power ON/OFF & Volume Control
Button
Turns the set on/off when the IGNITION
SWITCH is on ACC or ON. If the button is
turned to the right, it increases the volume
and left, decreases the volume.
7. SCAN Button
If this button is pressed, the frequencies
will increase and receive the correspond-
ing broadcasts.
This function will play the frequencies for
5 seconds (XM mode : 10 seconds) each
and find other broadcasts as the frequency
increases.
Press the button again when desiring to
continue listening to the currently playing
broadcast.
8. MUTE Button
Press to temporarily cut off the Sound.
9. Information Display Button
Information Display function operation (In-
formation is displayed each time (the) Key
is pressed) : Pressing the Category/
Channel Artist Name/Song
TitleCategory/Channel... for 3 seconds
will display the corresponding text then
become restored.
Text Scroll operation
After pressing (the) Key, if the text to be
displayed is longer than the LCD text line,
then rotating the Tune Knob will operate
the Page up function displaying 16(Max.
characters) characters for 3 seconds each
dispalys.
10. SET UP Button
Press this button to turn to the XM option,
TEXT SCROLL, AVC and adjustment
mode.
If no action is taken for 5 seconds after
pressing the button, it will return to the play
mode.(After entering SET UP mode, move
between items using the left, right and
PUSH functions of the TUNE button.)
The set up item changes from TEXT
SCROLL AVCXM...
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
117
11. TUNE/ENTER Button
Turn this button clockwise by one notch to
increase frequency by 200Khz from cur-
rent frequency.
Turn this button counterclockwise by one
notch to decrease frequency by 200Khz
from current frequency.
Press this button while holding SET UP
button to activate / inactivate the item.
Select SET UP item using left and right
function of the Tune button.
Pressing the button changes the BASS,
MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BALANCE
TUNE mode.
The mode selected is shown on the dis-
play.
After selecting each mode, rotate the Au-
dio control knob clockwise or counter-
clockwise.
o BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the BASS,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
o MIDDLE Control
To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the MIDDLE,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
o TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the TREBLE,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
o FADER Control
Turn the control knob clockwise to empha-
size rear speaker sound (front speaker
sound will be attenuated). When the con-
trol knob is turned counterclockwise, front
speaker sound will be emphasized (rear
speaker sound will be attenuated).
o BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize
right speaker sound (left speaker sound
will be attenuated). When the control knob
is turned counter clockwise, left speaker
sound will be emphasized (right speaker
sound will be attenuated).
12. CAT(FLDR) Button
Moves [CAT ] button when Category Up
search operation.
o Category is moved Up from the cat-
egory currently being received and
Category Name becomes displayed.
o If the Enter Key is not pressed within 5
seconds, then the previous mode will
be restored.
o If the Key is pressed while in the last
Category, then the first category will
become displayed and operation will
be repeated.
o Corresponding category can be se-
lected by pressing ENTER.
Moves [CAT
] button when Category
Down search operation.
o Category is moved Down from the cat-
egory currently being received and
Category Name becomes displayed.
o If the Enter Key is not pressed within 5
seconds, then the previous mode will
be restored.
o If the [CAT
] Key is pressed while in
the first Category, then the last category
will become displayed and operation
will be repeated.
o Corresponding category can be se-
lected by pressing ENTER.
13. Pre-set Button
Push [1]~[6] buttons less than 0.8 seconds
to play the channel saved in each button.
Push pre-set button for 0.8 seconds or
longer to save current channel to the re-
spective button with a beep.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
118
PA710SC01NF-AAT
CD (PA710S) (If Installed)
NFF_USA_CDP_CD
1. CD loading slot
2. CD indicator
3. CD Eject Button
4. CD/AUX Selection Button
5. Automatic Track Selection Button
6. INFO Button
7. TUNE/ENTER Button
8. REPEAT Button
9. RANDOM Play Button
10. SCAN Play Button
11. MUTE Button
3
1
4
5
9
11
6
7
8
2
10
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
119
PA710SD01NF-AAT
1. CD loading slot
Please face printed side upward and gen-
tly push in. When the ignition switch is on
ACC or ON and power is off, power is
automatically turned on if the CD is loaded.
This CDP supports 12 cm CD. But if VCD,
Data CD are loaded, "Reading error" mes-
sage will appear and CD will be ejected.
2. CD Indicator
When car ignition switch is ACC or ON and
if the CD is loaded, this indicator is lighted.
If the CD is ejected the light is turned off.
3. CD eject Button
Push button to eject the CD during CD
playback. This button is enabled when
ignition switch is off.
4. CD/AUX Selection Button
If the auxiliary device is connected, it turns
to AUX MODE to play the sound from the
auxiliary player.
If no Disc and auxiliary device is con-
nected, it displays "NO Media" for 5 sec-
onds and returns to the previous mode.
5. Automatic Track Selection Button
o Push [SEEK ] button for less than 0.8
seconds to play from the beginning of
current song.
o Push [SEEK
] button for less than 0.8
seconds and press again within 1 sec-
onds to play the previous song.
o Push [SEEK
] button for 0.8 or longer
to initiate reverse direction high speed
sound search of current song.
o Push [SEEK
] button for less than 0.8
seconds to play the next song.
o Push [SEEK
] button for 0.8 or longer
to initiate high speed sound search of
current song.
6. INFO Button
Displays the information of the current CD
TRACK in the order of DISC TITLE DISC
ARTISTTRACK TITLE TRACK
ARTISTTOTAL TRACK Play Screen
DISC TITLE ···.(not displayed if the infor-
mation is not available on the DISC.)
7. TUNE/ENTER Button
Turn this button clockwise to display songs
after current song.
Also, turn this button counterclockwise to
display songs before current song.
To listen to the displayed song, press the
button to skip to the song and play.
Pressing the button changes the BASS,
MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BALANCE
TUNE mode.
The mode selected is shown on the dis-
play.
After selecting each mode, rotate the Au-
dio control knob clockwise or counter-
clockwise.
o BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the BASS,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
o MIDDLE Control
To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the MIDDLE,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
o TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the TREBLE,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
120
o FADER Control
Turn the control knob clockwise to empha-
size rear speaker sound (front speaker
sound will be attenuated). When the con-
trol knob is turned counterclockwise, front
speaker sound will be emphasized (rear
speaker sound will be attenuated).
o BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize
right speaker sound (left speaker sound
will be attenuated). When the control knob
is turned counter clockwise, left speaker
sound will be emphasized (right speaker
sound will be attenuated).
8.REPEAT Button
Repeats current song when the button is
pressed for less than 0.8 seconds.
Repeats the entire DISC when the button
is pressed for 0.8 seconds or longer.
9. RANDOM Play Button
Turns on/off the randomization of the play
list of files in the currently played DISC.
To cancel the mode, press the key once
again.
10. SCAN Play Button
Plays first 10 seconds of each song in the
DISC.
To cancel the mode, press the key once
again.
11. MUTE Button
Press this button to temporarily cut off
the Sound. "Audio Mute" is displayed on
the LCD. Press the button once again to
cancel MUTE mode.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
121
PA710SE01NF-AAT
USING USB (PA710S) (If Installed)
H_NF_A_U_CDP_USB
1. AUX Selection Button
2. Track moving Button
3. INFO Selection Button
4. Folder moving Button
5. TUNE/ENTER Button
6. Random Playback Button
7. Repeat Selection Button
8. SCAN Selection Button
1
2
6
3
5
7
8
4
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
122
PA710SF01NF-AAT
If a USB device is connected to the multiple
terminal inside the console on the right
hand side of the driver’s seat, the ‘USB’
icon will be displayed on the top right
corner of the display screen.
1.AUX Selection Button
If USB is connected, it switches to the USB
mode from the CD mode to play the song
files stored in the USB.
If there is no CD and USB mode from the
Radio mode, it displays ‘NO MEDIA’.
2. Track Moving Button
o Press the [SEEK ] button for less than
0.8 seconds to play from the beginning
of the song currently played.
Press the button for less than 0.8 sec-
onds and press it again within 1 second
to move and play the previous track.
Press the button for 0.8 seconds or
longer to play the song in reverse direc-
tion in fast speed.
o Press the [SEEK
] button for less than
0.8 seconds to move to the next track.
Press the button for 0.8 seconds or
longer to play the song in forward direc-
tion in fast speed.
3. INFO Button
Displays the information of the file cur-
rently played in the order of FILE NAME
TITLEARTISTALBUMFOLDERTOTAL
FILEnormal displayFILE NAME
(Displays no information if the file has no
song information.)
4. Folder moving Button
o Moves [FLDR ] button to the child
folder of the current folder and displays
the first song in the folder. Press ENT/
TUNE button to move to the folder dis-
played. It will play the first song in the
folder.
o Moves [FLDR
] button to the parent
folder and displays the first song in the
folder. Press ENT/TUNE button to move
to the folder displayed. It will play the
first song in the folder.
5. TUNE/ENTER Button
Turn this button clockwise to display the
songs next to the currently played song.
Turn the button counterclockwise to dis-
play the songs before the currently played
song.
Press the button to skip and play the se-
lected song.
Pressing the button changes the BASS,
MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BALANCE
TUNE mode.
The mode selected is shown on the dis-
play.
After selecting each mode, rotate the Au-
dio control knob clockwise or counter-
clockwise.
o BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the BASS,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
o MIDDLE Control
To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the MIDDLE,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
o TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the TREBLE,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
o FADER Control
Turn the control knob clockwise to empha-
size rear speaker sound (front speaker
sound will be attenuated). When the con-
trol knob is turned counterclockwise, front
speaker sound will be emphasized (rear
speaker sound will be attenuated).
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
123
o BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize
right speaker sound (left speaker sound
will be attenuated). When the control knob
is turned counter clockwise, left speaker
sound will be emphasized (right speaker
sound will be attenuated).
6. RANDOM Playback Button
Press the button for less than 0.8 seconds
to start or stop the random playback of the
songs in the current folder.
Press the button for more than 0.8 seconds
to randomly play the entire songs in the
USB device.
Press the button again to cancel the mode.
7. REPEAT Button
Press the button for less than 0.8 seconds
to repeat the song currently played.
Press the button for more than 0.8 seconds
to repeat the entire songs in the USB
device.
8. SCAN Button
Plays 10 seconds of each song in the USB
device.
Press the button once again to cancel
scanning.
!
CAUTION IN USING
USB DEVICE:
o To use the external USB device, make
sure the device is not connected when
starting up the vehicle and connect
the device after starting up.
o If you start the vehicle when the USB
device is connected, it may damage
the USB device. (USB is not ESA)
o If the vehicle is started up or turned off
while the external USB device is con-
nected, the external USB device may
not work.
o It may not play all MP3 or WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with the
compression rate between
8Kbps~320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music files
with the compression rate between
8Kbps~320Kbps.
o Take cautions for static electricity
when connecting or disconnecting the
external USB device.
o Encoded MP3 PLAYER'S are not rec-
ognizable.
o Depending on the condition of the ex-
ternal USB device, the connected
external USB device can be unrecog-
nizable.
o When the formatted byte/sector set-
ting of External USB devices is not
either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE, then
the device will not be recognized.
o Only the USB device formatted to FAT
12/16/32 can be used.
o USB device without USB IF
(Implementers-Forum) authentica-
tion may not be recognizable.
o Make sure the USB connection termi-
nal does not come in contact with a
human body or any other object.
o If you repeat connecting or discon-
necting USB device in a short period
of time, it may damage the device.
o You might hear unusual noise when
connecting or disconnecting a USB
device.
o If you disconnect the external USB
device during playback in USB mode,
the external USB device can be dam-
aged. Therefore, connect the exter-
nal USB device when the engine is
turned off or in another mode.
o Depending on the type and capacity
of the external USB device or the type
of the files stored in the device, there
is a difference in the time taken for
recognition of the device, but this does
not indicate a problem.
o Do not use the USB device for other
purposes than playing music files.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
124
o Use of USB accessories such as a
recharger or heater using the USB I/F
may lower the performance or cause
trouble.
o If you use devices such as a USB hub
you purchased separately, the
vehicle’s audio system may not rec-
ognize the USB device. Connect the
USB device directly to the multimedia
terminal of the vehicle.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
125
PA710SG01NF-AAT
RUNNING iPod
®
(PA710S) (If Installed)
H_NF_A_U_CDP_IPOD
1. iPod Selection Button
2. Track moving Button
3. INFO Selection Button
4. Category Selection Button
5. TUNE/ENTER Button
6. RANDOM Playback Button
7. REPEAT Selection Button
1
2
6
3
5
7
4
* iPod
®
is a trademark of Apple Inc.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
126
PA710SH01NF-AAT
If the iPod exclusive cable (if installed) is
connected to the multiple terminal inside
the console on the right hand side of the
driver’s seat, the ‘iPod’ icon will be dis-
played on the top right corner of the display
screen.
1. iPod Selection Button
If iPod is connected, it switches to the iPod
mode from the CD mode to play the song
files stored in the iPod.
If there is no CD and AUX mode from the
Radio mode, it displays ‘NO MEDIA’.
2. Track Moving Button
o Press the [SEEK ] button for less than
0.8 seconds to play from the beginning
of the song currently played.
Press the button for less than 0.8 sec-
onds and press it again within 1 second
to move and play the previous track.
Press the button for 0.8 seconds or
longer to play the song in reverse direc-
tion in fast speed.
o Press the [SEEK
] button for less than
0.8 seconds to move to the next track.
Press the button for 0.8 seconds or
longer to play the song in forward direc-
tion in fast speed.
3. INFO Button
Displays the information of the file cur-
rently played in the order of FILE NAME
TITLEARTISTALBUMnormal dis-
play FILE NAME
.
(Displays no information if the file has no
song information.)
4. Category Selection Button
Moves to the upper category from currently
played category of the iPod.
To move to (play) the category (song)
displayed, press MENU(Preset6).
You will be able to search through the
lower category of the selected category.
The order of iPod’s category is SONG,
ALBUMS, ARTISTS, GENRES, and iPod.
5. TUNE/ENTER Button
When you turn the button clockwise, it will
display the songs (category) next to the
song currently played (category in the same
level).
Also, when you turn the button counter-
clockwise, it will display the songs (cat-
egory) before the song currently played
(category in the same level).
If you want to listen to the song displayed
in the song category, press the button, then
it will skip to the selected song and play.
Pressing the button changes the BASS,
MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BALANCE
TUNE mode.
The mode selected is shown on the dis-
play.
After selecting each mode, rotate the Au-
dio control knob clockwise or counter-
clockwise.
o BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the BASS,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
o MIDDLE Control
To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the MIDDLE,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
o TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the TREBLE,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
o FADER Control
Turn the control knob clockwise to empha-
size rear speaker sound (front speaker
sound will be attenuated). When the con-
trol knob is turned counterclockwise, front
speaker sound will be emphasized (rear
speaker sound will be attenuated).
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
127
o BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize
right speaker sound (left speaker sound
will be attenuated). When the control knob
is turned counter clockwise, left speaker
sound will be emphasized (right speaker
sound will be attenuated).
6. RANDOM Playback Button
Press the button for less than 0.8 seconds
to activate or deactivate the random play-
back of the songs within the current cat-
egory.
Press the button for longer than 0.8 sec-
onds to randomly play all songs in the
entire album of the iPod.
Press the button once again to cancel the
mode.
7. REPEAT Button
Repeats the song currently played.
NOTE FOR USING AN iPod DEVICE:
o Some iPod models might not support
the communication protocol and the
files will not be played. (iPod models
supported: Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G)
o The order of search or playback of
songs in the iPod can be different
from the order searched in the audio
system.
o If the iPod crashes due to its own
trouble, reset iPod. (Reset: Refer to
iPod manual)
o An iPod may not operate normally on
low battery charge.
!
CAUTION IN USING iPod
DEVICE:
o You need the power cable exclusive
for an iPod in order to operate iPod
with the buttons on the audio system.
The PC cable provided by Apple may
cause a malfunction. Do not use it for
vehicle use.
o When connecting the device with an
iPod cable, push in the jack fully to not
interfere with communication.
o When adjusting the sound of an iPod
and the audio system, the sound ef-
fects of both devices will overlap each
and might reduce or distort the quality
of the sound.
o Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer
function of an iPod when adjusting the
audio system’s volume, and turn off
the equalizer of the audio system
when using the equalizer of an iPod.
o When the iPod cable is connected, the
system can be switched to the AUX
mode even without the iPod device
and can cause noise. Disconnect iPod
cable when you are not using the iPod
device.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
128
PA760SA01NF-AAT
RADIO, SET UP, VOLUME CONTROL (PA760S) (If Installed)
NFF_USA_CDC_RADIO
1. FM Selection Button
2. AM Selection Button
3. XM Selection Button
4. CD/AUX Selection Button
5. Automatic Channel Selection Button
6. Power ON/OFF
7. SCAN Button
8. MUTE Button
9. Information Display Button
10. SET UP Button
11. TUNE/ENTER Button
12. CAT(FLDR) Button
13. Pre-set Button
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
9
12
11
13
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
129
PA760SB01NF-AAT
1. FM Selection Button
Turns to FM mode and toggles FM1 and
FM2 when the button is pressed each time.
2. AM Selection Button
Turns to AM mode, selects the AM.
3. XM Selection Button
Turns to XM mode, and toggles in the order
of XM1XM2XM3···XM1··· when the
button is pressed each time.
4. CD/AUX Selection Button
If there is a CD in the CDP DECK it turns to
CD mode, and if a device is connected to
AUX then it toggles.
CDAUXCD··· when the button is
pressed each time.(It will not turn to AUX if
the auxiliary device is not connected)
5. Automatic Channel Selection
Button
o When the [SEEK ]button is pressed,
it reduces the band frequency by 200khz
to automatically select channel. Stops
at the previous frequency if no channel
is found.
o When the [SEEK
]button is pressed,
it increases the band frequency by
200khz to automatically select chan-
nel.
Stops at the previous frequency if no chan-
nel is found.
6. Power ON/OFF & Volume Control
Button
Turns the set on/off when the IGNITION
SWITCH is on ACC or ON. If the button is
turned to the right, it increases the volume
and left, decreases the volume.
7. SCAN Button
If this button is pressed, the frequencies
will increase and receive the correspond-
ing broadcasts.
This function will play the frequencies for
5 seconds (XM mode : 10 seconds) each
and find other broadcasts as the frequency
increases.
Press the button again when desiring to
continue listening to the currently playing
broadcast.
8. MUTE Button
Press to temporarily cut off the Sound.
9. Information Display Button
Information Display function operation (In-
formation is displayed each time (the) Key
is pressed) : Pressing the Category/
Channel Artist Name/Song
TitleCategory/Channel... for 3 seconds
will display the corresponding text then
become restored.
Text Scroll operation
After pressing (the) Key, if the text to be
displayed is longer than the LCD text line,
then rotating the Tune Knob will operate
the Page up function displaying 16(Max.
characters) characters for 3 seconds each
dispalys.
10. SET UP Button
Press this button to turn to the XM option,
TEXT SCROLL, AVC and adjustment
mode.
If no action is taken for 5 seconds after
pressing the button, it will return to the play
mode.(After entering SET UP mode, move
between items using the left, right and
PUSH functions of the TUNE button.)
The set up item changes from TEXT
SCROLL AVCXM
...
.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
130
11. TUNE/ENTER Button
Turn this button clockwise by one notch to
increase frequency by 200Khz from cur-
rent frequency.
Turn this button counterclockwise by one
notch to decrease frequency by 200Khz
from current frequency.
Press this button while holding SET UP
button to activate / inactivate the item to
select.
Select SET UP item using left and right
function of the Tune button.
Pressing the button changes the BASS,
MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BALANCE
TUNE mode.
The mode selected is shown on the dis-
play.
After selecting each mode, rotate the Au-
dio control knob clockwise or counter-
clockwise.
o BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the BASS,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
o MIDDLE Control
To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the MIDDLE,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
o TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the TREBLE,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
o FADER Control
Turn the control knob clockwise to empha-
size rear speaker sound (front speaker
sound will be attenuated). When the con-
trol knob is turned counterclockwise, front
speaker sound will be emphasized (rear
speaker sound will be attenuated).
o BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize
right speaker sound (left speaker sound
will be attenuated). When the control knob
is turned counter clockwise, left speaker
sound will be emphasized (right speaker
sound will be attenuated).
12. CAT(FLDR) Button
Moves [CAT ] button when Category Up
search operation.
o Category is moved Up from the cat-
egory currently being received and
Category Name becomes displayed.
o If the Enter Key is not pressed within 5
seconds, then the previous mode will
be restored.
o If the Key is pressed while in the last
Category, then the first category will
become displayed and operation will
be repeated.
o Corresponding category can be se-
lected by pressing ENTER.
Moves [CAT
] button when Category
Down search operation.
o Category is moved Down from the cat-
egory currently being received and
Category Name becomes displayed.
o If the Enter Key is not pressed within 5
seconds, then the previous mode will
be restored.
o If the [CAT
] Key is pressed while in
the first Category, then the last category
will become displayed and operation
will be repeated.
o Corresponding category can be se-
lected by pressing ENTER.
13. Pre-set Button
Push [1]~[6] buttons less than 0.8 seconds
to play the channel saved in each button.
Push pre-set button for 0.8 seconds or
longer to save current channel to the re-
spective button with a beep.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
131
PA760SC01NF-AAT
CDC (PA760S) (If Installed)
NFF_USA_CDC_CD
1. CD loading slot
2. CD indicator
3. CD Eject Button
4. LOAD Button
5. CD/AUX Selection Button
6. Automatic Track Selection Button
7. INFO Button
8. TUNE/ENTER Button
9. REPEAT Button
10. RANDOM Play Button
11. DISC Selection Button
12. SCAN Play Button
13. MUTE Button
3
1
5
6
10
7
8
9
4
12
11
2
13
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
132
PA760SD01NF-AAT
1. CD loading slot
Please face printed side upward and gen-
tly push in. When the ignition switch is on
ACC or ON and power is off, power is
automatically turned on if the CD is loaded.
This CDP supports 12 cm CD. But if VCD,
Data CD are loaded, "Reading error" mes-
sage will appear and CD will be ejected.
2. CD Indicator
When car ignition switch is ACC or ON and
if the CD is loaded, this indicator is lighted.
If the CD is ejected the light is turned off.
3. CD eject Button
Push button to eject the CD during CD
playback. This button is enabled when
ignition switch is off.
4. CD LOAD Button
Push [LOAD] button to load CDs to avail-
able CDC deck (from 1~6). Push [LOAD]
button for more than 2 seconds to load into
all available decks.
The last CD will play. 10 seconds idle
status will disable loading process.
5. CD/AUX Selection Button
If the auxiliary device is connected, it turns
to AUX MODE to play the sound from the
auxiliary player.
If no auxiliary device is connected, it dis-
plays "NO MEDIA" for 5 seconds and re-
turns to the previous mode.
6. Automatic Track Selection Button
o Push [SEEK ] button for less than 0.8
seconds to play from the beginning of
current song.
o Push [SEEK
] button for less than 0.8
seconds and press again within 1 sec-
ond to play the previous song.
o Push [SEEK
] button for 0.8 or longer
to initiate reverse direction high speed
sound search of current song.
o Push [SEEK
] button for less than 0.8
seconds to play the next song.
o Push [SEEK
] button for 0.8 or longer
to initiate high speed sound search of
current song.
7. INFO Button
Displays the information of the current CD
TRACK in the order of DISC TITLE DISC
ARTISTTRACK TITLE TRACK
ARTISTTOTAL TRACK Play Screen
DISC TITLE···.(not displayed if the infor-
mation is not available on the DISC.)
8. TUNE/ENTER Button
Turn this button clockwise to display songs
after current song.
Also, turn this button counterclockwise to
display songs before current song.
To listen to the displayed song, press the
button to skip to the song and play.
Pressing the button changes the BASS,
MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BALANCE
TUNE mode.
The mode selected is shown on the dis-
play.
After selecting each mode, rotate the Au-
dio control knob clockwise or counter-
clockwise.
o BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the BASS,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
133
o MIDDLE Control
To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the MIDDLE,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
o TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the TREBLE,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
o FADER Control
Turn the control knob clockwise to empha-
size rear speaker sound (front speaker
sound will be attenuated). When the con-
trol knob is turned counterclockwise, front
speaker sound will be emphasized (rear
speaker sound will be attenuated).
o BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize
right speaker sound (left speaker sound
will be attenuated). When the control knob
is turned counter clockwise, left speaker
sound will be emphasized (right speaker
sound will be attenuated).
9. REPEAT Button
Repeats current song when the button is
pressed for less than 0.8 seconds.
Repeats the entire DISC when the button
is pressed for 0.8 seconds or longer.
10. RANDOM Play Button
Turns on/off the randomization of the play
list of files in the currently played DISC.
To cancel the mode, press the key once
again.
11. DISC Selection Button
o [DISC ] Change Button
Changes disc to the previous disc.
o [DISC
] Change Button
Changes disc to the next disc.
12. SCAN Play Button
Plays first 10 seconds of each song in the
DISC.
To cancel the mode, press the key once
again.
13. MUTE Button
Press this button to temporarily cut off the
Sound. "Audio Mute" is displayed on the
LCD. Press the button once again to can-
cel MUTE mode.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
134
PA760SE01NF-AAT
USING USB (PA760S) (If Installed)
H_NF_A_U_CDC_USB
1. AUX Selection Button
2. Track moving Button
3. INFO Selection Button
4. Folder moving Button
5. TUNE/ENTER Button
6. Random Playback Button
7. Repeat Selection Button
8. SCAN Selection Button
1
2
6
3
5
7
8
4
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
135
PA760SF01NF-AAT
If a USB is connected to the multiple termi-
nal inside the console on the right hand
side of the driver’s seat, the ‘USB’ icon will
be displayed on the top right corner of the
display screen.
1.AUX Selection Button
If a USB device is connected, it switches to
the USB mode from the CD mode to play
the song files stored in the USB device.
If there is no CD and USB mode from the
Radio mode, it displays ‘NO MEDIA’.
2. Track Moving Button
o Press the [SEEK ] button for less than
0.8 seconds to play from the beginning
of the song currently played.
Press the button for less than 0.8 sec-
onds and press it again within 1 second
to move and play the previous track.
Press the button for 0.8 seconds or
longer to play the song in reverse direc-
tion in fast speed.
o Press the [SEEK
] button for less than
0.8 seconds to move to the next track.
Press the button for 0.8 seconds or
longer to play the song in forward direc-
tion in fast speed.
3. INFO Button
Displays the information of the file cur-
rently played in the order of FILE NAME
TITLEARTISTALBUMFOLDERTOTAL
FILEnormal displayFILE NAME
(Displays no information if the file has no
song information.)
4. Folder moving Button
o Moves [FLDR ] button child folder of
the current folder and displays the first
song in the folder. Press ENT/TUNE
button to move to the folder displayed.
It will play the first song in the folder.
o Moves [FLDR
] button parent folder
and displays the first song in the folder.
Press ENT/TUNE button to move to the
folder displayed. It will play the first song
in the folder.
5. TUNE/ENTER Button
Turn this button clockwise to display the
songs next to the currently played song.
Turn the button counterclockwise to dis-
play the songs before the currently played
song.
Press the button to skip and play the se-
lected song.
Pressing the button changes the BASS,
MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BALANCE
TUNE mode.
The mode selected is shown on the dis-
play.
After selecting each mode, rotate the Au-
dio control knob clockwise or counter-
clockwise.
o BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the BASS,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
o MIDDLE Control
To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the MIDDLE,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
o TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the TREBLE,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
o FADER Control
Turn the control knob clockwise to empha-
size rear speaker sound (front speaker
sound will be attenuated). When the con-
trol knob is turned counterclockwise, front
speaker sound will be emphasized (rear
speaker sound will be attenuated).
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
136
o BALANCE Control
Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize
right speaker sound (left speaker sound
will be attenuated). When the control knob
is turned counter clockwise, left speaker
sound will be emphasized (right speaker
sound will be attenuated).
6. RANDOM Playback Button
Press the button for less than 0.8 seconds
to start or stop the random playback of the
songs in the current folder.
Press the button for more than 0.8 seconds
to randomly play the entire songs in the
USB device.
Press the button again to cancel the mode.
7. REPEAT Button
Press the button for less than 0.8 seconds
to repeat the song currently played.
Press the button for more than 0.8 seconds
to repeat the entire songs in the USB
device.
8. SCAN Button
Plays 10 seconds of each song in the USB
device.
Press the button once again to cancel
scanning.
o When the formatted byte/sector set-
ting of External USB devices is not
either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE, then
the device will not be recognized.
o Only the USB device formatted to FAT
12/16/32 can be used.
o USB device without USB IF
(Implementers-Forum) authentica-
tion may not be recognizable.
o Make sure the USB connection termi-
nal does not come in contact with a
human body or any other object.
o If you repeat connecting or discon-
necting USB device in a short period
of time, it may damage the device.
o You might hear unusual noise when
connecting or disconnecting a USB
device.
o If you disconnect the external USB
device during playback in USB mode,
the external USB device can be dam-
aged. Therefore, connect the exter-
nal USB device when the engine is
turned off or in another mode.
o Depending on the type and capacity
of the external USB device or the type
of the files stored in the device, there
is a difference in the time taken for
recognition of the device, but this does
not indicate a problem.
!
CAUTION IN USING
USB DEVICE:
o To use the external USB device, make
sure the device is not connected when
starting up the vehicle and connect
the device after starting up.
o If you start the vehicle when the USB
device is connected, it may damage
the USB device. (USB is not ESA)
o If the vehicle is started up or turned off
while the external USB device is con-
nected, the external USB device may
not work.
o It may not play all MP3 or WMA files.
1) It can only play MP3 files with the
compression rate between
8Kbps~320Kbps.
2) It can only play WMA music files
with the compression rate between
8Kbps~320Kbps.
o Take cautions for static electricity
when connecting or disconnecting the
external USB device.
o Encoded MP3 PLAYER'S are not rec-
ognizable.
o Depending on the condition of the ex-
ternal USB device, the connected
external USB device can be unrecog-
nizable.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
137
o Do not use the USB device for other
purposes than playing music files.
o Use of USB accessories such as a
recharger or heater using the USB I/
F may lower the performance or cause
trouble.
o If you use devices such as a USB hub
you purchased separately, the
vehicle’s audio system may not rec-
ognize the USB device. Connect the
USB device directly to the multimedia
terminal of the vehicle.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
138
PA760SG01NF-AAT
RUNNING iPod
®
(PA760S) (If Installed)
H_NF_A_U_CDC_IPOD
1. iPod Selection Button
2. Track moving Button
3. INFO Selection Button
4. Category Selection Button
5. TUNE/ENTER Button
6. RANDOM Playback Button
7. REPEAT Selection Button
1
2
6
3
5
7
4
* iPod
®
is a trademark of Apple Inc.
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
139
PA760SH01NF-AAT
In case the iPod exclusive cable (if in-
stalled) is connected to the multiple termi-
nal inside the consol on the right hand side
of the driver’s seat. When the iPod is con-
nected, the ‘iPod’ icon will be displayed on
the top right corner of the display screen.
1. iPod Selection Button
If iPod is connected, it switches to the iPod
mode from the CD mode to play the song
files stored in the iPod.
If there are no CD and AUX mode from the
Radio mode, it displays ‘NO MEDIA’.
2. Track Moving Button
o Press the [SEEK ] button for less than
0.8 seconds to play from the beginning
of the song currently played.
Press the button for less than 0.8 sec-
onds and press it again within 1 second
to move and play the previous track.
Press the button for 0.8 seconds or
longer to play the song in reverse direc-
tion in fast speed.
o Press the [SEEK
] button for less than
0.8 seconds to move to the next track.
Press the button for 0.8 seconds or
longer to play the song in forward direc-
tion in fast speed.
3. INFO Button
Displays the information of the file cur-
rently played in the order of FILE NAME
TITLEARTISTALBUMnormal dis-
play FILE NAME
.
(Displays no information if the file has no
song information.)
4. Category Selection Button
Moves to the upper category from currently
played category of the iPod.
To move to (play) the category (song)
displayed, press MENU(preset6)
You will be able to search through the
lower category of the selected category.
The order of iPod’s category is SONG,
ALBUMES, ARTISTS, GENRES, and iPod.
5. TUNE/ENTER Button
When you turn the button clockwise, it will
display the songs (category) next to the
song currently played (category in the same
level).
Also, when you turn the button counter-
clockwise, it will display the songs (cat-
egory) before the song currently played
(category in the same level).
If you want to listen to the song displayed
in the song category, press the button, then
it will skip to the selected song and play.
Pressing the button changes the BASS,
MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BALANCE
TUNE mode.
The mode selected is shown on the dis-
play.
After selecting each mode, rotate the Au-
dio control knob clockwise or counter-
clockwise.
o BASS Control
To increase the BASS, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the BASS,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
o MIDDLE Control
To increase the MIDDLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the MIDDLE,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
o TREBLE Control
To increase the TREBLE, rotate the knob
clockwise, while to decrease the TREBLE,
rotate the knob counterclockwise.
o FADER Control
Turn the control knob clockwise to empha-
size rear speaker sound (front speaker
sound will be attenuated). When the con-
trol knob is turned counterclockwise, front
speaker sound will be emphasized (rear
speaker sound will be attenuated).
o BALANCE Control
1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
140
Rotate the knob clockwise to emphasize
right speaker sound (left speaker sound
will be attenuated). When the control knob
is turned counter clockwise, left speaker
sound will be emphasized (right speaker
sound will be attenuated).
6. RANDOM Playback Button
Press the button for less than 0.8 seconds
to activate or deactivate the random play-
back of the songs within the current cat-
egory.
Press the button for longer than 0.8 sec-
onds to randomly play all songs in the
entire album of the iPod.
Press the button once again to cancel the
mode.
7. REPEAT Button
Repeats the song currently played.
NOTE FOR USING iPod DEVICE:
o Some iPod models might not support
the communication protocol and the
files will not be played. (iPod models
supported: Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G)
o The order of search or playback of
songs in the iPod can be different
from the order searched in the audio
system.
o If the iPod crashes due to its own
trouble, reset iPod. (Reset: Refer to
iPod manual)
o iPod may not operate normally on low
battery.
!
CAUTION IN USING iPod
DEVICE:
o You need the power cable exclusive
for an iPod in order to operate iPod
with the buttons on the audio system.
The PC cable provided by Apple may
cause a malfunction. Do not use it for
vehicle use.
o When connecting the device with an
iPod cable, push in the jack fully to not
interfere with communication.
o When adjusting the sound of an iPod
and the audio system, the sound ef-
fects of both devices will overlap each
and might reduce or distort the quality
of the sound.
o Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer
function of an iPod when adjusting the
audio system’s volume, and turn off
the equalizer of the audio system
when using the equalizer of an iPod.
o When the iPod cable is connected, the
system can be switched to the AUX
mode even without the iPod device
and can cause noise. Disconnect iPod
cable when you are not using the iPod
device.
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
2
Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous!............................ 2-2
Before Starting the Engine ............................................ 2-3
Key Positions................................................................ 2-4
Starting ......................................................................... 2-5
Operating the Manual Transaxle .................................. 2-6
Automatic Transaxle ..................................................... 2-8
Power Adjustable Pedals.............................................2-12
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................................2-12
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) System ..................2-13
Good Braking Practices ..............................................2-15
Driving for Economy ....................................................2-16
Smooth Cornering ........................................................2-17
Winter Driving ..............................................................2-17
Trailer or Vehicle Towing .............................................2-20
Vehicle Load Limit ........................................................2-24
2
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
2
WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!
C010A03A-AAT
Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the
windows immediately.
o Do not inhale exhaust fumes.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by
asphyxiation.
o Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.
The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you
hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have
the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by your Hyundai dealer.
o Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.
Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine
in your garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.
o Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.
If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open area
with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.
If you must drive with the trunk lid open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:
1. Close all windows.
2. Open side vents.
3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield
are kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.
!
!
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior
furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects
and reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain
or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
3
!
BEFORE STARTING
THE ENGINE
C020A01NF-AAT
Before you start the engine, you should
always:
1. Look around the vehicle to be sure
there are no flat tires, puddles of oil,
water or other indications of possible
trouble.
2. After entering the car, check to be sure
the parking brake is engaged.
3. Check that all windows and lights are
clean.
4. Check that the interior and exterior
mirrors are clean and in position.
5. Check your seat, seatback and head-
rest to be sure they are in their proper
positions.
6. Lock all the doors.
7. Fasten your seat belt and be sure that all
other occupants have fastened theirs.
8. Turn off all lights and accessories that
are not needed.
9. When you turn the ignition switch to
"ON", check that all appropriate warning
lights are operating and that you have
sufficient fuel.
10. Check the operation of warning lights
and all bulbs when key is in the "ON"
position.
TO START THE ENGINE
C030A01E-AAT
COMBINATION IGNITION SWITCH
o If your Hyundai is equipped with a
manual transaxle, place the shift lever
in neutral and depress the clutch pedal
fully.
o If your Hyundai has an automatic
transaxle, place the shift lever in "P"
(Park).
o To start the engine, insert the ignition
key and turn it to the "START" position.
Release it as soon as the engine starts.
Do not hold the key in the "START"
position for more than 15 seconds.
NOTE:
o For safety, the engine will not start if
the clutch pedal is not depressed fully
(Manual Transaxle) or the shift lever
is not in "P" or "N" Position (Automatic
Transaxle).
o The ignition key cannot be turned from
"ACC" position to "LOCK" position
unless the shift lever is in the "P"
(Park) position or the negative battery
terminal is disconnected from the bat-
tery. To remove the key, always
confirm that the shift lever is securely
positioned in "P" (Park) (For Automatic
Transaxle).
o For additional information about start-
ing, see page 2-5.
WARNING:
o All passengers must be properly
belted whenever the vehicle is moving.
Refer to pages: 1-22 through 1-34 for
more information on their proper use.
o Always check the surrounding areas
near your vehicle for people,
especially children, before putting a
car into 'drive'.
!
WARNING:
Always wear appropriate shoes when
operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski boots,
etc.) may interfere with your ability to
use the brake and accelerator pedal,
and the clutch (if installed).
!
WARNING:
When you intend to park or stop the
vehicle with the engine on, be careful not
to depress the accelerator pedal for a
long period of time. It may overheat the
engine or exhaust system and cause
fire.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
4
NOTE:
Do not hold the key in the "START"
position for more than 15 seconds.
o "ON"
When the key is in the "ON" position, the
ignition is on and all accessories may be
turned on. If the engine is not running, the
key should not be left in the "ON" position.
This will discharge the battery and may
also damage the ignition system.
o "ACC"
With the key in the "ACC" position, some
electrical accessories (radio, etc.) may be
operated.
o "LOCK"
The key can be removed or inserted in this
position.
To protect against theft, the steering wheel
locks by removing the key.
NOTE:
If difficulty is experienced turning the
ignition switch to the ACC position, turn
the key while turning the steering wheel
right and left to release the tension.
C070C01A-AAT
To remove the ignition key
1. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC"
position.
2. Simultaneously push and turn the
ignition key counterclockwise from the
"ACC" position to the "LOCK" position.
3. The key can be removed in the "LOCK"
position.
C070C01E
LOCK
ACC
ON
START
KEY POSITIONS
C040A02A-AAT
CAUTION:
The engine should not be turned off or the
key removed from the ignition key
cylinder while the car is in motion. The
steering wheel is locked by removing
the key.
C040A01E
LOCK
ACC
ON
START
!
o "START"
The engine is started in this position. It will
crank until you release the key.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
5
!
STARTING
!
C050A01A-AAT
WARNING:
Never run the engine in a closed or poorly
ventilated area any longer than is needed
to move your car in or out of the area. The
carbon monoxide gas emitted is odorless
and can cause serious injury or death.
C050A01E
4. Turn the ignition key to the "START"
position and release it when the engine
starts.
After the engine has started, allow the
engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds prior
to placing the vehicle in gear.
The starter should not be operated for
more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait
15-30 seconds between starting
attempts to protect the starter from
overheating.
C050B02A-AAT
Normal Conditions:
The Starting Procedure:
1. Insert key, and fasten the seat belt.
2. Depress the clutch pedal fully and place
the gearshift lever (manual transaxle)
in neutral or the selector lever (automatic
transaxle) in "P" (Park) position.
3. After turning the ignition key to the "ON"
position, make certain all warning lights
and gauges are functioning properly
before starting the engine.
WARNING:
Be sure that the clutch is fully depressed
when starting a manual transaxle vehicle.
Your manual transaxle equipped vehi-
cle will not start unless the clutch pedal
is fully depressed. On a manual transaxle
equipped vehicle that can be started
without depressing the clutch, there is
the potential to cause damage to the
vehicle or injury to someone inside or
outside the vehicle as a result of the
forward or backward movement of the
vehicle that will occur if the clutch is not
depressed when the vehicle is started.
!
WARNING:
Always fully depress the brake pedal
before and while shifting out of the "P"
Park position into another position to
avoid inadvertent motion of the vehicle
which could injure persons in or around
the car.
LOCK
ON
START
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
6
CAUTION:
o Do not downshift more than 2 gears or
downshift the gear when the engine is
running at high speed (5,000 RPM or
higher). Such a downshifting may
damage the engine.
o When downshifting from fifth gear to
fourth gear, caution should be taken
not to inadvertently press the gear
shift lever sideways in such a manner
that second gear is engaged. Such a
drastic downshift may cause the
engine speed to increase to the point
that the tachometer will enter the red-
zone. Such over-revving of the engine
may possibly cause engine damage.
o Do not use the shift lever as a handrest
during driving, as this can result in
premature wear of the transaxle shift
forks.
When shifting into reverse gear, pull the
mis-shift prevention tab (1) and shift into
reverse gear position.
NOTE:
o To shift into reverse, rest the lever in
neutral for at least 3 seconds after
your car is completely stopped. Then
move the lever into the reverse
position.
o During cold weather, shifting may be
difficult until the transaxle lubricant
has warmed up. This is normal and not
harmful to the transaxle.
o If you've come to a complete stop and
it's hard to shift into 1st or R(Reverse),
put the shift lever in N(Neutral)
position and release the clutch. Press
the clutch pedal back down, and then
shift into 1st or R(Reverse) gear
position.
ONF058005N
!
OPERATING THE MANUAL
TRANSAXLE (5 SPEED M/T)
C070A01NF-AAT
This shift pattern is imprinted on the shift
knob. The transaxle is fully synchronized
in all forward gears so shifting to either a
higher or a lower gear is easily
accomplished.
C070A01NF-A
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
7
!
C070B02A-AAT
Using the Clutch
The clutch should be pressed all the way
to the floor before shifting, then released
slowly. The clutch pedal should always be
fully released while driving. Do not rest
your foot on the clutch pedal while driving.
This can cause unnecessary wear. Do not
partially engage the clutch to hold the car
on an incline. This causes unnecessary
wear. Use the foot brake or parking brake
to hold the car on an incline. Do not operate
the clutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly.
WARNING:
o Always buckle-up! In a collision, an
unbelted occupant is significantly
more likely to be seriously injured or
killed than a properly belted occupant.
o Avoid high speeds when cornering or
turning.
o Do not make quick steering wheel
movements, such as sharp lane
changes or fast, sharp turns.
o The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of your
vehicle at highway speeds.
o Loss of control often occurs if two or
more wheels drop off the roadway
and the driver oversteers to reenter
the roadway.
o In the event your vehicle leaves the
roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead,
slow down before pulling back into the
travel lanes.
o Never exceed posted speed limits.
C070D03O-AAT
Good Driving Practices
o Never take the car out of gear and coast
down a hill. This is extremely hazardous.
Always leave the car in gear.
o Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause
them to overheat and malfunction.
Instead, when you are driving down a
long hill, slow down and shift to a lower
gear. When you do this, engine braking
will help slow the car.
o Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. This will help avoid over-revving
the engine, which can cause damage.
o Slow down when you encounter cross
winds. This gives you much better control
of your car.
o Be sure the car is completely stopped
before you attempt to shift into reverse.
The transaxle can be damaged if you do
not. To shift into reverse, depress the
clutch, move the shift lever to neutral,
wait three seconds, then shift to the
reverse position.
o Exercise extreme caution when driving
on a slippery surface. Be especially
careful when braking, accelerating or
shifting gears. On a slippery surface, an
abrupt change in vehicle speed can
cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle to go out of control.
C070E02O-AAT
RECOMMENDED SHIFT POINTS
The shift points as shown on the chart are
recommended for optimum fuel economy
and performance.
Shift from-to
1-2
2-3
3-4
4-5
Recommended
15 mph (20 km/h)
25 mph (40 km/h)
35 mph (55 km/h)
45 mph (75 km/h)
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
8
NOTE:
Depress the brake pedal when shift-
ing.
The selector lever can be shifted
freely.
The first few shifts on a new vehicle, or
if the battery has been disconnected,
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a
normal condition, and the shifting
sequence will adjust after shifts are
cycled a few times by the T.C.M
(Transaxle Control Module).
!
C090A02NF
CAUTION:
Never shift into "R" or "P" position while
the vehicle is moving.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
indicate the selector lever position when
the ignition is switched "ON". During sports
mode operation, the gear currently in use
displays in the numeral indicator.
C090B02A-AAT
The function of each position is as
follows:
o P (Park):
Use to hold the vehicle in place when
parked or while starting the engine.
Whenever parking the car, apply the
parking brake and shift the selector lever
to the "P" (Park) position.
CAUTION:
Never place the selector lever in the "P"
(Park) position unless the vehicle is fully
stopped. Failure to observe this caution
will cause severe damage to the
transaxle.
!
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
C090A01NF-GAT
(If Installed)
The highly efficient Hyundai automatic
transaxle has five forward speeds and one
reverse speed. The individual speeds are
selected automatically, depending on the
position of the speed selector lever. The
selector lever has 2 gates; the main gate
and the manual gate.
NOTE:
For information on manual gate
operation, refer to "Sports Mode".
In the main gate, the selector lever has 4
positions.
ONF058006
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
9
C090E02NF-GAT
o D (Drive):
Use for normal driving. Bring the vehicle to
a complete stop before shifting the selector
to "D" position. The transaxle will automati-
cally shift through a five gear sequence.
C090D02A-AAT
o N (Neutral):
In the "N" position, the transaxle is in neutral,
which means that no gears are engaged.
The engine can be started with the shift
lever in "N" position, although this is not
recommended except if the engine stalls
while the car is moving.
C090C01A-AAT
o R (Reverse):
Use for backing up the vehicle. Bring the
car to a complete stop before shifting the
selector lever to "R" position.
CAUTION:
o In sports mode, the driver must
execute upward shifts in accordance
with prevailing road conditions, taking
care to keep the engine speed below
the red zone.
o For engine protection, upward shifts
are made automatically when the
engine rpm reaches the red zone.
o By rapidly moving the selector lever
backwards (-) twice it is possible to
skip one gear, i.e., 3rd to 1st, 4th to 2nd
or 5th to 3rd. Since sudden engine
braking and/or rapid acceleration can
cause a loss of traction, however,
downshifts must be made carefully in
accordance with the vehicle's speed.
!
C090F02L-GAT
Sports Mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in
motion, sports mode is selected by pushing
the selector lever from the "D" position into
the manual gate. To return to "D" range
operation, push the selector lever back
into the main gate.
In sports mode, moving the selector lever
backwards and forwards can make rapid
gearshifts simple. In contrast to a manual
transaxle, the sports mode allows gearshifts
with the accelerator pedal depressed.
UP (+) : Push the lever forward once to shift
up one gear.
DOWN (-) : Pull the lever backwards once
to shift down one gear.
SKIP : By rapidly moving the selector
forward or backward twice, it is possible to
skip one gear, i.e. 1st to 3rd or 3rd to 1st .
ONF058007
NOTE:
o In sports mode, only the five forward
gears can be selected. To reverse or
park the vehicle, move the selector
lever to the "R" or "P" position as
required.
o In sports mode, downward shifts are
made automatically when the vehicle
slows down. When the vehicle stops,
1st gear is automatically selected.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
10
!
C090I03L-GAT
CAUTION:
o Shift into "R", "D" and "P" position
only when the vehicle has completely
stopped.
o Do not accelerate the engine in
reverse or any of the forward positions
with the brakes applied.
o Always apply the footbrake when shift-
ing from "P" or "N", to "R" or
"D"position.
o Do not use the "P" (Park) position in
place of the parking brake. Always
set the parking brake, shift the
transaxle into "P" (Park) position and
turn off the ignition when you leave the
vehicle, even momentarily. Never
leave the vehicle unattended while
the engine is running.
o When accelerating from a stop on a
steep hill, the vehicle may have a
tendency to roll backwards. Shifting
the shift lever into 2nd gear while in
Sport mode will help prevent the
vehicle from rolling backwards.
o Check the automatic transaxle fluid
level regularly, and add fluid as
necessary.
o See the maintenance schedule for
the proper fluid recommendation.
C090H01L-GAT
NOTE:
o For smooth and safe operation,
depress the brake pedal when shifting
from "Neutral" position or "Park"
position to a forward or reverse gear.
o The ignition key must be in the "ON"
position and the brake pedal fully de-
pressed in order to move the shift
lever from the "P" (Park) position to
any of the other positions.
o It is always possible to shift from "R",
"N", or "D" position to "P" position.
The vehicle must be fully stopped to
avoid transaxle damage.
o To maintain the required levels of ve-
hicle performance and safety, the sys-
tem may not execute certain
gearshifts when the selector lever is
operated.
o Before driving away from a stop on a
slippery road, push the selector lever
forward into the +(UP) position. This
causes the transaxle to shift into 2nd
gear which is better for smooth driv-
ing away on a slippery road. Push the
selector lever to the -(DOWN) side to
shift back to 1st gear.
C090J02NF-GAT
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE
If the shift lever cannot be moved from the
P (Park) position with the brake pedal
depressed, continue depressing the brake,
then do the following:
1. Carefully remove the cap covering the
shift-lock override access hole.
2. Insert a screwdriver (or key) into the
access hole and press down on the
screwdriver (or key).
3. Move the shift lever.
4. Have your vehicle inspected by an au-
thorized Hyundai dealer immediately.
ONF059008L
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
11
!
!
C090N05O-AAT
Good Driving Practices
o Never move the gear selector lever
from "P" or "N" to any other position with
the accelerator pedal depressed.
o Never move the gear selector lever into
"P" when the vehicle is in motion.
o Be sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift into
"R" or "D".
o Never take the vehicle out of gear and
coast down a hill. This may be extremely
hazardous. Always leave the vehicle in
gear when moving.
o Do not "ride" the brakes. This can cause
them to overheat and malfunction.
Instead, when you are driving down a
long hill, slow down and shift to a lower
gear. When you do this, engine braking
will help slow the car.
o Slow down before shifting to a lower
gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may not
be engaged.
o Always use the parking brake. Do not
depend on placing the transaxle in "P"
to keep the car from moving.
o Exercise extreme caution when driving
on a slippery surface. Be especially
careful when braking, accelerating or
shifting gears. On a slippery surface, an
abrupt change in vehicle speed can
cause the drive wheels to lose traction
and the vehicle to go out of control.
WARNING:
o Always buckle-up! In a collision, an
unbelted occupant is significantly
more likely to be seriously injured or
killed than a properly belted occupant.
o Avoid high speeds when cornering or
turning.
o Do not make quick steering wheel
movements, such as sharp lane
changes or fast, sharp turns.
o The risk of rollover is greatly
increased if you lose control of your
vehicle at highway speeds.
o Loss of control often occurs if two or
more wheels drop off the roadway
and the driver oversteers to reenter
the roadway.
o In the event your vehicle leaves the
roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead,
slow down before pulling back into the
travel lanes.
o Never exceed posted speed limits.
WARNING:
If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,
mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt to
rock the vehicle free by moving it for-
ward and backward. Do not attempt this
procedure if people or objects are any-
where near the vehicle. During the rock-
ing operation the vehicle may suddenly
move forward or backward as it be-
comes unstuck, causing injury or
damage to nearby people or objects.
o Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly de-
pressing and releasing the accelerator
pedal.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
12
!
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
(ABS)
C120A01FC-AAT
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is
designed to prevent wheel lock-up during
sudden braking or on hazardous road
surfaces. The ABS control module monitors
the wheel speed and controls the pressure
applied to each brake. Thus, in emergency
situations or on slick roads, ABS will
increase vehicle control during braking.
NOTE:
o A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the ve-
hicle begins to move after the engine
is started. These conditions are nor-
mal and indicate that the anti-lock
brake system or Electronic Stability
Control is functioning properly.
o During ABS or ESC operation, a pul-
sation may be felt in the brake pedal
when the brakes are applied. Also, a
noise may be heard in the engine
compartment while braking. These
conditions are normal and indicate
that the anti-lock brake system or
Electronic Stability Control System is
functioning properly.
Setting the driver's position
1) Be sure the parking brake is engaged.
2) Move the accelerator and brake pedals
to the front most position by pushing the
" " portion of the switch.
3) Adjust the seat position and the steering
wheel angle properly.
4) Move the pedals toward you until you
can fully depress the brake pedal by
pushing the " " portion of the switch.
5) Depress the pedals a few times to get
used to the feel after adjusting.
WARNING:
o Adjust the pedals after parking the
vehicle on level ground. Never attempt
to adjust the pedals while the vehicle
is moving.
o Never adjust the pedals with your foot
on the accelerator pedal as this may
result in increasing the engine speed
and acceleration.
o Make sure that you can fully depress
the brake pedal before driving.
Otherwise, you may not be able to
hold down the brake pedal firmly in an
emergency stop.
POWER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS
C100A01NF-AAT
(With Automatic Transaxle) (If
Installed)
To adjust the position of the accelerator
and brake pedals, turn the ignition key to
the "ON" position with the selector lever in
the "P" position and push the switch.
If you push the " " portion of the switch, the
pedals move rearward.
If you push the " " portion of the switch, the
pedals move forward.
ONF048030N
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
13
!
!
WARNING:
ABS or ESC will not prevent accidents
due to improper or dangerous driving
maneuvers. Even though vehicle control
is improved during emergency braking,
always maintain a safe distance between
you and objects ahead. Vehicle speeds
should always be reduced during
extreme road conditions.
The braking distance for cars equipped
with an anti-lock braking system (Elec-
tronic Stability Control System) may be
longer than for those without it in the
following road conditions.
During these conditions the vehicle
should be driven at reduced speeds:
o Rough, gravel or snow-covered
roads.
o With tire chains installed.
o On roads where the road surface is
pitted or has different surface height.
The safety features of an ABS or ESC
equipped vehicle should not be tested by
high speed driving or cornering. This
could endanger the safety of yourself or
others.
ELECTRONIC STABILITY CON-
TROL (ESC) SYSTEM
C310A02NF-AAT
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system is designed to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering manuevers. ESC checks
where you are steering and where the
vehicle is actually going. ESC applies the
brakes at individual wheels and intervenes
in the engine management system to sta-
bilize the vehicle.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system is an electronic system designed to
help the driver maintain vehicle control
under adverse conditions. It is not a
substitute for safe driving practices. Factors
including speed, road conditions and
driver steering input can all affect whether
ESC will be effective in preventing a loss
of control. It is still your responsibility to
drive and corner at reasonable speeds
and to leave a sufficient margin of safety.
ONF058011N
WARNING:
Never drive too fast for the road
conditions or too quickly when cornering.
Electronic stability control (ESC) will not
prevent accidents. Excessive speed in
turns, abrupt maneuvers and
hydroplaning on wet surfaces can still
result in serious accidents. Only a safe
and attentive driver can prevent
accidents by avoiding maneuvers that
cause the vehicle to lose traction. Even
with ESC installed, always follow all the
normal precautions for driving - including
driving at safe speeds for the conditions.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
14
C310D01NF-AAT
Indicators and Warning
The indicators should illuminate when the
ignition key is turned to ON or START but
should go out after three seconds.
If the indicators do not illuminate, or the
ESC or ESC-OFF indicator does not go out
after 3 seconds, have the vehicle checked
by an authorized dealer.
Should there be any unusual operation of
the device while driving, the ESC-OFF
indicator illuminates as a warning.
If the ESC-OFF indicator illuminates, drive
your car to a safe place and stop the
engine.
Then, start the engine again to check if the
ESC-OFF indicator goes out.
If the indicator remains lit even after the
engine has been started, have your car
checked by an authorized Hyundai dealer.
C310B01NF-AAT
ESC ON/OFF Mode
When the ESC is operating, the ESC indi-
cator in the instrument cluster will blink.
If you turn the system off by pressing the
ESC switch, the ESC-OFF indicator will
come on and stay on. In the ESC-OFF
mode, the stability control will be
deactivated. Adjust your driving accord-
ingly. To turn the system back on, press the
switch again. The ESC-OFF indicator
should go off.
NOTE:
The ESC mode will automatically be
turned ON after the engine is turned off
and restarted.
CAUTION:
Driving with varying tire or wheel sizes
may cause the ESC system to
malfunction. When replacing tires, make
sure they are the same size as your
original tires.
!
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
15
!
GOOD BRAKING PRACTICES
C130A02A-AAT
WARNING:
o Whenever leaving vehicle or parking,
always set the parking brake as far as
possible and fully engage the
vehicle's transaxle into the park
position. Vehicles not fully engaged
in park with the parking brake set are
at risk for moving inadvertently and
injuring yourself or others.
o All vehicles should always have the
parking brake fully engaged when
parking to avoid inadvertent
movement of the car which can injure
occupants or pedestrians.
o Nothing should be carried on top of
the shelf panel behind the rear seat. If
there were an accident or a sudden
stop, such objects could move forward
and cause damage to the vehicle or
injure the occupants.
o After being parked, check to be sure the
parking brake is not engaged and that the
parking brake indicator light is out before
driving away.
o Driving through water may get the brakes
wet. They can also get wet when the car is
washed. Wet brakes can be dangerous!
Your car will not stop as quickly if the brakes
are wet. Wet brakes may cause the car to
pull to one side. To dry the brakes, apply
the brakes lightly until the braking action
returns to normal, taking care to keep the
car under control at all times. If the braking
action does not return to normal, stop as
soon as it is safe to do so and call your
Hyundai dealer for assistance.
o Don't coast down hills with the car out of
gear. This is extremely hazardous. Keep
the car in gear at all times, use the brakes
to slow down, then shift to a lower gear so
that engine braking will help you maintain
a safe speed.
o Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting your
foot on the brake pedal while driving can
be dangerous because it can result in the
brakes overheating and losing their
effectiveness. It also increases the wear of
the brake components.
o If a tire goes flat while you are driving, apply
the brakes gently and keep the car pointed
straight ahead while you slow down. When
you are moving slowly enough for it to be
safe to do so, pull off the road and stop in
a safe place.
o If your car is equipped with an automatic
transaxle, don't let your car creep
forward. To avoid creeping forward,
keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal
when the car is stopped.
o Use caution when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake and
place the gear selector lever in "P"
(automatic transaxle) or in first or reverse
gear (manual transaxle). If your car is
facing downhill, turn the front wheels
into the curb to help keep the car from
rolling. If your car is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the curb to
help keep the car from rolling. If there is
no curb or if it is required by other
conditions to keep the car from rolling,
block the wheels.
o Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged
position. This is most likely to happen
when there is an accumulation of snow
or ice around or near the rear brakes or
if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk that
the parking brake may freeze, apply it
only temporarily while you put the gear
selector lever in "P" (automatic) or in first
or reverse gear (manual transaxle) and
block the rear wheels so the car cannot
roll. Then release the parking brake.
o Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade
with the accelerator pedal. This can
cause the transaxle to overheat. Always
use the brake pedal or parking brake.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
16
o Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary
weight in your car. Weight reduces fuel
economy.
o Don't let the engine idle longer than
necessary. If you are waiting (and not in
traffic), turn off your engine and restart
only when you're ready to go.
o Remember, your Hyundai does not re-
quire extended warm-up. After the en-
gine has started, allow the engine to run
for 10 to 20 seconds prior to placing the
vehicle in gear. In very cold weather,
however, give your engine a slightly
longer warm-up period.
o Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
Lugging is driving too slowly in too high
a gear resulting in the engine bucking.
If this happens, shift to a lower gear.
Over-revving is racing the engine
beyond its safe limit. This can be avoided
by shifting at the recommended speeds.
o Use your air conditioning sparingly. The
air conditioning system is operated by
engine power so your fuel economy is
reduced when you use it.
o Take care of your tires. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pressure.
Incorrect inflation, either too much or
too little, results in unnecessary tire
wear. Check the tire pressures at least
once a month.
o Be sure that the wheels are aligned
correctly. Improper alignment can result
from hitting curbs or driving too fast over
irregular surfaces. Poor alignment
causes faster tire wear and may also
result in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.
o Keep your car in good condition. For
better fuel economy and reduced
maintenance costs, maintain your car
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in Section 5. If you drive your
car in severe conditions, more frequent
maintenance is required (see Section 5
for details).
o Keep your car clean. For maximum
service, your Hyundai should be kept
clean and free of corrosive materials. It
is especially important that mud, dirt,
ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate
on the underside of the car. This extra
weight can result in increased fuel
consumption and also contribute to cor-
rosion.
DRIVING FOR ECONOMY
C140A02A-AAT
You can save fuel and get more miles from
your car if you follow these suggestions:
o Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a
moderate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit"
starts or full-throttle shifts and maintain
a steady cruising speed. Don't race
between stoplights. Try to adjust your
speed to that of the other traffic so you
don't have to change speeds unneces-
sarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos-
sible. Always maintain a safe distance
from other vehicles so you can avoid
unnecessary braking. This also reduces
brake wear.
o Drive at a moderate speed. The faster
you drive, the more fuel your car uses.
Driving at a moderate speed, especially
on the highway, is one of the most
effective ways to reduce fuel
consumption.
o Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal.
This can increase fuel consumption and
also increase wear on these
components. In addition, driving with
your foot resting on the brake pedal may
cause the brakes to overheat, which
reduces their effectiveness and may
lead to more serious consequences.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
17
SMOOTH CORNERING
C150A01A-AAT
Avoid braking or gear changing in corners,
especially when roads are wet. Ideally,
corners should always be taken under
gentle acceleration. If you follow these
suggestions, tire wear will be held to a
minimum.
C160A01A-AAT
The more severe weather conditions of
winter result in greater wear and other
problems. To minimize the problems of
winter driving, you should follow these
suggestions:
C160B01A-AAT
Snowy or Icy Conditions
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may
be necessary to use snow tires or to install
tire chains on your tires. If snow tires are
needed, it is necessary to select tires
equivalent in size and type of the original
equipment tires. Failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of
your car. Furthermore, speeding, rapid
acceleration, sudden brake applications,
and sharp turns are potentially very
hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine braking to
the fullest extent. Sudden brake applications
on snowy or icy roads may cause skids to
occur. You need to keep sufficient distance
between the vehicle in operation in front
and your vehicle. Also, apply the brake
gently. It should be noted that installing tire
chains on the tire will provide a greater
driving force, but will not prevent side skids.
NOTE:
Tire chains are not legal in all states.
Check state laws before fitting tire
chains.
WINTER DRIVING
C160D01A-AAT
Check Battery and Cables
Winter puts additional burdens on the
battery system. Visually inspect the battery
and cables as described in Section 6. The
level of charge in your battery can be
checked by your Hyundai dealer or a
service station.
C160C01A-AAT
Use High Quality Ethylene Glycol
Coolant
Your Hyundai is delivered with high quality
ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling
system. It is the only type of coolant that
should be used because it helps prevent
corrosion in the cooling system, lubricates
the water pump and prevents freezing. Be
sure to replace or replenish your coolant in
accordance with the maintenance
schedule in Section 5. Before winter, have
your coolant tested to assure that its
freezing point is sufficient for the
temperatures anticipated during the winter.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
18
C160J01A-AAT
Don't Let Ice and Snow Accumulate
Underneath
Under some conditions, snow and ice can
build up under the fenders and interfere
with the steering. When driving in severe
winter conditions where this may happen,
you should periodically check underneath
the car to be sure the movement of the front
wheels and the steering components is
not obstructed.
C160I01A-AAT
Don't Let Your Parking Brake Freeze
Under some conditions your parking brake
can freeze in the engaged position. This
is most likely to happen when there is an
accumulation of snow or ice around or
near the rear brakes or if the brakes are
wet. If there is a risk the parking brake may
freeze, apply it only temporarily while you
put the gear selector lever in "P" (automatic)
or in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle)
and block the rear wheels so the car cannot
roll. Then release the parking brake.
C160H02A-AAT
Use Approved Window Washer Anti-
Freeze in System
To keep the water in the window washer
system from freezing, add an approved
window washer anti-freeze solution in
accordance with instructions on the
container. Window washer anti-freeze is
available from Hyundai dealers and most
auto parts outlets. Do not use engine coolant
or other types of anti-freeze as these may
damage the paint finish.
C160G01A-AAT
To Keep Locks from Freezing
To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an
approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into the
key opening. If a lock is covered with ice,
squirt it with an approved de-icing fluid to
remove the ice. If the lock is frozen internally,
you may be able to thaw it out by using a
heated key. Handle the heated key with
care to avoid injury.
C160F01A-AAT
Check Spark Plugs and Ignition
System
Inspect your spark plugs as described in
Section 6 and replace them if necessary.
Also check all ignition wiring and
components to be sure they are not cracked,
worn or damaged in any way.
C160E01A-AAT
Change to "Winter Weight" Oil if
Necessary
In some climates it is recommended that a
lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be used
during cold weather. See Section 9 for
recommendations. If you aren't sure what
weight oil you should use, consult your
Hyundai dealer.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
19
!
C160K01A-AAT
Carry Emergency Equipment
Depending on the severity of the weather
where you drive your car, you should carry
appropriate emergency equipment. Some
of the items you may want to carry include
tire chains, tow straps or chains, flashlight,
emergency flares, sand, a shovel, jumper
cables, a window scraper, gloves, ground
cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.
HIGHER SPEED MOTORING
C170A02A-AAT
Pre-Trip Inspections
1. Tires:
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to speci-
fication. Low tire inflation pressures will
result in overheating and possible failure
of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires which
may result in reduced traction or tire failure.
NOTE:
Never exceed the maximum tire inflation
pressure shown on the tires.
2. Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil:
High speed travel consumes more fuel
than urban motoring. Do not forget to check
both engine coolant and engine oil.
3. Drive belt:
A loose or damaged drive belt may result
in overheating of the engine.
WARNING:
o Underinflated or overinflated tires
can cause poor handling, loss of
vehicle control, and sudden tire failure
leading to accidents, injuries, and
even death. Always check tires are
properly inflated before driving. Refer
to pages 2-23 and 8-3 for proper tire
pressures and further information.
o Driving on tires with no or insufficient
tread is dangerous. Worn-out tires
can result in loss of vehicle control,
collisions, injury, and even death.
Worn-out tires should be replaced as
soon as possible and should never be
used for driving. Always check tire
tread before driving your car. Refer
to 8-10 for further information and
tread limits.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
20
C190B01S-AAT
Trailer Hitches
Select the proper hitch and ball
combination, making sure that its location
is compatible with that of the trailer or
vehicle being towed.
Use a quality non-equalizing hitch which
distributes the tongue load uniformly
throughout the chassis.
The hitch should be bolted securely to the
car and installed by a qualified technician.
DO NOT USE A HITCH DESIGNED FOR
TEMPORARY INSTALLATION AND
NEVER USE ONE THAT ATTACHES
ONLY TO THE BUMPER.
C190C01Y-AAT
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking
system, make sure it conforms to federal
and/or local regulations and that it is
properly installed and operating correctly.
NOTE:
If you tow a trailer or vehicle, your car will
require more frequent maintenance due
to the additional load. See Maintenance
Under Severe Usage Conditions" on
page 5-6.
TRAILER OR VEHICLE TOWING
!
C190A01TG-AAT
If you are considering towing with your car,
you should first check with your State's
Department of Motor Vehicles to determine
their legal requirements.
Since laws vary from State to State the
requirements for towing trailers, cars, or
other types of vehicles or apparatus may
differ. Ask your Hyundai dealer for further
details before towing.
CAUTION:
o Do not do any towing with your car
during its first 1,200 miles (2,000 km)
in order to allow the engine to properly
break in. Failure to heed this caution
may result in serious engine or
transaxle damage.
o When towing a trailer, be sure to con-
sult your Hyundai dealer for further
information on additional require-
ments such as a towing kit, etc.
USE OF LIGHTS
C180A01A-AAT
Check your lights regularly for correct op-
eration and always keep them clean. When
driving during the day in conditions of poor
visibility, it is helpful to drive with headlights
on low beam. This enables you to be seen,
as well as to see.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
21
C190D01S-AAT
Safety Chains
Should the hitch connection between your
car and the trailer or vehicle you are towing
fail, the trailer or vehicle could wander
dangerously across other lanes of traffic
and ultimately leave the roadway. To
eliminate this potentially dangerous
situation, safety chains, attached between
your car and the trailer or towed vehicle,
are required in most states.
CAUTION:
o Never connect a trailer brake system
directly to the vehicle brake system.
o When towing a trailer on steep grades
(in excess of 6%) pay close attention
to the engine coolant temperature
gauge to ensure the engine does not
overheat. If the needle of the coolant
temperature gauge moves across the
dial towards "H" (HOT), pull over and
stop as soon as it is safe to do so, and
allow the engine to idle until it cools
down. You may proceed once the
engine has cooled sufficiently.
!
C190E02JM
Gross Axle Weight
Gross Vehicle
Weight
2. The total gross vehicle weight with
trailer must not exceed the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) shown
on the vehicle identification plate (see
page 8-2). The total gross vehicle
weight is the combined weight of the
vehicle, driver, all passengers and
their luggage, cargo, hitch, trailer
tongue load and other optional
equipment.
C190E01NF-AAT
Trailer Weight Limit
Tongue Load Total Trailer Weight
o Keep the tongue load 10% of the total
trailer load.
o
Tongue load
o Tongue loads can be increased or de-
creased by re-distributing the load in
the trailer.
This can be verified by checking the
total weight of the loaded trailer and
then checking the load on the tongue.
C190E01JM
x 100 = 10% (MAX)
Total trailer weight
NOTE:
1. Never load the trailer with more weight
in the back than in the front. About
60% of the trailer load should be in the
front half on the trailer and the
remaining 40% in the rear.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
22
C190F01Y-GAT
Trailer or Vehicle Towing Tips
1. Before towing, check hitch and safety
chain connections as well as proper
operation of the trailer running lights,
brake lights, and turn signals.
2. Always drive your vehicle at a moderate
speed. (Less than 60 mph)
3. Trailer towing requires more fuel than
normal conditions.
4. To maintain engine braking efficiency
and electrical charging performance,
do not tow a trailer with the transaxle in
fifth gear (manual transaxle).
5. Always secure items in the trailer to
prevent load shift while driving.
6. Check the condition and air pressure of
all tires on the trailer and your car. Low
tire pressure can seriously affect the
handling. Also check the spare tire.
7. The vehicle/trailer combination is more
affected by crosswind and buffeting.
When being passed by a large vehicle,
keep a constant speed and steer straight
ahead. If there is too much wind
buffeting, slow down to get out of the
other vehicle's air turbulence.
!
lbs(kg)
!
Tongue
100 (45)
-
With 3.3L
Brake 2.4L
Without Brake
Maximum Towable Weight
Trailer
1000 (450)
1000 (450)
500 (225)
CAUTION:
The following specifications are recom-
mended when towing a trailer. The loaded
trailer weight cannot safely exceed the
values in the chart below.
WARNING:
o Improperly loading your vehicle and
trailer can seriously affect its steer-
ing and braking performance causing
a crash which could cause serious
injury or death.
o Towing a trailer affects vehicle han-
dling and braking.
o Drive more slowly when towing a trailer
and allow more distance when
braking.
o Be careful when driving in slippery
and windy conditions.
o Be careful when turning and while
driving up and down hills.
3. The front or rear axle weight must not
exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) shown on the vehicle identi-
fication plate (see page 8-2). It is
possible that your towing package
does not exceed the GVWR but
exceeds the GAWR. Improper trailer
loading and/or too much luggage in
the trunk can overload the rear axle.
Redistribute the load and check the
axle weight again.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
23
8. When parking your car and trailer, es-
pecially on a hill, be sure to follow all
the normal precautions. Turn your front
wheel into the curb, set the parking
brake firmly, and put the transaxle in 1st
or Reverse (manual) or Park (automatic).
In addition, place wheel chocks at each
of the trailer's tires.
9. If the trailer has electric brakes, start
your vehicle and trailer moving, and
then apply the trailer brake controller by
hand to be sure the brakes are working.
This lets you check your electrical
connection at the same time.
10. During your trip, check occasionally to
be sure that the load is secure, and that
the lights and any trailer brakes are still
working.
11. Avoid jerky starts, sudden acceleration
or sudden stops.
12. Avoid sharp turns and rapid lane
changes.
13. Avoid holding the brake pedal down
too long or too frequently. This could
cause the brakes to overheat, resulting
in reduced braking efficiency.
14. When going down a hill, shift into a
lower gear and use the engine braking
effect.
When ascending a long grade, down-
shift the transaxle to a lower gear and
reduce speed to reduce chances of
engine overloading and/or overheat-
ing.
CAUTION:
If overheating should occur when tow-
ing, (the temperature gauge reads near
red zone), taking the following action
may reduce or eliminate the problem.
1. Turn off the air conditioner.
2. Reduce highway speed.
3. Select a lower gear when going uphill.
4. While in stop and go traffic, place the
gear selector in park or neutral and
idle the engine at a higher speed.
!
15. If you have to stop while going uphill,
do not hold the vehicle in place by
pressing on the accelerator. This can
cause the automatic transaxle to over-
heat. Use the parking brake or
footbrake.
NOTE:
When towing check transaxle fluid more
frequently.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
24
The tire label located on the driver's
side of the center pillar outer panel
gives the original tire size, cold tire
pressures recommended for your ve-
hicle, the number of people that can be
in your vehicle and vehicle capacity
weight.
Vehicle capacity weight:
860 lbs (390 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-
mum combined weight of occupants
and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped
with a trailer, the combined weight in-
cludes the tongue load.
Seating capacity:
Total: 5 persons
(Front seat: 2 persons,
Rear seat: 3 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum num-
ber of occupants including a driver,
your vehicle may carry. However the
seating capacity may be reduced based
upon the weight of all of the occupants,
and the weight of the cargo being car-
ried or towed.
Do not overload the vehicle as there is
a limit to the total weight, or load limit
including occupants and cargo, the
vehicle can carry.
Towing capacity:
Towing capacity is the maximum trailer
weight including its cargo weight, your
vehicle can tow. See the section "Trailer
or Vehicle Towing" for specifications
about the trailer weight.
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT
C190F02JM-AAT
Tire and Loading Information Label
Type A
Type B
ONF050301N
ONF050300N
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
25
C190F01JM
Total
1400 lbs
(635 kg)
300 lbs
(136 kg)
1100 lbs
(499 kg)
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
Subtract Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2
Available Cargo and
Luggage Weight
ABC
(4)The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
"XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs, and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capac-
ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) =
650 lbs.)
(5)Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calcu-
lated in Step 4.
(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be trans-
ferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this re-
duces the available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity of your vehicle.
Cargo capacity:
The cargo capacity of your vehicle will
increase or decrease depending on the
weight and the number of occupants
and the tongue load, if your vehicle is
equipped with a trailer.
Steps for Determining Correct Load
Limit
(1)Locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs'' on
your vehicle's placard.
(2)Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
26
C190F03JM
Total
1400 lbs
(635 kg)
860 lbs
(390 kg)
540 lbs
(245 kg)
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
Subtract Occupant Weight
172 lbs (78 kg) x 5
Available Cargo Weight
Example 3
ABC
Refer to your vehicle's tire and loading
information label for specific informa-
tion about your vehicle's capacity weight
and seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers and
cargo should never exceed your
vehicle's capacity weight.
C190F02JM
Example 2
Total
1400 lbs
(635 kg)
750 lbs
(340 kg)
650 lbs
(295 kg)
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
Subtract Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) x 5
Available Cargo and
Luggage Weight
ABC
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
27
!
!
This label also tells you the maximum
weights that can be supported by the
front and rear axles, called Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the
actual loads on your front and rear
axles, you need to go to a weigh station
and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can
help you with this. Be sure to spread out
your load equally on the left and right
sides of the centerline.
WARNING:
o Never exceed the GVWR for your
vehicle, the GAWR for either the
front or rear axle and vehicle ca-
pacity weight. Exceeding these rat-
ings can cause an accident or
vehicle damage. You can calcu-
late the weight of your load by
weighing the items (or people)
before putting them in the vehicle.
Be careful not to overload your
vehicle.
WARNING:
o Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR, either the
maximum front or rear GAWR and
vehicle capacity weight. If you do,
parts, including tires on your ve-
hicle can break, and it can change
the way your vehicle handles and
braking ability. This could cause
you to lose control and crash.
Also, overloading can shorten the
life of your vehicle.
C190G03JM-AAT
Certification Label
The certification label is located on the
driver's side center pillar outer panel.
The label shows the maximum allow-
able weight of the fully loaded vehicle.
This is called the GVWR (Gross Ve-
hicle Weight Rating). The GVWR in-
cludes the weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, fuel and cargo.
C190G01A
2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
28
!
WARNING:
Items you carry inside your vehicle
can strike and injure people in a
sudden stop or turn, or in a crash.
o Put things in the cargo area of
your vehicle. Try to spread the
weight evenly.
o Never stack items, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle above the tops
of the seats.
o Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
o When you carry something inside
the vehicle, secure it.
o Do not drive with a seat folded
down unless necessary.
NOTE:
o Overloading your vehicle may
cause damage. Repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do
not overload your vehicle.
o Using heavier suspension com-
ponents to get added durability
might not change your weight rat-
ings. Ask your dealer to help you
load your vehicle the right way.
The label will help you decide how much
cargo and installed equipment your
vehicle can carry.
If you carry items inside your vehicle –
like suitcases, tools, packages, or any-
thing else – they move as fast as the
vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, the items
will keep going and can cause an injury
if they strike the driver or a passenger.
!
WARNING:
o Overloading your vehicle can
cause heat buildup in your
vehicle's tires and possible tire
failure that could lead to a crash.
o Overloading your vehicle can
cause increased stopping dis-
tances that could lead to a crash.
o A crash resulting from poor han-
dling vehicle damage, tire failure,
or increased stopping distances
could result in serious injury or
death.
If the Engine Will Not Start ............................................ 3-2
Jump Starting ................................................................ 3-3
If the Engine Overheats ................................................ 3-4
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .................... 3-5
Spare Tire ..................................................................... 3-9
If You Have a Flat Tire ................................................ 3-10
Changing a Flat Tire .................................................... 3-10
If Your Vehicle Must Be Towed................................... 3-15
If You Lose Your Keys ................................................ 3-17
3
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
3
3
2
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
!
D010A01A-AAT
D010B02A-AAT
If Engine Doesn't Turn Over or Turns
Over Slowly
D010C02Y-AAT
If Engine Turns Over Normally but
Does Not Start
1. Check fuel level.
2. With the key in the "OFF" position, check
all connectors at ignition, coil and spark
plugs. Reconnect any that may be dis-
connected or loose.
3. Check the fuel line in the engine com-
partment.
4. If the engine still does not start, call a
Hyundai dealer or seek other qualified
assistance.
D010D01NF-AAT
If Engine Stalls While Driving
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
a straight line.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Move cautiously off the road to a safe
place.
4. Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, contact a Hyundai
dealer or seek other qualified assis-
tance.
If the engine stalls at a crossroad and
crossing
1. Turn on your emergency flashers.
2. Set the shift lever in the N (Neutral)
position. Try to start the engine.
3. If your vehicle does not start, push the
vehicle to a safe place (if it is safe to do
so) with the shift lever in the N (Neutral)
position.
4. Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle does not start, contact a
HYUNDAI dealer or seek other quali-
fied assistance.
WARNING:
If the engine will not start, do not push or
pull the car to start it. This could result in
a collision or cause other damage. In
addition, push or pull starting may cause
the catalytic converter to be overloaded
and create a fire hazard.
1. If your car has an automatic transaxle,
be sure the gear selector lever is in "N"
or "P" and the emergency brake is set.
2. Check the battery connections to be
sure they are clean and tight.
ONF078017
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light dims
or goes out when you operate the starter,
the battery is discharged.
4. Check the starter connections to be
sure they are securely tightened.
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it.
See instructions for "Jump Starting".
3
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
3
JUMP STARTING
!
o If you should accidentally get acid on
your skin or in your eyes, immediately
remove any contaminated clothing and
flush the area with clean water for at
least 15 minutes. Then promptly obtain
medical attention. If you must be trans-
ported to an emergency facility, continue
to apply water to the affected area with
a sponge or cloth.
o The gas produced by the battery during
the jump-start operation is highly
explosive. Do not smoke or allow a
spark or an open flame in the vicinity.
o The battery being used to provide the
jump start must be 12-volt. If you cannot
determine that it is a 12-volt battery, do
not attempt to use it for the jump start.
o To jump start a car with a discharged
battery, follow this procedure exactly:
1. If the booster battery is installed in
another vehicle, be sure the two vehicles
are not touching.
2. Turn off all unnecessary lights and
acces-sories in both vehicles.
3. Attach the clamps of the jumper cable in
the exact location shown on the illustra-
tion. First, attach one clamp of the jumper
cable to the positive (+) post or cable of
the discharged battery.
Then attach the other end of the same
cable to the positive (+) post or cable of
the booster battery. Next, using the other
cable, attach one clamp to the negative
(-) post or cable of the booster battery.
Then attach the other end of that cable
to a solid metal part of the engine of the
vehicle with the discharged battery
away from the battery. Do not connect
the cable to any moving part.
4. Start the engine in the car with the
booster battery and let it run for a few
minutes. This will help to assure that the
booster battery is fully charged. During
the jumping operation, run the engine
in this vehicle at about 2,000 rpm.
5. Start the engine in the car with the
discharged battery using the normal
starting procedure. After the engine
starts, leave the jumper cables con-
nected and let the engine run at fast idle
or about 2,000 rpm for several minutes.
6. Carefully remove the jumper cables in
the reverse order of attachment.
If you do not know why your battery became
discharged (because the lights were left
on, etc.), have the charging system checked
by your Hyundai dealer.
D020A03A-AAT
WARNING:
The gas produced by the battery during
the jump-start operation is highly
explosive. If these instructions are not
followed exactly, serious personal injury
and damage to the vehicle may occur! If
you are not sure how to follow this
procedure, seek qualified assistance.
Automobile batteries contain sulfuric
acid. This is poisonous and highly
corrosive. When jump starting, wear pro-
tective glasses and be careful not to get
acid on yourself, your clothing or on the
car.
HNF4001
Booster
battery
Discharged
battery
3
4
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
!
!
!
WARNING:
While the engine is running, keep hair,
hands and clothing away from moving
parts such as the fan and drive belts to
prevent injury.
5. If the water pump drive belt is broken or
engine coolant is leaking out, stop the
engine immediately and call the nearest
Hyundai dealer for assistance.
WARNING:
Do not remove the radiator cap when the
engine is hot. This can allow coolant to be
blown out of the opening and cause se-
rious burns.
6. If you cannot find the cause of the
overheat-ing, wait until the engine
temperature has returned to normal.
Then, if coolant has been lost, carefully
add coolant to the reservoir (page 6-9)
to bring the fluid level in the reservoir up
to the halfway mark.
7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for
further signs of overheating. If
overheating happens again, call a
Hyundai dealer for assistance.
CAUTION:
Serious loss of coolant indicates there is
a leak in the cooling system and this
should be checked as soon as possible
by a Hyundai dealer.
D030A02A-AAT
If your temperature gauge indicates over-
heating, you experience a loss of power, or
hear loud pinging or knocking, the engine
is probably too hot. If this happens, you
should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it
is safe to do so.
2. Place the gear selector lever in "P"
(automatic) or neutral (manual
transaxle) and set the parking brake. If
the air conditioning is on, turn it off.
3. If engine coolant is running out under
the car or steam is coming out from the
hood, stop the engine. Do not open the
hood until the coolant has stopped
running or the steaming has stopped. If
there is no visible loss of engine coolant
and no steam, leave the engine running
and check to be sure the engine cooling
fan is operating. If the fan is not running,
turn the engine off.
4. Check to see if the water pump drive belt
is missing. If it is not missing, check to
see that it is tight. If the drive belt seems
to be satisfactory, check for coolant
leaking from the radiator, hoses or under
the car. (If the air conditioning had been
in use, it is normal for cold water to be
draining from it when you stop).
3
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
5
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
ONF048131
C320A01JM-AAT
TPMS Malfunction Indicator
Low Tire Pressure Telltale
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly when
cold and inflated to the inflation pres-
sure recommended by the vehicle manu-
facturer on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should de-
termine the proper tire inflation pres-
sure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your ve-
hicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure tell-
tale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s han-
dling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low
tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not operat-
ing properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is provided by a separate tell-
tale, which displays the symbol "TPMS"
when illuminated. When the malfunc-
tion indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low
tire pressure as intended. TPMS mal-
functions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels
on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale
after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that
the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
3
6
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
!
Low tire pressure telltale
When the tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem warning telltale is illuminated, one
or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated.
Immediately reduce your speed, avoid
hard cornering and anticipate increased
stopping distances. You should stop
and check your tires as soon as pos-
sible. Inflate the tires to the proper
pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s
placard or tire inflation pressure label
located on the driver’s side center pillar
outer panel. If you cannot reach a ser-
vice station or if the tire cannot hold the
newly added air, replace the low pres-
sure tire with the temporary spare tire.
Then the TPMS malfunction indicator
or the Low Tire Pressure telltale may
turn on after restarting and about 20
minutes of continuous driving before
you have the low-pressure tire repaired
and reinstalled on the vehicle.
CAUTION:
In winter or cold weather, the low tire
pressure telltale may be illuminated
if the tire pressure was adjusted to
the recommended tire inflation pres-
sure in warm weather. It does not
mean your TPMS is malfunctioning
because the decreased temperature
leads to a proportional lowering of
tire pressure.
When you drive your vehicle from a
warm area to a cold area or from a
cold area to a warm area, or the
outside temperature is greatly higher
or lower, you should check the tire
inflation pressure and adjust the tires
to the recommended tire inflation
pressure.
Always check your tire inflation pres-
sures when the tires are cold, before
you have driven on them.
WARNING - Low pressure
Significantly low tire pressure makes
the vehicle unstable and can contrib-
ute to loss of vehicle control and
increased braking distances. Contin-
ued driving on low pressure tires will
cause the tires to overheat and fail.
TPMS (Tire pressure moni-
toring system) malfunction
indicator
The TPMS malfunction indicator turns
on and stays on when there is a problem
with the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem. If the system is able to correctly
detect an under-inflation warning at the
same time as system failure then it will
illuminate both the TPMS malfunction
and the low tire pressure telltale, e.g. if
the Front Left sensor fails, the TPMS
malfunction indicator turns on, but if the
Front Right, Rear Left, or Rear Right tire
is under-inflated, the low tire pressure
telltale may turn on at the same time as
the TPMS malfunction indicator.
!
3
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
7
Have the system checked by an autho-
rized Hyundai dealer as soon as pos-
sible to determine the cause of the
problem.
NOTE:
o The TPMS malfunction indicator
may be illuminated if the vehicle
is operated in areas close to elec-
tric power supply cables or radio
transmitters such as near police
stations, government and public
offices, broadcasting stations,
military installations, airports, or
transmitting towers, etc. which can
interfere with normal operation of
the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem (TPMS).
o The TPMS malfunction indicator
may be illuminated if snow chains
or some electronic devices, such
as notebook computers, are used
in the vehicle. This can interfere
with normal operation of the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS).
o If there is a failed tire sensor, it is
possible for the TPMS to tempo-
rarily learn a replacement sensor
if closely driven to another vehicle
that is also equipped with TPMS.
In rare cases, this may tempo-
rarily delay the TPMS malfunction
indicator from turning on.
Changing a tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire
Pressure telltale will turn on. Have the
flat tire repaired by an authorized Hyundai
dealer as soon as possible or replace
the flat tire with the temporary spare
tire. NEVER use a puncture-repairing
agent to repair and/or inflate a low
pressure tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the tire
behind the valve stem. You must use
TPMS specific wheels. It is recom-
mended that you always have your tires
serviced by an authorized Hyundai
dealer.
After you replace the low pressure tire
with the spare tire, the TPMS malfunc-
tion indicator or the Low Tire Pressure
telltale may illuminate after restarting
and driving for about 20 minutes.
Once the low pressure tire is re-inflated
to the recommended pressure and in-
stalled on the vehicle, the TPMS mal-
function indicator and the low tire pres-
sure telltale will extinguish. If the low
pressure and TPMS malfunction indi-
cators are not extinguished after about
20 minutes of continuous driving, please
visit an authorized Hyundai dealer.
You may not be able to identify a low tire
by simply looking at it. Always use a
good quality tire pressure gauge to
measure the tire's inflation pressure.
Please note that a tire that is hot (from
being driven) will have a higher pres-
sure measurement than a tire that is
cold (from sitting stationary for at least
3 hours and driven less than 1 mile
during that 3 hour period). Allow the tire
to cool before measuring the inflation
pressure.
3
8
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
!
!
!
Always be sure the tire is cold before
inflating to the recommended pressure.
A cold tire means the vehicle has been
sitting for 3 hours and driven for less
than 1 mile in that 3 hour period.
NOTE:
o Do not use any tire sealant if your
vehicle is equipped with a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System. The
liquid sealant can damage the tire
pressure sensors.
o In order for the system to correctly
monitor tires for under-inflation,
there should be a total of 4 sen-
sors, one fitted to each of the four
wheel positions. There should be
no other sensors in the vehicle
including for the spare tire. This
could cause the system to moni-
tor the wrong sensor.
WARNING - TPMS
o The TPMS cannot alert you to se-
vere and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors.
o If you feel any vehicle instability,
take your foot off the accelerator
and slowly move to a safe position
off the road.
WARNING:
Tampering with, modifying, or dis-
abling the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) components may
interfere with the system's ability to
warn the driver of low tire pressure
conditions and/or TPMS malfunc-
tions. Tampering with, modifying,
or disabling the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System (TPMS) components
may void the warranty for that por-
tion of the vehicle.
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interfer-
ence that may cause undesired op-
eration.
WARNING:
Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party re-
sponsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
3
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
9
!
SPARE TIRE
D040A03GK-AAT
TEMPORARY SPARE TIRE
The following instructions for the tem-
porary spare tire should be observed:
1. Check inflation pressure as soon as
practical after installing the spare
tire, and adjust to the specified pres-
sure. The tire pressure should be
periodically checked and maintained
at the specified pressure while the
tire is stored.
Tire Size
Inflation Pressure
T125/80 D16
420 KPA(60 PSI)
4. As the temporary spare tire is spe-
cifically designed for your car, it
should not be used on any other
vehicle.
5. The temporary spare tire should not
be used on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow tires,
wheel covers or trim rings be used
with the temporary spare wheel. If
such use is attempted, damage to
these items or other car components
may occur.
6. The temporary spare tire pressure
should be checked once a month
while the tire is stored.
2. The spare tire should only be used
temporarily and should be returned
to the luggage compartment as soon
as the original tire can be repaired or
replaced.
3. Continuous use at speeds of over 50
mph (80 km/h) is not recommended.
Spare Tire Pressure
CAUTION:
o Do not use snow chains with your
temporary spare tire.
o Do not use more than one tempo-
rary spare tire at a time.
o Do not tow a trailer while the tem-
porary spare tire is installed.
!
WARNING:
The temporary spare tire is for emer-
gency use only. Do not operate your
vehicle on this temporary spare at
speeds over 50 mph (80 kmh). The
original tire should be repaired or
replaced as soon as is possible to
avoid failure of the spare possibly
leading to personal injury or death.
3
10
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
CHANGING A FLAT TIREIF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
D060A01A-AAT
The procedure described on the follow-
ing pages can be used to rotate tires as
well as to change a flat tire. When
preparing to change a flat tire, check to
be sure the gear selector lever is in "P"
(automatic transaxle) or reverse gear
(manual transaxle) and that the parking
brake is set, then:
D050A01A-AAT
If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal
and let the car slow down while driving
straight ahead. Do not apply the brakes
immediately or attempt to pull off the
road as this may cause a loss of
control. When the car has slowed to
such a speed that it is safe to do so,
brake carefully and pull off the road.
Drive off the road as far as possible
and park on firm, level ground. If you
are on a divided highway, do not park
in the median area between the two
traffic lanes.
2. When the car is stopped, turn on your
emergency hazard flashers, set the
parking brake and put the transaxle in
"P" (automatic) or reverse (manual
transaxle).
3. Have all passengers get out of the car.
Be sure they all get out on the side of
the car that is away from traffic.
4. Change the tire according to the in-
structions provided as follows.
D060A01NF-A
D040B01NF-GAT
Handling the Spare Tire
To remove the spare tire, take out the
tool receptacle and remove the installa-
tion bolt by turning it counterclockwise.
After replacing the spare tire, install and
tighten the bolt firmly with your fingers
until there is no more play in the spare
tire.
HNF4008
3
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
11
D060B01NF-GAT
1. Obtain Spare Tire and Tool
7D060B01NF-A
Take out the tool receptacle and turn
the installation bolt counterclockwise
to remove spare tire from the trunk.
D060C01A-AAT
2. Block the Wheel
Block the wheel that is diagonally oppo-
site from the flat to keep the vehicle
from rolling when the car is raised on the
jack.
HNF4009
Flat tire
D060D01A-AAT
3. Loosen Wheel Nuts
The wheel nuts should be loosened
slightly before raising the car. To loosen
the nuts, turn the wrench handle coun-
terclockwise. When doing this, be sure
that the socket is seated completely
over the nut so it cannot slip off. For
maximum leverage, position the wrench
so the handle is to the left as shown in
the drawing. Then, while holding the
wrench near the end of the handle, push
down on it with steady pressure. Do not
remove the nuts at this time. Just
loosen them about one-half turn.
ONF068002
3
12
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
!
Raise the car high enough so that the
fully inflated spare tire can be installed.
To do this, you will need more ground
clearance than is required to remove
the flat tire.
D060F02E-AAT
5. Raising the Car
After inserting a wrench bar into the
wheel nut wrench, install the wrench bar
into the jack as shown in the drawing.
To raise the vehicle, turn the wheel nut
wrench clockwise. As the jack begins
to raise the vehicle, double check that
it is properly positioned and will not slip.
If the jack is on soft ground or sand,
place a board, brick, flat stone or other
object under the base of the jack to
keep it from sinking.
WARNING:
Do not get under the car when it is
supported by the jack! This is very
dangerous as the vehicle could fall
and cause serious injury or death.
No one should stay in the car while
the jack is being used.
7HNF4025
Wrench bar
Wheel nut
wrench
D060E01A-AAT
4. Put the Jack in Place
The base of the jack should be placed
on firm, level ground. The jack should
be positioned as shown in the drawing.
D060E01NF-A
3
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
13
D060G02Y-AAT
6. Changing Wheels
Loosen the wheel nuts and remove
them with your fingers. Slide the wheel
off the studs and lay it flat so it cannot
roll away. To put the wheel on the hub,
pick up the spare tire, line up the holes
with the studs and slide the wheel onto
them. If this is difficult, tip the wheel
slightly and get the top hole in the wheel
lined up with the top stud. Then jiggle
the wheel back and forth until the wheel
can be slid over the other studs.
D060G01NF-A
!
WARNING:
Wheels and wheel covers may have
sharp edges. Handle them carefully
to avoid possible severe injury.
D060G02NF
!
Before putting the wheel into place,
be sure that there is nothing on the
hub or wheel (such as mud, tar,
gravel, etc.) that interferes with the
wheel from fitting solidly against the
hub. If there is, remove it. If there is
not good contact on the mounting
surface between the wheel and hub,
the wheel nuts could come loose
and cause the loss of a wheel. Loss
of a wheel may result in loss of
control of the vehicle. This may cause
serious injury or death.
WARNING:
3
14
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
D060I01E-AAT
8. Lower Vehicle and Tighten Nuts
Lower the car to the ground by turning
the wheel nut wrench counterclock-
wise.
Then position the wrench as shown in
the drawing and tighten the wheel nuts.
Be sure the socket is seated com-
pletely over the nut. Do not stand on the
wrench handle or use an extension pipe
over the wrench handle.
Go around the wheel tightening every
other nut until they are all tight. Then
double-check each nut for tightness.
After changing wheels, have a techni-
cian tighten the wheel nuts to their
proper torque as soon as possible.
7D060I01NF
HNF4013-A
D060H02O-AAT
7. Reinstall Wheel Nuts
To reinstall the wheel, hold it on the
studs, put the wheel nuts on the studs
and tighten them finger tight. The nuts
should be installed with their small di-
ameter ends directed inward. Jiggle the
tire to be sure it is completely seated,
then tighten the nuts as much as pos-
sible with your fingers again.
D060H01NF-A
3
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
15
D060J02O-AAT
After Changing Wheels
If you have a tire gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure. If
the pressure is lower than recom-
mended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the correct
pressure. If it is too high, adjust it until
Wheel nut tightening torque:
Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:
65-80 lb.ft (900-1,100 kg.cm)
HNF5016-A
it is correct. Always reinstall the valve
cap after checking or adjusting tire
pressure. If the cap is not replaced, air
may leak from the tire. If you lose a
valve cap, buy another and install it as
soon as possible.
After you have changed wheels, al-
ways secure the flat tire in its place and
return the jack and tools to their proper
storage locations.
IF YOUR VEHICLE MUST BE
TOWED
D080A01O-GAT
If your vehicle has to be towed, it should be
done by your Hyundai dealer or a
commercial tow truck service. This will
help assure that your vehicle is not dam-
aged in towing. Also, professionals are
generally aware of local laws governing
towing. In any case, rather than risk damage
to your car, it is suggested that you show
this information to the tow truck operator.
Be sure that a safety chain system is used
and that all local laws are observed.
It is recommended that your vehicle be
towed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment with all the wheels off the
ground.
!
CAUTION:
o Your vehicle can be damaged if towed
incorrectly!
o Be sure the transaxle is in neutral.
o When the engine will not start, be sure
the steering is unlocked by placing
the key in the "ACC" position.
3
16
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
CAUTION:
o When towing the vehicle, take care
not to cause damage to the bumper or
underbody of the vehicle.
!
NOTE:
Before towing, check the level of the
automatic transaxle fluid. If it is below
the "HOT" range on the dipstick, add
fluid. If you cannot add fluid, a towing
dolly must be used.
2) If any of the loaded wheels or suspen-
sion components are damaged or the
vehicle is being towed with the front
wheels on the ground, use a towing
dolly under the front wheels.
o Manual Transaxle:
If you do not use a towing dolly, place
the ignition key in the "ACC" position
and put the transaxle in "N (Neutral)".
CAUTION:
Do not tow with the key removed or in the
"LOCK" position when towing from the
rear without a towing dolly.
D080B01NF
!
o Do not tow with sling type truck as this
may cause damage to the bumper or
underbody of the vehicle.
1) If the vehicle is being towed with the
rear wheels on the ground, be sure the
parking brake is released.
D080B01O-GAT
Towing the Vehicle
HNF4015
Your vehicle can be towed by wheel lift
type truck (1), (2) or flatbed equipment (3).
1)
2)
3)
dolly
3
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
17
!
D080B02NF
CAUTION:
o Automatic Transaxle:
Be sure to use a towing dolly under the
front wheels.
A vehicle with an automatic transaxle
should never be towed from the rear with
the front wheels on the ground. This can
cause serious damage to the transaxle.
3) It is recommended that your vehicle be
towed with all the wheels off the ground.
IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS
D120A01A-AAT
If you lose your keys, many Hyundai
dealers can make you a new key if you
have your key number.
If you lock the keys inside your car and you
cannot obtain a new key, many Hyundai
dealers can use special tools to open the
door for you.
4
Corrosion Protection ..................................................... 4-2
To Help Prevent Corrosion ........................................... 4-2
Washing and Waxing .................................................... 4-3
Cleaning the Interior ...................................................... 4-5
CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE
4
4
CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
2
CORROSION PROTECTION
E020B01A-AAT
Keep Your Car Clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is to
keep your car clean and free of corrosive
materials. Attention to the underside of the
car is particularly important.
o If you live in a high-corrosion area —
where road salts are used, near the
ocean, areas with industrial pollution,
acid rain, etc.—, you should take extra
care to prevent corrosion. In winter,
hose off the underside of your car at
least once a month and be sure to clean
the underside thoroughly when winter
is over.
o When cleaning underneath the car, give
particular attention to the components
under the fenders and other areas that
are hidden from view. Do a thorough
job; just dampening the accumulated
mud rather than washing it away will
accelerate corrosion rather than prevent
it. Water under high pressure and steam
are particularly effective in removing
accumulated mud and corrosive
materials.
E020A01A-AAT
You can help prevent corrosion from getting
started by observing the following:
E010D01A-AAT
Moisture Breeds Corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in which
corrosion is most likely to occur. For
example, corrosion is accelerated by high
humidity, particularly when temperatures
are just above freezing. In such conditions,
the corrosive material is kept in contact
with the car surfaces by moisture that is
slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive because it is
slow to dry and holds moisture in contact
with the vehicle. Although the mud appears
to be dry, it can still retain the moisture and
promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also accelerate
corrosion of parts that are not properly
ventilated so the moisture can be dispersed.
For all these reasons, it is particularly
important to keep your car clean and free
of mud or accumulations of other materials.
This applies not only to the visible surfaces
but particularly to the underside of the car.
E010C01A-AAT
High-Corrosion Areas
If you live in an area where your car is
regularly exposed to corrosive materials,
corrosion protection is particularly
important. Some of the common causes of
accelerated corrosion are road salts, dust
control chemicals, ocean air and industrial
pollution.
E010B01A-AAT
Common Causes of Corrosion
The most common causes of corrosion on
your car are:
o Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath the
car.
o Removal of paint or protective coatings
by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor
scrapes and dents which leave
unprotected metal exposed to corrosion.
E010A01A-AAT
Protecting Your Hyundai from Cor-
rosion
By using the most advanced design and
construction practices to combat corrosion,
Hyundai produces cars of the highest
quality. However, this is only part of the job.
To achieve the long-term corrosion
resistance your Hyundai can deliver, the
owner's cooperation and assistance is also
required.
TO HELP PREVENT CORROSION
4
CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
3
WASHING AND WAXING
E020E01A-AAT
Don't Neglect the Interior
Moisture can collect under the floor mats
and carpeting to cause corrosion. Check
under the mats periodically to be sure the
carpeting is dry. Use particular care if you
carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or
chemicals in the car.
These should be carried only in proper
containers and any spills or leaks should
be cleaned up, flushed with clean water
and thoroughly dried.
E020C01A-AAT
Keep Your Garage Dry
Don't park your car in a damp, poorly
ventilated garage. This creates a favorable
environment for corrosion. This is
particularly true if you wash your car in the
garage or drive it into the garage when it is
still wet or covered with snow, ice or mud.
Even a heated garage can contribute to
corrosion unless it is well ventilated so
moisture is dispersed.
E030A01NF-AAT
Washing Your Hyundai
Never wash your car when the surface is
hot from being in the sun. Always wash
your car in the shade.
Wash your car frequently. Dirt is abrasive
and can scratch the paint if it is not removed.
Air pollution or acid rain may damage the
paint and trim through chemical action if
pollutants are allowed to remain in contact
with the surface. If you live near the ocean
or in an area where road salts or dust
control chemicals are used, you should
pay particular attention to the underside of
the car. Start by rinsing the car to remove
dust and loose dirt. In winter, or if you have
driven through mud or muddy water, be
sure to thoroughly clean the underside as
well. Use a hard direct stream of water to
remove accumulations of mud or corrosive
materials. Use a good quality car-washing
solution and follow the manufacturer's
directions on the package. These are
available at your Hyundai dealer or auto
parts outlet. Don't use strong household
detergents, gasoline, strong solvents or
abrasive cleaning powders as these may
damage the finish.
Use a clean sponge or cloth, rinse it
frequently and don't damage the finish by
rubbing too hard. For stubborn spots,
dampen them frequently and remove them
a little at a time.
o When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members, be
sure that drain holes are kept open so
that moisture can escape and not be
trapped inside to accelerate corrosion.
E020D02A-AAT
Keep Paint and Trim in Good
Condition
Scratches or chips in the finish should be
covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as
possible to reduce the possibility of
corrosion. If bare metal is showing through,
the attention of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly
corrosive and may damage painted
surfaces in just a few hours. Always remove
bird droppings as soon as possible.
4
CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
4
If you find any nicks or scratches in the
paint, use touch-up paint to cover them to
prevent corrosion. To protect the paintwork
of the car against corrosion, you must
clean your Hyundai (at least once a month).
Give special attention to the removal of
salt, mud and other substances on the
underside of the splashboards of the car.
Make sure that the outlets and the under-
side of the doors are open. Paint damage
can be caused by small accumulation of
tar, industrial precipitation, tree resin, in-
sects and bird droppings, when not re-
moved immediately. If water alone is not
strong enough to remove the accumulated
dirt, use a mild car washing solution. Be
sure to rinse the surface after washing to
remove the solution. Never allow the solu-
tion to dry on the painted surfaces.
To clean whitewall tires, use a stiff brush or
soapy steel-wool scouring pad.
To clean plastic wheel covers, use a clean
sponge or soft cloth and water.
To clean cast aluminum alloy wheels, use
a mild soap or neutral detergent. Do not
use abrasive cleaners. Protect the bare-
metal surfaces by cleaning, polishing and
waxing. Because aluminum is subject to
corrosion, be sure to give aluminum alloy
wheels special attention in winter. If you
drive on salted roads, clean the wheels
thoroughly afterwards.
After washing, be sure to rinse thoroughly.
If soapy water dries on the finish, streaking
will result.
When the weather is warm and the humidity
low, you may find it necessary to rinse each
section immediately after washing to avoid
streaking.
After rinsing, dry the car using a damp
chamois or soft, absorbent cloth. The
reason for drying the car is to remove water
from the car so it will dry without water
spots. Don't rub, this can damage the finish.
CAUTION:
!
OJB037800
o Water washing in the engine compart-
ment including high pressure water
washing may cause the failure of elec-
trical circuits located in the engine
compartment.
o Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electrical/elec-
tronic components inside the vehicle
as this may damage them.
!
CAUTION:
Do not wash the side windows too close
with high pressure water. Water may
leak through the windows and wet the
interior.
4
CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
5
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
E040A01A-AAT
To Clean the Vinyl Upholstery
To clean the vinyl upholstery, first remove
loose dirt and dust with a vacuum cleaner.
Then apply a solution of mild soap or
detergent and water using a clean sponge
or soft cloth. Allow this to stay on the surface
to loosen the dirt, then wipe with a clean
damp sponge or cloth. If all the dirt stains
are not removed, repeat this procedure
until the upholstery is clean. Do not use
gasoline, solvent, paint thinner or other
strong cleaners.
E030E01A-AAT
Maintaining Bumpers
Special precautions must be observed to
preserve the appearance of the bumpers
on your Hyundai. They are:
o Be careful not to spill battery electrolyte
or hydraulic brake fluid on the bumpers.
If you do, wash it off immediately with
clean water.
o Be gentle when cleaning the bumper
sur-faces. They are made of soft plastic
and the surface can be damaged if
mistreated. Do not use abrasive
cleaners. Use warm water and mild
soap or car-washing solution.
o Do not expose the bumpers to high tem-
peratures. For example, if you have
your car repainted, do not leave the
bumpers on the car if the car is going to
be placed in a high-temperature paint
booth.
E030D01A-AAT
When to Wax Again
You should polish and wax the car again
when water no longer beads on a clean
surface but spreads out over a larger area.
E030C01A-AAT
Polishing and Waxing
Always wash and dry the car before
polishing or waxing or using a combination
cleaner and wax. Use a good quality
commercial product and follow the
manufacturer's directions on the container.
Polish and wax the bright trim pieces as
well as the paint.
E030B01A-AAT
Spot Cleaning
Don't use gasoline, strong solvents or cor-
rosive cleaning agents. These can
damage the finish of the car. To remove
road tar, use turpentine on a clean, soft
cloth. Be gentle.
To remove dead insects or tree sap, use
warm water and mild soap or car-washing
solution. Soak the spot and rub gently. If
the paint has lost its luster, use a
commercial car-cleaning polish.
4
CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
6
ANY QUESTIONS?
E040D01A-AAT
Cleaning the Seat Belts
To clean the seat belts, use a cloth or
sponge with mild soap or detergent and
warm water. Do not use strong detergents,
dye, bleach or abrasive materials on the
seat belts as this may weaken the fabric.
While cleaning the belts, inspect them for
excessive wear, cuts, fraying or other signs
of damage and replace them if necessary.
E040C01A-AAT
Cleaning the Carpets
Use a foam-type carpet cleaner. Cleaners
of this type are available in aerosol cans in
liquid form or powder. Read the instructions
and follow them exactly. Using a vacuum
cleaner with the appropriate attachment,
remove as much dirt from the carpets as
possible. Apply the foam following the
manufacturer's directions, then rub in
overlapping circles. Do not add water.
These cleaners work best when the carpet
is kept as dry as possible.
E050A01A-AAT
If you have any questions about the care of
your car, consult your Hyundai dealer.
E040E01A-AAT
Cleaning the Windows
You may use any household window
cleaner on the windows. However, when
cleaning the inside of the rear window be
careful not to damage the rear window
defroster wiring.
E040B01A-AAT
To Clean the Leather Upholstery
(If Installed)
In the normal course of use, leather
upholstered surfaces will, like any material,
pick-up dust and dirt. This dust and dirt
must be cleaned off or it may work into the
surface of the leather, causing damage.
Fine leather needs care, and should be
cleaned when necessary. Washing leather
thoroughly with soap and water will keep
your leather lustrous, beautiful and ensure
you have many years of wear.
Take a piece of cheese cloth and using any
mild soap and lukewarm water, work up a
good lather. Thoroughly wash the leather.
Wipe clean with a slightly damp cloth and
dry with soft cloth. Do this as often as the
leather becomes soiled.
During tanning operations, sufficient oils
are incorporated through processing that
none need be applied during the life of the
leather. Oil applied to the finished surface
will in no way help the leather and may do
more harm than good. Varnishes and
furniture polishes should never be used
under any conditions.
5
Maintenance Intervals ................................................... 5-2
Scheduled Maintenance ................................................ 5-4
Maintenance under Severe Usage Conditions ............. 5-6
Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items .............. 5-7
California Perchlorate Notice ...................................... 5-10
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
5
5
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
2
F010C01A-AAT
Specified Scheduled Procedures
These are the procedures such as
inspections, adjustments and
replacements that are listed in the
maintenance charts starting on page 5-4.
These procedures must be performed at
the intervals shown in the maintenance
schedule to assure that your warranty
remains in effect. Although it is strongly
recommended that they be performed by
the trained technicians at your Hyundai
dealer, these procedures may be per-
formed at any qualified service facility.
It is suggested that genuine Hyundai
service parts be used for any required
repairs or replacements. Other parts of
equivalent quality such as engine oil,
engine coolant, manual or auto transaxle
oil, brake fluid and so on which are not
supplied by Hyundai Motor Company or its
distributor may be used without affecting
your warranty coverage but you should
always be sure these are equivalent to the
quality of the original Hyundai parts. Your
Owner's Handbook provides further
information about your warranty coverage.
F010A01A-AAT
Service Requirements
To ensure that you receive the greatest
number of miles of satisfying operation
from your Hyundai, certain maintenance
procedures must be performed. Although
careful design and engineering have
reduced these to a minimum, those that
are required are of the utmost importance.
It is your responsibility to have these main-
tenance procedures performed to comply
with the terms of the warranties covering
your new Hyundai. The Owner's Handbook
supplied with your new vehicle provides
further information about these warranties.
F010B01A-AAT
Maintenance Requirements
The maintenance required for your
Hyundai can be divided into three main
areas:
o Specified scheduled procedures
o General checks
o Do-it-yourself maintenance
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
5
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
3
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
REQUIREMENTS
F020A02Y-AAT
o Inspection should be performed any
time a malfunction is experienced or
suspected.
o Receipts for all emission control system
services should be retained to
demonstrate compliance with
conditions of the emissions system
warranty.
o After 120 months or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km), continue to follow the
prescribed maintenance intervals.
o For severe usage maintenance require-
ments, see page 5-6 of this section.
F010D02A-AAT
General Checks
These are the regular checks you should
perform when you drive your Hyundai or
you fill the fuel tank. A list of these items will
be found on page 6-4.
F010E01A-AAT
Do-It-Yourself Maintenance
If you are mechanically inclined, own a few
tools that are required and want to take the
time to do so, you can inspect and service
a number of items. For more information
about doing it yourself, see Section 6.
F010F01A-AAT
A Few Tips
o Whenever you have your Hyundai
serviced, keep copies of the service
records in your glove box. This will help
ensure that you can document that the
required procedures have been
performed to keep your warranties in
effect. This is especially important when
service is not performed by an authorized
Hyundai dealer.
o If you choose to do your own
maintenance and repairs, you may find
it helpful to have an official Hyundai
Shop Manual. A copy of this publication
may be purchased at your Hyundai
dealer's parts department.
5
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
4
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
F030B04NF-AAT
R :Replace I : Inspect and, after Inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary.
F030A01NF-AAT
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicle
emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever
occurs first.
DESCRIPTION
EMISSION CONTROL ITEMS
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
FUEL FILTER
FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSES AND CONNECTIONS
VACUUM HOSE
CRANKCASE VENTILATION HOSES
VAPOR HOSE AND FUEL FILLER CAP
AIR CLEANER FILTER
VALVE CLEARANCE
SPARK PLUGS (IRIDIUM COATED)
FUEL TANK AIR FILTER
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
MILES X 1000
KILOMETERS X 1000
MONTHS
7.5
12
6
R
I
I
I
15
24
12
R
I
I
I
I
I
22.5
36
18
R
I
I
I
30
48
24
R
I
I
I
I
R
R
37.5
60
30
R
R
I
I
I
45
72
36
R
I
I
I
I
I
52.5
84
42
R
I
I
I
I
60
96
48
R
I
I
I
I
R
I
R
67.5
108
54
R
I
I
I
75
120
60
R
R
I
I
I
I
I
82.5
132
66
R
I
I
I
90
144
72
R
I
I
I
I
R
R
97.5
156
78
R
I
I
I
R
105
168
84
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
112.5
180
90
R
R
I
I
I
120
192
96
R
I
I
I
I
R
I
R
127.5
204
102
R
I
I
I
135
216
108
R
I
I
I
I
I
142.5
228
114
R
I
I
I
150
240
120
R
R
I
I
I
I
R
R
5
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
5
See Note *
1
See Note *
2
F030C01NF-AAT
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
GENERAL ITEMS
DRIVE BELT (AUTO-TENSIONER, ALT, P/STR'G, A/CON, W/PUMP)
COOLANT
MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID
BRAKE FLUID
BRAKE HOSES AND LINES
REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE
BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS
EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER
SUSPENSION MOUNTING BOLTS
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS / LOWER ARM
BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL JOINT
POWER STEERING PUMP, BELT AND HOSES
DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS
AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
No. DESCRIPTION
MILES X 1000
KILOMETERS X 1000
MONTHS
7.5
12
6
I
I
I
I
15
24
12
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
22.5
36
18
I
I
I
I
30
48
24
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
37.5
60
30
I
I
I
I
45
72
36
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
52.5
84
42
I
I
I
I
60
96
48
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
67.5
108
54
I
I
I
I
75
120
60
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
82.5
132
66
I
I
I
I
90
144
72
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
97.5
156
78
I
I
I
I
105
168
84
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
112.5
180
90
I
I
I
I
120
192
96
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
127.5
204
102
I
I
I
I
135
216
108
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
142.5
228
114
I
I
I
I
150
240
120
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Note:
*1. FOR THE FIRST TIME, REPLACE THE COOLANT AT 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) OR 60 MONTHS.
AFTER THAT, REPLACE IT EVERY 25,000 MILES (40,000 KM) OR 24 MONTHS.
*2. FOR EVERY 12 MONTHS OR 10,000 MILES (15,000 KM), WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST : "R"
5
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
6
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE
CONDITIONS
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5miles (8km) in
normal temperature or less than 10miles (16km) in freezing
temperature
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances
C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-
spread roads
D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in
very cold weather
F040A02NF-AAT
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below
for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
E - Driving in sandy areas
F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)
G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle
towing
J - Driving over 100 MPH (170 Km/h)
K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
AIR CLEANER FILTER
SPARK PLUGS
BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS
REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/
LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL JOINT
DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS
MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
(FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID
MAINTENANCE ITEM
R
R
R
I
I
I
I
R
R
R
EVERY 3,000 MILES (4,800 KM) OR 3 MONTHS
MORE FREQUENTLY
MORE FREQUENTLY
MORE FREQUENTLY
MORE FREQUENTLY
MORE FREQUENTLY
EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS
EVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM)
MORE FREQUENTLY
EVERY 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM)
DRIVING
CONDITION
MAINTENANCE
INTERVALS
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K
C, E
B, H
C, D, G, H
C, D, G, H
C, D, E, F, G, H, I
C, D, E, F
A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
C, E
A, C, E, F, G, H, I
5
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
7
F060D01A-AAT
o Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses and Con-
nections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections for leakage and damage. Have a
trained technician replace any damaged
or leaking parts immediately.
F060B01NF-GAT
o Drive Belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts,
cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation
and replace if necessary. Drive belts should
be checked periodically for proper tension.
F060M01A-AAT
o Engine Oil and Filter
The engine oil and filter should be changed
at the intervals specified in the
maintenance schedule. If the car is being
driven in severe conditions, more frequent
oil and filter changes are required.
F060C01A-AAT
o Fuel Filter
A clogged filter can limit the speed at which
the vehicle may be driven, damage the
emission system and cause hard starting.
If an excessive amount of foreign matter
accumulates in the fuel tank, the filter may
require replacement more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the engine
for several minutes, and check for leaks at
the connections. Fuel filters should be
installed by trained technicians.
F060F01A-AAT
o Vacuum, Crankcase Ventilation
Hoses
Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence
of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard
and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,
abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate
deterioration. Particular attention should
be paid to examine those hose surfaces
nearest to high heat sources, such as the
exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure that the
hoses do not come in contact with any heat
source, sharp edges or moving component
which might cause heat damage or
mechanical wear. Inspect all hose
connections, such as clamps and
couplings, to make sure they are secure,
and that no leaks are present. Hoses should
be replaced immediately if there is any
evidence of deterioration or damage.
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
5
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
8
F070G02A-AAT
o Brake Fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid
reservoir. The level should be between
"MIN" and "MAX" marks on the side of the
reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake fluid
conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4.
F070F01A-AAT
o Brake Hoses and Lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and any
leakage. Replace any deteriorated or
damaged parts immediately.
F070E06A-AAT
o Automatic Transaxle Fluid
The fluid level should be in the “HOT”
range of the dipstick, after the engine and
transaxle are at normal operating
temperature. Check the automatic
transaxle fluid level with the engine running
and the transaxle in neutral, with the
parking brake properly applied. Use
HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND
ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other brands
meeting the SP III specification approved
by Hyundai Motor Co. when adding or
changing fluid. Using the wrong ATF may
result in damage to the ATM.
F070H01A-AAT
o Rear Brake Drums and Linings/
Parking Brake
Check the rear brake drums and linings for
scoring, burning, leaking fluid, broken parts,
and excessive wear. Inspect the parking
brake system including the parking brake
lever and cables. For detailed service
procedures, refer to the Shop Manual.
F070C01A-AAT
o Coolant
The coolant should be changed at the
intervals specified in the maintenance
schedule.
F060J01A-AAT
o Spark Plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs of the
correct heat range.
F060H01A-AAT
o Air Cleaner Filter
A Genuine Hyundai air cleaner filter is
recommended when the filter is replaced.
F060G01A-AAT
o Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler Cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should
be inspected at those intervals specified in
the maintenance schedule. Make sure that
a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly
replaced.
F070D01A-AAT
o Manual Transaxle Oil
Inspect the manual transaxle oil according
to the maintenance schedule.
NOTE:
If the oil level is low, check for possible
leaks before adding oil. Do not overfill.
F060N02E-AAT
o Valve Clearance
Inspect excessive valve noise and/or
engine vibration and adjust if necessary. A
qualified technician should perform the
operation.
5
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
9
F070L01A-AAT
o Suspension Mounting Bolts
Check the suspension connections for
looseness or damage. Retighten to the
specified torque.
F070K01A-AAT
o Exhaust Pipe and Muffler
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler
and
hangers for cracks, deterioration, or
damage. Start the engine and listen
carefully for any exhaust gas leakage.
Tighten connections or replace parts as
necessary.
F070J01A-AAT
o Brake Pads, Calipers and Rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear, discs
for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid
leakage.
F070Q01A-AAT
o Air Conditioning Refrigerant
Check the air conditioning lines and con-
nections for leakage and damage. Check
air conditioning performance according to
the relevant shop manual if necessary.
F070P01A-AAT
o Drive Shafts and Boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps
for cracks, deterioration, or damage.
Replace any damaged parts and, if
necessary, repack the grease.
F070N01A-AAT
o Power Steering Pump, Belt and
Hoses
Check the power steering pump and hoses
for leakage and damage. Replace any
damaged or leaking parts immediately.
Inspect the power steering belt for evidence
of cuts, cracks, excessive wear, oiliness
and proper tension. Replace or adjust it if
necessary.
F070M01Y-AAT
o Steering Gear Box, Linkage &
Boots/Lower Arm Ball Joint, Upper
Arm Ball Joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine off,
check for excessive free-play in the
steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or damage.
Check the dust boots and ball joints for
deterioration, cracks, or damage. Replace
any damaged parts.
5
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
10
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE NOTICE
F080A01NF-AAT
Perchlorate Material-special handling may
apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:
Perchlorate containing materials, such as
airbag inflators, seatbelt pretensioners and
keyless remote entry batteries, must be
disposed of according to Title 22 California
Code of Regulations Section 67384.10
(a).
6
Engine Compartment .................................................... 6-2
General Checks ............................................................ 6-4
Checking the Engine Oil ............................................... 6-4
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter ................................ 6-6
Checking and Changing the Engine Coolant ................ 6-8
Changing the Air Cleaner Filter ................................... 6-11
Checking the Transaxle Oil (Manual) ......................... 6-14
Checking the Transaxle Fluid (Automatic) .................. 6-15
Checking the Brakes .................................................. 6-17
Air Conditioning Care .................................................. 6-18
Changing the Climate Control Air Filter ....................... 6-19
Checking Drive Belts .................................................. 6-22
Checking and Replacing Fuses .................................. 6-22
Checking the Battery .................................................. 6-24
Power Steering Fluid Level ......................................... 6-26
Headlight Aiming Adjustment ...................................... 6-27
Replacement of Light Bulbs ........................................ 6-28
Bulb Wattages ............................................................. 6-36
Fuse Panel Description ............................................... 6-37
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
2
G010B01NF-AAT
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
ONF018003
CAUTION:
When inspecting or servicing the
engine, you should handle tools
and other heavy objects
carefully so that the plastic cover
of the engine is not damaged.
!
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Negative battery terminal
7. Positive battery terminal
8. Auto transaxle oil dipstick*
9. Radiator cap
10. Engine oil dipstick
11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
12. Power steering fluid reservoir
* : if installed
Gasoline Engine (2.4L)
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
3
8G010A01NF
G010A01NF-AAT
Gasoline Engine (3.3L)
CAUTION:
When inspecting or servicing the
engine, you should handle tools
and other heavy objects
carefully so that the plastic cover
of the engine is not damaged.
!
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse box
6. Negative battery terminal
7. Positive battery terminal
8. Auto transaxle oil dipstick*
9. Radiator cap
10. Engine oil dipstick
11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
12. Power steering fluid reservoir
* : if installed
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
4
G020C01A-AAT
Vehicle Interior
The following should be checked each
time when the vehicle is driven:
o Lights operation
o Windshield wiper operation
o Horn operation
o Defroster, heating system operation
(and air conditioning, if installed)
o Steering operation and condition
o Mirror condition and operation
o Turn signal operation
o Accelerator pedal operation
o Brake operation, including parking
brake
o Manual transaxle operation, including
clutch operation
o Automatic transaxle operation,
including "Park" mechanism operation
o Seat control condition and operation
o Seat belt condition and operation
o Sun visor operation
If you notice anything that does not operate
correctly or appears to be functioning
correctly, inspect it carefully and seek
assistance from your Hyundai dealer if
service is needed.
G020B01A-AAT
Vehicle Exterior
The following should be checked monthly:
o Overall appearance and condition
o Wheel condition and wheel nut torque
o Exhaust system condition
o Light condition and operation
o Windshield glass condition
o Wiper blade condition
o Paint condition and body corrosion
o Fluid leaks
o Door and hood lock condition
o Tire pressure and condition
(including spare tire)
GENERAL CHECKS
G020A01NF-AAT
Engine Compartment
The following should be checked regu-
larly:
o Engine oil level and condition
o Transaxle fluid level and condition
o Brake fluid level
o Engine coolant level
o Windshield washer fluid level
o Accessory drive belt condition
o Engine coolant hose condition
o Fluid leaks (on or below components)
o Power steering fluid level
o Battery condition
o Air filter condition
o Engine vibration
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL
G030B01O-AAT
Recommended Oil
The engine oil quality should meet the
following classification.
API SL or SM,
ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE
G030B01JM-U
G030A01A-AAT
Engine oil is essential to the performance
and service of the engine. It is suggested
that you check the oil level at least once a
week in normal use and more often if you
are on a trip or driving in severe conditions.
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
5
G030C01JM-AAT
To Check the Oil Level
Before checking the oil, warm up the engine
to the normal operating temperature and
be sure your car is parked on level ground.
Turn the engine off.
Wait five minutes, then remove the dipstick,
wipe it off, fully reinsert the dipstick and
withdraw it again. Then note the highest
level the oil has reached on the dipstick. It
should be between the upper ("F") and
lower ("L") range.
!
WARNING:
Be very careful not to touch the radiator
hose when checking the engine oil as it
may be hot enough to burn you.
ONF078002
G030C02NF
(2.4L)
(3.3L)
NOTE:
o For good fuel economy, SAE 5W-20
(5W-30), ILSAC GF-3 engine oil is
preferred.
o If SAE 5W-20, ILSAC GF-3 engine oil is
not available, a secondary recom-
mended engine oil for corresponding
temperature range can be used. See
page 9-4
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6
!
!
G030D01O-AAT
Adding Oil
1. Remove the oil filler cap by turning it
counter-clockwise.
2. Add oil, then check the level again. Do
not overfill.
3. Replace the cap by turning it clockwise.
The distance between the "F" and "L" marks
is equal to about 1 quart of oil.
CAUTION:
Slowly pour the recommended oil into a
funnel. Do not overfill to avoid damage to
the engine.
WARNING:
Be very careful not to touch the radiator
hose when adding the engine oil as it may
be hot enough to burn you.
If the oil level is close to or below the "L"
mark, add oil until it reaches the "F" mark.
To add oil:
ONF078003
G030D02NF
(3.3L)
(2.4L)
CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL AND
FILTER
G040A02NF-AAT
HNF5005
(3.3L)
(2.4L)
G040A01NF
Oil filter
Oil filler
cap
Oil level
dipstick
Oil filler
cap
Oil filter
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
7
!
3. Slide underneath the car and loosen
the drain plug by turning it counter-
clockwise with a wrench of the proper
size. Be sure that a drain pan is in
position to catch the oil as it drains out,
then remove the drain plug.
4. When the oil has stopped draining,
replace the drain plug using a new
gasket and retighten by turning it clock-
wise.
Oil pan drain plug tightening torque:
25.3 ~ 32.5 lb.ft (3.5 ~ 4.5 kgf.m)
HNF5006-1
(2.4L)
(3.3L)
The engine oil and filter should be changed
at those intervals specified in the
maintenance schedule in Section 5. If the
car is being driven in severe conditions,
more frequent oil and filter changes are
required.
The procedure for changing the oil and
filter is as follows:
1. Park the car on level ground and set the
parking brake. Start the engine and let
it warm up until the needle on the coolant
temperature gauge moves above the
lowest mark. Turn the engine off and
place the gear selector lever in "P" (au-
tomatic) or reverse gear (manual
transaxle).
2. Open the hood and remove the engine
oil filler cap.
NOTE:
Loosen the oil filter cap by turning it
counterclockwise to drain well the oil in
the oil filter (3.3L only).
WARNING:
Be very careful when draining the engine
oil as it may be hot enough to burn you!
HNF5005-1
G040B01NF
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
8
CHECKING AND CHANGING THE
ENGINE COOLANT
!
G050A01A-AAT
WARNING:
Do not remove the radiator cap when the
engine is hot. When the engine is hot, the
engine coolant is under pressure and
may erupt through the opening if the cap
is removed. You could be seriously
burned if you do not observe this
precaution. Do not remove the radiator
cap until the radiator is cool to the touch.
!
5. Remove the oil filter by turning it counter-
clockwise with a oil filter wrench of the
proper size. A certain amount of oil will
come out when you remove the filter. So be
sure to have your drain pan in place
underneath it.
6. Install a new oil filter in accordance with the
instructions on the carton or on the filter
itself. Do not over-tighten.
Tightening torque:
8.7 ~ 11.6 lb.ft (1.2 ~ 1.6 kgf.m)
Be sure that the mounting surface on the
engine is clean and that the old gasket is
removed completely. Lubricate the new
gasket on the filter with clean engine oil
before installation.
7. Remove the engine oil level dipstick.
8. Refill the crankcase with the recommended
engine oil. Refer to the specification in
chapter 9 for engine oil capacity.
CAUTION:
Slowly pour the recommended oil into a
funnel. Do not overfill to avoid damage to
the engine.
NOTE:
Always dispose of used engine oil in an
environmentally acceptable manner. It
is suggested that it be placed in a sealed
container and taken to a service station
for reclamation. Do not pour the oil on the
ground or put it into the household trash.
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:
Engine oil contains chemicals known to
the State of California to cause cancer,
birth defects and reproductive harm.
Used engine oil may cause irritation or
cancer of the skin if left in contact with
the skin for prolonged periods of time.
Always protect your skin by washing
your hands thoroughly with soap and
warm water as soon as possible after
handling used oil.
!
9. Start the engine and check to be sure no
oil is leaking from the drain plug or oil
filter.
10. Shut off the engine and recheck the oil
level.
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
9
G050B01A-AAT
Recommended Engine Coolant
Use a high quality ethylene-glycol coolant
in a 50/50 mix with water. The engine
coolant should be compatible with
aluminum engine parts. Additional
corrosion inhibitors or additives should
not be used. The cooling system must be
maintained with the correct concentration
and type of engine coolant to prevent
freezing and corrosion. Never allow the
concentration of antifreeze to exceed the
60% level or go below the 35% level, or
damage to the cooling system may result.
For proper concentration when adding or
replacing the engine coolant, refer to the
following table.
G050C01NF-GAT
To Check the Coolant Level
The coolant level can be seen on the side
of the plastic coolant reservoir. The level of
the coolant should be between the "L" and
"F" lines on the reservoir when the engine
is warm with it at idle . If the level is below
the "L" mark, add engine coolant to bring
it up to "F". If the level is low, inspect for
coolant leaks and recheck the fluid level
frequently. If the level drops again, visit
your Hyundai dealer for an inspection and
diagnosis of the reason.
G050C01NF
G050D01NF-GAT
To Change the Engine Coolant
The engine coolant should be changed at
those intervals specified in the vehicle
maintenance schedule in Section 5.
CAUTION:
o Engine coolant can damage the finish
of your car. If you spill engine coolant
on the car, wash it off thoroughly with
clean water.
o The engine in your vehicle has alumi-
num engine parts and must be
protected by an ethylene-glycol base
coolant to prevent corrosion and freez-
ing.
Do not use hard water. Hard water can
cause engine damage from corro-
sion, overheating or freezing.
!
1. Park the car on level ground, set the
parking brake and remove the radiator
cap when cool.
Ambient
temperature
°F (°C)
5 (-15)
-13 (-25)
-31 (-35)
-49 (-45)
65%
60%
50%
40%
35%
40%
50%
60%
Water
Antifreeze
solution
Engine Coolant concentration
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
10
3. Be sure your drain receptacle is in place.
Open the drain cock on the radiator.
Allow all the engine coolant to drain
from the cooling system, and then
securely close the drain cock.
4. Check Section 9 for the capacity of the
cooling system in your car. Then,
following the manufacturer's directions
on the engine coolant container, add
the appropriate quantity of coolant to
the radiator.
5. Slowly fill the radiator with the proper
coolant mixture (see the "Recom-
mended Engine Coolant in previous
page) until the fluid level stays up in the
radiator neck. And pump the radiator
hose in order to bleed the air.
HNF5008
2. Wrap a thick cloth around the radiator
cap and slowly turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise without pressing
down on it, until it stops. This relieves
any pressure remaining in the cooling
system. When you are sure that all the
pressure has been released, remove
the radiator cap by pushing down and
turning counterclockwise.
G050D02NF-A
G050D01NF
6. Run the engine at idle until the coolant
circulates. If the cooling fan operates
and the coolant starts to circulate, add
the coolant to the reservoir.
7. To bleed the air in the cooling system,
repeat procedure 6 until the cooling fan
operates 3~5 times.
8. Replace the radiator cap and turn it until
tightly installed. And then, add coolant
to the reservoir until the level is between
"L" and "F".
9. Stop the engine and check the coolant
level when the engine is cool. The level
of the coolant should be the "L" and "F"
lines on the reservoir. If the level is
below the "L" line, repeat the procedure
4~8 until the level between "L" and "F".
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
11
!
!
10. Replace the reservoir cap and check to
be sure the drain cock and the radiator
cap are fully closed and not leaking.
CAUTION:
Recheck after a few days and add the
coolant if the level is below the "L" level.
WARNING:
The cooling fan is controlled by engine
coolant temperature and may
sometimes operate even when the
engine is not running. Use extreme
caution when working near the blades of
the coolant fan so that you are not injured
by a rotating fan blade. As the engine
coolant temperature decreases, the fan
will automatically shut off. This is a
normal condition.
CAUTION:
o Operating your vehicle without using
a proper air cleaner filter in place can
result in excessive engine wear.
o When removing the air cleaner filter,
be careful that dust or dirt does not
enter the air intake. These may result
in damage to the air cleaner filter.
!
CHANGING THE AIR
CLEANER FILTER
G070A03Y-AAT
The replacement of the air cleaner filter is
performed in the following manner.
1. Unsnap the clips around the cover.
2. When this is done, the cover can be
lifted off, the old filter removed and the
new filter put in its place.
Genuine Hyundai replacement parts are
recommended.
ONF078011
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
12
HHR5048
(1)
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
G080A02A-AAT
The wiper blades should be carefully
inspected from time to time and cleaned to
remove accumulations of road film or other
debris. To clean the wiper blades and
arms, use a clean sponge or cloth with a
mild soap or detergent and water. If the
wipers continue to streak or smear the
glass, replace them with genuine Hyundai
replacement parts or their equivalent.
!
CAUTION:
o Do not operate the wipers on dry glass.
This can result in more rapid wear of
the wiper blades and may scratch the
glass.
o Keep the blade rubber out of contact
with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
G080B01HR-GAT
Replacing the Wiper Blades
To replace the wiper blades, raise the
wiper to the vertical position.
To remove the wiper blade
1. Push down the wiper blade with the
locking clip (1) pressed to detach it from
the wiper arm.
G080A01NF-A
2. Raise the wiper blade lightly and pull it
up.
HHR5049
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
13
HHR5051
HHR5050
FILLING THE WASHER
RESERVOIR
G090A02NF-AAT
G090A02NF
ONF078009
(3.3L)
(2.4L)
To install the wiper blade
1. Put a new wiper blade onto the wiper
arm and lower the wiper blade at the
level of the wiper arm as shown in the
drawing.
2. Pull up the wiper blade until you hear an
audible "click" to engage in the end of
the wiper arm.
NOTE:
Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against
the windshield.
The washer fluid reservoir supplies fluid to
the windshield washer system.
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
14
CAUTION:
o Radiator antifreeze (engine coolant)
should not be used in the washer
system because it will damage the
car's finish.
o The washer lever should not be pulled
and the washer should not be operated
if the washer reservoir is empty. This
can damage the washer fluid pump.
!
A good quality washer fluid should be
used to fill the washer reservoir. The fluid
level should be checked more frequently
during bad weather or whenever the
washer system is in more frequent use.
The capacity of the washer reservoir is 3.2
U.S. quarts (4.0 liters).
!
WARNING:
It is always better to check the transaxle
oil level when the engine is cool or cold.
If the engine is hot, you should exercise
great caution to avoid burning yourself
on hot engine or exhaust parts.
CHECKING THE TRANSAXLE
OIL (MANUAL)
G100A02NF-AAT
HNF5010
Filler plug
Drain plug
Transaxle lubricant in the manual transaxle
should be checked at those intervals
specified in the vehicle maintenance
schedule in Section 5.
Recommended Oil
Use only HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF
75W/85 (API GL-4) in the manual transaxle.
Manual Transaxle Oil Capacity
The oil capacity of the manual transaxle is
1.8 U.S. quarts (1.75 liters).
!
WARNING:
o Windshield washer fluid agents con-
tain some amounts of alcohol and can
be flammable under certain circum-
stances. Do not allow sparks or flame
to contact the washer fluid or the
washer fluid reservoir. Damage to
the vehicle or its occupants could
occur.
o Windshield washer fluid is poisonous
to humans and animals. Do not drink
windshield washer fluid. Serious injury
or death could occur.
NOTE:
It is recommended that the manual
transaxle fluid should be checked by an
authorized Hyundai Dealer.
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
15
CHECKING THE TRANSAXLE
FLUID (AUTOMATIC)
G110A01E-AAT
Transaxle fluid in the automatic transaxle
should be checked at those intervals
specified in the vehicle maintenance
schedule in Section 5.
NOTE:
Automatic transaxle fluid is basically
red in color. As driving distance in-
creases, the fluid color turns darkish red
gradually. It is a normal condition and
you should not judge the need to replace
based upon the changing color.
You must replace the automatic
transaxle fluid in accordance with
intervals specified in the vehicle
maintenance schedule in section 5.
!
G110B05A-AAT
Recommended Fluid
Your Hyundai automatic transaxle is
specially designed to operate with
HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND
ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other brands
meeting the SP III specification approved
by Hyundai Motor Co.. Damage caused
by a nonspecified fluid is not covered by
your new vehicle limited warranty.
CAUTION:
Use of aftermarket ATF additives may
cause damage to the automatic
transaxle.
Only use HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III,
DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or
other brands meeting the SP III specifi-
cation approved by Hyundai Motor Co..
If you are having your vehicle serviced
at a facility other than a Hyundai dealer,
verify that the correct ATF is used for
your vehicle.
!
G110C01NF-AAT
Transaxle Fluid Capacity
The fluid capacity of the automatic
transaxle is:
WARNING:
The transaxle fluid level should be
checked when the engine is at normal
operating temperature. This means that
the engine, radiator, radiator hose,
exhaust system etc., are very hot.
Exercise great care not to burn yourself
during this procedure.
2.4L
3.3L
8.24 U.S. quarts (7.8 liters)
11.52 U.S. quarts (10.9 liters)
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
16
2. After the transaxle is warmed up
sufficiently (fluid temperature 70~80°C
(158~176°F), for example by 10 minutes
usual driving, move the shift lever
through all positions then place the
selector lever in “N (Neutral) or P (Park)”
position.
G110D03O-AAT
Checking the automatic transaxle
fluid level
The automatic transaxle fluid level should
be checked regularly.
Keep the vehicle on the level ground with
the parking brake applied and check the
fluid level according to the following
procedure.
1. Place the selector lever in N (Neutral)
position and confirm the engine is
running at normal idle speed.
ONF078008
OHD076045N
Fluid level should be within "HOT" range
3. Confirm that the fluid level is in “HOT”
range on the level gauge. If the fluid
level is lower, add the specified fluid
from the fill hole. If the fluid level is
higher, drain the fluid from the drain
hole.
4. If the fluid level is checked in cold
condition (fluid temperature 20~30°C
(68~86°F) add the fluid to “COLD” line
and then recheck the fluid level
according to the above step 2.
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
17
CHECKING THE BRAKES
!
G120B01A-AAT
Checking the Brake Fluid Level
WARNING:
Use caution when handling brake fluid. It
can damage your vision if it gets into
your eyes. It will also damage your
vehicle's paint if spilled on it and not
removed immediately.
!
WARNING:
The cooling fan is controlled by engine
coolant temperature and may
sometimes operate even when the
engine is not running. Use extreme
caution when working near the blades of
the cooling fan so that you are not injured
by a rotating fan blade. As the engine
coolant temperature decreases, the fan
will automatically shut off. This is a
normal condition.
G120A01A-AAT
CAUTION:
Because brakes are essential to the
safe operation of the car, it is suggested
that they be checked and inspected by
your Hyundai dealer. The brakes should
be checked and inspected for wear at
those intervals specified in the vehicle
maintenance schedule in Section 5.
!
G120D01A-AAT
To Check the Fluid Level
The fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir
should be checked periodically. The level
should be between the "MIN" and "MAX"
marks on the side of the reservoir. If the
level is at or below the "MIN" mark, carefully
add fluid to bring it up to "MAX". Do not
overfill.
G120C02A-AAT
Recommended Brake Fluid
Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming
to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications in your
braking system. Follow the instructions
printed on the container.
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
18
G140C01A-AAT
Lubrication
To lubricate the compressor and the seals
in the system, the air conditioning should
be run for at least 10 minutes each week.
This is particularly important during cool
weather when the air conditioning system
is not otherwise in use.
!
G120E02A-AAT
Adding Brake Fluid
WARNING:
Handle brake fluid carefully. It can dam-
age your vision if it gets into your eyes.
Use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification
fluid from a sealed container. Do not
allow the fluid can or reservoir to remain
open any longer than required. This will
prevent entry of dirt and moisture which
can damage the brake system and cause
improper operation.
To add brake fluid, first wipe away any dirt,
then unscrew the fluid reservoir cap. Slowly
pour the recommended fluid into the res-
ervoir. Do not overfill. Carefully replace the
cap on the reservoir and tighten.
AIR CONDITIONING CARE
!
G140A01A-AAT
Keeping the Condenser Clean
The air conditioning condenser (and
engine radiator) should be checked
periodically for accumulation of dirt, dead
insects, leaves, etc. These can interfere
with maximum cooling efficiency. When
removing such accumulations, brush or
hose them away carefully to avoid bending
the cooling fans.
G140B01A-AAT
Checking the Air Conditioning Op-
eration
1. Start the engine and let it run at a fast idle
for several minutes with the air
conditioning set at the maximum cold
setting.
2. If the air coming out of the in-dash vents
is not cold, have the air conditioning
system inspected by your Hyundai
dealer.
CAUTION:
Running the air conditioning system for
extended periods of time with a low re-
frigerant level may damage the
compressor.
ONF078006
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
19
1. With the glove box open, remove the
stoppers on both sides to allow the
glove box to hang freely on the hinges.
ONF078014
CHANGING THE CLIMATE CON-
TROL AIR FILTER
G170100AFD
Filter inspection
If the vehicle is operated in severely air-
polluted cities or on dusty rough roads for
a long period, the filter should be inspected
more frequently and replaced earlier. When
you replace the climate control air filter,
replace it by performing the following
procedure, and be careful to avoid
damaging other components.
Replace the filter according to the mainte-
nance Schedule.
2. Remove the support rod.
ONF078015
Filter replacement
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
20
1.18 in.
(30 mm)
CHECKING THE FREE-PLAY
G150A01A-AAT
STEERING WHEEL
To check the steering wheel free-play,
stop the car with the wheels pointed straight
ahead and gently move the steering wheel
back and forth. Use very light finger pressure
and be sensitive to changes in resistance
that mark the limits of the free-play. If the
free-play is greater than specified, have it
inspected by your Hyundai dealer and
adjusted or repaired if necessary.
ONF078016
3. Remove the climate control air filter
case by pulling out the cover.
HNF5018
4. Replace the climate control air filter.
5. Reassemble in the reverse order of
disassembly.
NOTE:
When replacing the climate control air
filter install it in the same position as it
was installed. Otherwise, the system
may produce noise and the effective-
ness of the filter may be reduced.
ONF078037
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
21
G170A01A-AAT
BRAKE PEDAL
With the engine off, press down on the
brake pedal several times to reduce the
vacuum in the brake booster.
Then, using your hand, press down slowly
on the brake pedal until you feel a change
in resistance. This is the brake pedal free-
play.
The free-play should be within the limits
specified in the illustration above. If it is not,
have it inspected by your Hyundai dealer
and adjusted or repaired if necessary.
G160A01HR
0.12 ~ 0.31 in.
(3 ~ 8 mm)
CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL
CLEARANCE
G180A01A-AAT
You need a helper to check the brake
pedal clearance. With the engine running,
have your helper press down on the brake
pedal several times and then hold it down
with a force of about 110 lbs (50 kg, 490 N).
The brake pedal clearance is the distance
from the top surface of the brake pedal to
the asphalt sheeting under the floor mat.
If the brake pedal clearance is not within
the limits specified in the illustration, have
it inspected by your Hyundai dealer and
adjusted or repaired if necessary.
G180A01L
2.95 in.
(75 mm)
G160A01A-GAT
CLUTCH PEDAL
With the engine off, press lightly on the
clutch pedal until you feel a change in
resistance. This is the clutch pedal free-
play. The free-play should be within the
limits specified in the illustration. If it is not,
have it inspected by your Hyundai dealer
and adjusted or repaired if necessary.
G160A01HR
0.24~0.51 in.
(6~13 mm)
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
22
Drive belts should be checked periodi-
cally for proper tension. At the same time,
belts should be examined for cracks, wear,
fraying or other evidence of deterioration
and replaced if necessary.
When a new belt is replaced, the belt
should be located within the pulley of flat
idler.
Belt routing should also be checked to be
sure there is no interference between the
belts and other parts of the engine.
NOTE:
Drive belt tension is adjusted automati-
cally by the auto tensioner.
CHECKING AND REPLACING
FUSES
G200A01A-AAT
Replacing a Fusible Link
A fusible link will melt if the electrical circuits
from the battery are ever overloaded, thus
preventing damage to the entire wiring
harness. (This could be caused by a short
in the system drawing too much current.) If
this ever happens, have a Hyundai dealer
determine the cause, repair the system
and replace the fusible link. The fusible
links are located in a relay box in the
engine compartment for easy inspection.
ONF078020
G190A02NF-GAT
CHECKING DRIVE BELTS
G140D01NF
(2.4L)
(3.3L)
G140D02NF
Power steering pump
Compressor
Water
pump pully
Generator
Power steering
Compressor
Water pump pully
Generator
Damper pulley
Damper pulley
Auto tensioner
Auto tensioner
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
23
!
CAUTION:
When replacing a fusible link, never use
anything but a new fusible link with the
same or lower amperage rating. Never
use a piece of wire or a higher-rated
fusible link. This could result in serious
damage and create a fire hazard.
G200B02NF
4. Replace the blown fuse by pressing a
new fuse of the same rating into place.
The fuse should be a snug fit. If it is not,
have the fuse clip repaired or replaced
by a Hyundai dealer. If you do not have
a spare fuse, you may be able to borrow
a fuse of the same or lower rating from
an accessory you can temporarily get
along without (the radio or cigarette
lighter, for example). Always remember
to replace the borrowed fuse.
G200B01NF-AAT
Replacing Accessory Fuse
The fuse box for the lights and other elec-
trical accessories will be found on the left
side of the instrument panel. Inside the box
you will find a list showing the circuits
protected by each fuse.
If any of your car's lights or other electrical
accessories stop working, a blown fuse
could be the reason. If the fuse has burned
out, you will see that the metal strip inside
the fuse has burned through. If you suspect
a blown fuse, follow this procedure:
1. Turn off the ignition and all other
switches.
2. Open the fuse box and examine each
fuse. Remove each fuse by pulling it
toward you (a small "fuse puller" tool is
contained in the relay and fuse box of
the engine room to simplify this
operation).
ONF078018
3. Be sure to check all other fuses, even if
you find one that appears to have burned
out.
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
24
CHECKING THE BATTERY
!
G210A01A-AAT
WARNING:
Batteries can be dangerous! When
working with batteries, carefully observe
the following precautions to avoid
serious injuries.
The fluid in the battery contains a strong
solution of sulfuric acid, which is poisonous
and highly corrosive. Be careful not to spill
it on yourself or the car. If you do spill
battery fluid on yourself, immediately do
the following:
ONF078017
o If battery fluid is on your skin, flush the
affected areas with water for at least 15
minutes and then seek medical
assistance.
o If battery fluid is in your eyes, rinse out
your eyes with water and get medical
assistance as soon as possible. While
you are being driven to get medical
assistance, continue to rinse your eyes
by using a sponge or soft cloth saturated
with water.
o If you swallow battery fluid, drink a large
quantity of water or milk followed by milk
of magnesia, eat a raw egg or drink
vegetable oil. Get medical assistance
as soon as possible.
While batteries are being charged (either
by a battery charger or by the vehicle's
generator), they produce explosive gases.
Always observe these warnings to prevent
injuries from occurring:
o Charge batteries only in a well ventilated
area.
o Do not permit flames, sparks or smoking
in the area.
o Keep children away from the area.
!
G200B02L
Good Burned out
CAUTION:
A burned-out fuse indicates that there is
a problem in the electrical circuit. If you
replace a fuse and it blows as soon as the
accessory is turned on, the problem is
serious and should be referred to a
Hyundai dealer for diagnosis and repair.
Never replace a fuse with anything
except a fuse with the same or a lower
amperage rating. A higher capacity fuse
could cause damage and create a fire
hazard.
NOTE:
See page 6-36 for the fuse panel descrip-
tions.
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
25
!
G210B01NF-AAT
Checking the Battery
Keep the battery clean. Any evidence of
corrosion around the battery posts or
terminals should be removed using a
solution of household baking soda and
warm water. After the battery terminals are
dry, cover them with a light coating of
grease.
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:
Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer, birth defects
and reproductive harm. Batteries also
contain other chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer. Wash
hands after handling.
!!
WARNING:
Always read the following in-
structions carefully when han-
dling a battery.
Keep lighted cigarettes and all
other flames or sparks away
from the battery.
Hydrogen, which is a highly
combustible gas, is always
present in battery cells and
may explode if ignited.
Keep batteries out of the reach
of children because batteries
contain highly corrosive SUL-
FURIC ACID. Do not allow bat-
tery acid to contact your skin,
eyes, clothing or paint finish.
If any electrolyte gets into your
eyes, flush your eyes with
clean water for at least 15 min-
utes and get immediate medi-
cal attention. If possible, con-
tinue to apply water with a
sponge or cloth until medical
attention is received.
If electrolyte gets on your skin,
thoroughly wash the contacted
area. If you feel a pain or a
burning sensation, get medi-
cal attention immediately.
Wear eye protection when
charging or working near a bat-
tery.
Always provide ventilation
when working in an enclosed
space.
An inappropriately disposed
battery can be harmful to the
environment and human
health. Dispose the battery
according to your local law(s)
or regulation.
o When lifting a plastic-cased battery,
excessive pressure on the case may
cause battery acid to leak, resulting in
personal injury. Lift with a battery
carrier or with your hands on opposite
corners.
o Never attempt to charge the battery
when the battery cables are con-
nected.
o The electrical ignition system works
with high voltage.
Never touch these components with
the engine running or the ignition
switched on.
WARNING:
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
26
G240A01A-AAT
POWER STEERING HOSES
It is suggested that you check the power
steering hose connections for fluid leakage
at those intervals specified in the vehicle
maintenance schedule in Section 5.
The power steering hoses should be
replaced if there is severe surface crack-
ing, pulling, scuffing or worn spots.
Deterioration of the hose could cause
premature failure.
POWER STEERING FLUID
LEVEL
G230A01NF-AAT
Recommended Fluid
Use PSF-4 type fluid
NOTE:
Do not start the engine when the power
steering oil reservoir is empty.
ONF078007
The power steering fluid level should be
checked regularly. To check the power
steering fluid level, be sure the engine is
"OFF", then check to make certain that the
power steering fluid level is between the
"MAX" and "MIN" level markings on the
fluid reservoir.
NOTE:
Grinding noise from the power steering
pump may be heard immediately after
the engine is started in extremely cold
conditions (below - 4°F). If the noise stops
during warm up, there is no abnormal
function in the system. It is due to a
power steering fluid characteristic in
extremely cold conditions.
CHECKING ELECTRIC COOLING
FANS
!
G220A01A-AAT
WARNING:
The cooling fan is controlled by engine
coolant temperature and may
sometimes operate even when the
engine is not running. Use extreme
caution when working near the blades of
the cooling fan, so that you are not injured
by a rotating fan blade. As the engine
coolant temperature decreases the fan
will automatically shut off. This is a
normal condition.
G220B01NF-GAT
Checking Engine Cooling Fan
The engine cooling fan should come on
automatically if the engine coolant
temperature is high or whenever the air
conditioning is in operation.
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
27
FOR MORE INFORMATION
ABOUT YOUR HYUNDAI
G250A01A-AAT
If you desire additional information about
maintaining and servicing your Hyundai,
you may purchase a factory Shop Manual
at your Hyundai dealer's parts department.
This is the same manual used by
dealership technicians and while it is highly
technical it can be useful in obtaining a
better understanding of your car and how
it works.
HEADLIGHT AIMING ADJUST-
MENT
G290A03O-AAT
Before performing aiming adjustment,
make sure of the following.
1. Keep all tires inflated to the correct
pressure.
2. Place the vehicle on level ground and
press the front bumper & rear bumper
down several times.
Place vehicle at a distance of 118 in.
(3m) from the test wall.
3. See that the vehicle is unloaded (except
for full levels of coolant, engine oil and
fuel, and spare tire, jack, and tools).
Have the driver or equivalent weight
placed in driver's seat.
4. Clean the headlight lenses and turn on
the headlights (Low beam).
5. Open the hood.
G290A01NF-A
Vertical
aiming
!
6. Draw a vertical line (through the center
of each headlight beam pattern) and a
horizontal line (through the center of
each headlight beam pattern) on the
aiming screen measured from ground
to center mark on headlight lens.
7. Adjust the right side of each cut-off line
of the low beam to the horizontal line
with a phillips screwdriver - VERTICAL
AIMING.
WARNING:
Never attempt to adjust the horizontal
alignment of your headlights. Horizontal
aiming must be adjusted by an
authorized Hyundai dealer to avoid
incorrect alignment that will reduce the
effectiveness of your headlights.
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
28
SPECIFICATION:
"H"
Horizontal center line of headlights from
ground : 27.05 in. (687mm)
"W"
Distance between each headlight center :
51.5 in. (1,308mm)
"L"
Distance between the headlights and the
wall that the lights are tested against :
118.11 in. (3,000 mm)
REPLACEMENT OF LIGHT
BULBS
G260A02L-GAT
Before attempting to replace a light bulb,
be sure the switch is turned to the "OFF"
position.
The next paragraph shows how to reach
the light bulbs so they may be changed. Be
sure to replace the burned-out bulb with
one of the same number and wattage
rating.
See page 6-35 for the wattage descrip-
tions.
!
CAUTION:
o Keep the lights out of contact with
petroleum products, such as oil,
gasoline, etc.
o Be sure to replace the LED type
equipped bulbs with an assembly.
o After heavy, driving rain or washing,
headlight and taillight lenses could
appear frosty. This condition is
caused by the temperature difference
between the lamp inside and outside.
This is similar to the condensation on
your windows inside your vehicle
during the rain and doesn’t indicate a
problem with your vehicle. If the water
leaks into the lamp bulb circuitry, have
the vehicle checked by an Authorized
Hyundai Dealer.
G290B01NF-AAT
Adjustment After Headlight Assem-
bly Replacement
G290B01NF
L
W
H
H
Cut-off line
Ground line
Horizontal line
Vertical line
If the vehicle has had front body repair and
the headlight assembly has been replaced,
the headlight aiming should be checked
using the aiming screen as shown in the
illustration. Turn on the headlight switch
(Low Beam Position).
1. Adjust headlights vertically so that cutoff
line is aligned with horizontal line shown
in the illustration.
2. Dotted lines in the illustration show the
center of the headlights.
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
29
Replacement instructions:
1. Allow the bulb to cool. Wear eye
protection.
2. Open the engine hood.
3. Always grasp the bulb by its base, avoid
touching the glass.
G270A01NF-AAT
HEADLIGHT, FRONT TURN SIGNAL
LIGHT AND FRONT FOG LIGHT
Headlight and Front Turn Signal
Light
ONF078024
Headlight (Low beam)
Turn signal light
Front position light
Front Fog Light
Headlight
(High beam)
ONF078023N
4. Using a socket wrench of the correct
size, remove the headlight assembly
mounting bolts and bumper mounting
bolt.
HNF5024
5. Disconnect the power cord from the
back of the headlight.
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
30
HNF5027
9. Remove the protective cap from the
replacement bulb and install the new
bulb by matching the plastic base with
the headlight hole.
Low Beam
OMG075038N
HNF5025
6. Turn the plastic cover counterclock-
wise and remove it.
ONF078026N
7. Disconnect the connector from the bulb
base in the back of the headlight.
8. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise to
remove the headlight bulb.
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
31
12. To replace the front turn signal light
bulb remove it from the bulb holder
and install the new bulb.
!
WARNING:
This halogen bulb contains gas under
pressure and if impacted could shatter,
resulting in flying fragments. Always
wear eye protection when servicing the
bulb. Protect the bulb against abrasions
or scratches and against liquids when
lighted. Turn the bulb on only when in-
stalling in a headlight. Replace the head-
light if damaged or cracked. Keep the
bulb out of the reach of children and
dispose of the used bulb with care.
HNF5028-1
G270A03O
10. Use the protective cap and carton to
promptly dispose of the old bulb.
11. Check for proper headlight aim.
Front Fog Light (If installed)
NOTE:
It is recommended that the front fog light
bulb should be replaced by an authorized
Hyundai dealer.
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
32
HNF5042
4. Loosen the mounting screws of the trunk
lid trim with a phillips screwdriver and
remove the trunk lid trim.
5. To replace the rear combination light
(back-up light and stop/tail light), re-
move the socket by turning it counter-
clockwise.
6. Install the new bulb.
3. To replace the rear combination light
(stop/tail light, rear side marker light
and rear turn signal light), remove it
from the bulb holder and install the new
bulb.
(1) Stop/tail light
(2) Rear side marker light
(3) Rear turn signal light
HNF5030-A
G270D02NF-AAT
REAR COMBINATION LIGHT
Stop/Tail Light, Rear Turn Signal
Light, Back-up Light and Rear Side
Marker Light
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Remove the cover on the inside of the
rear luggage trim.
ONF078028
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
33
HNF5032
3. Disconnect the power cord.
HTB284
4. Replace with a new bulb.
G270C01L-AAT
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
LIGHT
1. Open the trunk lid.
2. Remove the luggage compartment light
cover on the rear package tray panel
with a flat-head screwdriver.
HNF5031-A
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
34
G270G01NF
G270L01L-AAT
MAP LIGHT
1. Remove the plastic cover with a flat-
head screwdriver.
G270G01L-AAT
INTERIOR LIGHT
HNF5034
1. Remove the plastic cover with a flat-
head screwdriver.
HNF5035
Screwdriver
2. Replace with a new bulb.
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
35
3. Disconnect the power cord.
HJM5039
HTB284
4. Replace with a new bulb.
G270K01L-AAT
GLOVE BOX ILLUMINATED LIGHT
1. Open the glove box.
2. Remove the glove box illuminated light
cover with a flat-head screwdriver.
ONF078039
G270G02NF
2. Replace with a new bulb.
Screwdriver
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
36
Socket Type
BAY 15d
w2.1 x 9.5d
BAY 15d
sv6-7, 6
BAY 15d
BAY 15s
w2.1 x 9.5d
w2.1 x 9.5d
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Socket Type
P x 26d
P14,5s
BAY15d
w2.1 x 9.5d
sv6-7,6
PGJ13
w2.1 x 9.2d
w2.1 x 4.6d
BULB WATTAGES
G280A01NF-AAT
G280A01NF-D
Part Name
Stop / Tail Light
High Mounted Rear Stop Light
Tail Light
Luggage Compartment Light
Rear Side Marker Light
Rear Turn Signal Light
Back-up Light
License Plate Light
Part Name
Headlight
Front Turn Signal Light
Map Light
Interior Light
Front Fog Light
Front Position Side Marker Light
Front Door Edge Warning Light
No.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Wattage
55
55
28
10
10
27
5
8
Low beam
High beam
Wattage
28/8
16
28/8
5
5
27
16
5
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
37
FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION
G200C01NF-AAT
Engine Compartment
NOTE:
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you
inspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.
HNF4005-1
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
38
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
HORN
TAIL
ECU
IG1
DRL
FR FOG
A/CON
F/PUMP
DIODE
ATM
STOP
H/LP LO RH
S/ROOF
H/LP WASHER
H/LP HI
ECU
SNSR.3
SNSR.1
SNSR.2
B/UP
IGN COIL
ECU (IG1)
H/LP LO
ABS
PROTECTED COMPONENTS
ABS/ESC control module, Multipurpose check connector
ABS/ESC control module, Multipurpose check connector
Fuse 23, 24, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35
Defogger relay
Blower relay
Power window relay, Fuse 16
Start relay, Ignition switch (IG2, START)
Engine control unit relay
Power connector 1/2, Fuse 21,22
Ignition switch (ACC, IG1)
Fusible Iink (ABS. 1, ABS. 2, RR HTD, BLOWER)
Horn relay
Tail light relay
PCM
(Spare)
Siren relay, DRL control module
Front fog light relay
A/C relay
Fuel pump relay
(Spare)
ATM control relay
Stop light switch
(Spare)
Sunroof control module
Headlight washer motor
Headlight relay (High)
TCM
A/C relay, Cooling fan relay, Injectors
Mass air flow sensor, Crankshaft/Camshaft position sensor, Oil control valve, SMATRA
Oxygen sensor, Fuel pump relay
Back up light switch, Pulse generator, Vehicle speed sensor
Ignition coils, Condenser
PCM
Headlight relay (Low)
ABS/ESC control module, Multipurpose check connector
ABS.1
ABS.2
I/P B+1
RR HTD
BLOWER
P/WDW
IGN.2
ECU RLY
I/P B+2
IGN.1
ALT
FUSE RATING
40A
20A
40A
40A
40A
40A
40A
30A
30A
30A
150A
15A
20A
10A
10A
15A
15A
10A
20A
-
20A
15A
15A
15A
20A
20A
10A
10A
15A
15A
10A
20A
10A
20A
10A
DESCRIPTION
FUSIBLE
LINK
FUSE
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
39
PROTECTED COMPONENTS
FUSE RATINGFUSE
SPARE 15A (Spare)
SPARE 15A (Spare)
ETACS 10A BCM(Body Control Module), Sunroof control module, Electronic chrome mirror, Rheostat
ESC 10A ESC module, Blower relay
C/LIGHTER 20A Cigarette lighter
SPARE 15A (Spare)
TAIL RH 10A Illumination lights, Right : License light (LH, RH), Rear combination light, Headlight, Glove box light
TAIL LH 10A Front fog light relay, Left : Rear combination light, Headlight
IONIZER 10A (Spare)
H/LP 10A DRL control module, Headlight relay, AQS and ambient sensor
WIPER 25A Wiper and washer
A/CON 10A A/C control module
A/BAG 15A SRS control module, Passenger's Airbag switch
P/OUTLET 20A Front accessory socket, Rear power outlet
D/CLOCK 10A Digital clock, Audio, A/T shift lock control module, Power outside mirror and mirror folding, BCM
SAFETY PWR 25A Safety window module
ECS 15A (Spare)
ATM KEY LOCK 10A A/T shift lock control module
P/WDW RR LH 25A Power window main switch, Left rear power window switch
P/WDW RH 30A Power window main switch, Right power window switch
Inner Panel
6
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
40
PROTECTED COMPONENTS
FUSE RATINGFUSE
P/AMP 20A Audio amp
DR LOCK 20A Door lock/unlock relay
HAZARD 10A Hazard relay
P/SEAT RH 30A Power seat manual switch(RHD)
A/BAG IND 10A Instrument cluster
T/SIG 10A Turn signal light
CLUSTER 10A BCM(Body Control Module), Instrument cluster, Yaw rate sensor, ESP switch, Seat warmer
AGCS 10A (Spare)
START 10A Start relay
PEDAL ADJ 15A (Spare)
ECS/RR FOG 15A Rear fog light relay
T/LID OPEN 15A Trunk lid relay, Fuel filler door and trunk lid switch
S/HTR 15A Seat warmer switch
P/SEAT LH 30A Power seat manual switch
SPORT MODE 10A Sport mode switch, Key solenoid
MIRR HTD 10A A/C control module, Outside mirror and mirror folding motor
POWER CONNECTOR. 1 15A Audio
POWER CONNECTOR. 2 15A
BCM(Body Control Module), Digital clock, Instrument cluster, A/C control module, Courtesy lights,
Interior light
7
Emission Control System ............................................. 7-2
Catalytic Converter ....................................................... 7-3
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
7
7
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
2
EMISSION CONTROL
SYSTEMS
H010B01A-AAT
1. Crankcase Emission Control Sys-
tem
The positive crankcase ventilation system
is employed to prevent air pollution caused
by blow-by gases being emitted from the
crankcase. This system supplies fresh
filtered air to the crankcase through the air
intake hose. Inside the crankcase, the fresh
air mixes with blow-by gases, which then
pass through the PCV valve into the
induction system.
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tank
are absorbed and stored in the onboard
canister. When the engine is running, the
fuel vapors absorbed in the canister are
drawn into the surge tank through the
purge control solenoid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is
controlled by the Engine Control Module
(ECM); when the engine coolant
temperature is low during idling, the PCSV
closes so that evaporated fuel is not taken
into the engine. After the engine warms-up
during ordinary driving, the PCSV opens
to introduce evaporated fuel to the engine.
H010A02NF-AAT
The emission control system of your ve-
hicle is covered by a written limited war-
ranty. Please see the warranty information
contained in the Owner’s Handbook &
Warranty Information booklet in your ve-
hicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an emission
control system to meet all applicable emis-
sion regulations.
There are three emission control systems,
as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control system
(2) Evaporative emission control system
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function of the
emission control systems, it is
recommended that you have your vehicle
inspected and maintained by an autho-
rized Hyundai dealer in accordance with
the maintenance schedule in this manual.
Caution for the Inspection and Mainte-
nance Test With Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system
o To prevent the vehicle from misfiring
during dynamometer testing, turn the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) sys-
tem off by pressing the ESC switch.
o After dynamometer testing is com-
pleted, turn the ESC system back on
by pressing the ESC switch again.
H010C01S-AAT
2. Evaporative Emission Control (In-
cluding ORVR: Onboard Refueling
Vapor Recovery) System
The Evaporative Emission Control System
is designed to prevent fuel vapors from
escaping into the atmosphere.
(The ORVR system is designed to allow
the vapors from the fuel tank to be loaded
into a canister while refueling at the gas
station, preventing the escape of fuel
vapors into the atmosphere.)
7
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
3
H010D01NF-AAT
3. Exhaust Emission Control
System
The Exhaust Emission Control System is a
highly effective system which controls
exhaust emissions while maintaining good
vehicle performance.
G270301AUN
Vehicle modifications
This vehicle should not be modified. Modi-
fication of your vehicle could affect its per-
formance, safety or durability and may
even violate governmental safety and
emissions regulations.
In addition, damage or performance prob-
lems resulting from any modification may
not be covered under warranty.
G270302AUN
Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
Carbon monoxide can be present with
other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you smell
exhaust fumes of any kind inside your
vehicle, have it inspected and repaired
immediately. If you ever suspect exhaust
fumes are coming into your vehicle, drive
it only with all the windows fully open. Have
your vehicle checked and repaired imme-
diately.
!
PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of
automobile components and parts, in-
cluding components found in the interior
furnishings in a vehicle, contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of Califor-
nia to cause cancer and birth defects
and reproductive harm. In addition, cer-
tain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
H020A01NF-AAT
(If Installed)
Hyundai vehicle is equipped with a mono-
lith type three-way catalytic converter to
reduce the carbon monoxide, hydrocar-
bons and nitrogen oxides contained in the
exhaust gas. Exhaust gases passing
through the catalytic converter cause it to
operate at a very high temperature. The
introduction of large amounts of unburned
gasoline into the exhaust may cause the
catalytic converter to overheat and create
a fire hazard. This risk may be reduced by
observing the following:
Catalytic Converter
H020A01NF
!
WARNING - Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain carbon
monoxide (CO). Though colorless and
odorless, it is dangerous and could be
lethal if inhaled. Follow the instructions
on this page to avoid CO poisoning.
7
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
4
!
WARNING:
!
WARNING:
o Your vehicle is designed to operate
with a catalytic converter and remov-
ing it will cause the engine to operate
poorly and fuel economy to drop along
with an increase in the vehicle emis-
sions.
o Remember that your Hyundai dealer
is your best source of assistance.
o Do not park, idle or drive your vehicle
over or near flammable objects such
as grass, paper, leaves or rags. These
materials might contact the hot cata-
lytic converter and a fire might result.
o Use unleaded fuel only.
o Maintain the engine in good operating
condition. Extremely high catalytic
converter temperatures can result
from improper operation of the
electrical, ignition or multiport
electronic fuel injection.
o If your engine stalls, pings, knocks, or
is hard to start, have your Hyundai
dealer inspect and repair the problem
as soon as possible.
o Avoid driving with a very low fuel level.
Running out of gasoline may cause
the engine to misfire and result in
damage to the catalytic converter.
o Avoid idling the engine for periods
longer than 10 minutes.
o The vehicle should not be pushed or
pulled to get started. This may cause
the catalytic converter to overheat
and create a fire hazard.
o Do not touch the catalytic converter
or any other part of the exhaust system
while the catalytic converter is hot.
Shut off the engine, wait for at least
one hour before touching the cata-
lytic converter or any other part of the
exhaust system.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............................. 8-2
Engine Number ............................................................. 8-2
Tire Information ............................................................. 8-2
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressures ............... 8-3
Checking Tire Inflation Pressure................................... 8-5
Tire Sidewall Labeling ................................................... 8-5
Tire Terminology and Definitions................................... 8-7
All Season Tires ............................................................ 8-9
Snow Tires .................................................................... 8-9
Tire Chains.................................................................... 8-9
Tire Rotation................................................................ 8-10
Tire Balancing ............................................................. 8-10
Tire Traction ................................................................ 8-11
When to Replace Tires ............................................... 8-11
Tire Maintenance ........................................................ 8-12
Spare Tire and Tools................................................... 8-13
Warranties for Your Hyundai Vehicle .......................... 8-13
Consumer Information................................................. 8-14
Reporting Safety Defects ............................................ 8-16
Binding Arbitration of Warranty Claims ....................... 8-17
8
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING
SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING
ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
2
ENGINE NUMBER
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER (VIN)
I010B01A-AATI010A01O-AAT
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
the number used in registering your car
and in all legal matters pertaining to its
ownership, etc. It can be found in three
different places on your car:
1. The number is punched on the engine
compartment bulkhead.
2. The VIN is also on a plate attached to the
top of the dashboard. The number on
the plate can easily be seen through the
windshield from outside.
3. The vehicle certification label attached
on the driver's (or front passenger's)
side center pillar gives the vehicle iden-
tification number (VIN).
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown in the drawing.
TIRES
I020A02A-AAT
TIRE INFORMATION
The tires supplied on your new Hyundai
are chosen to provide the best perfor-
mance for normal driving.
If you ever have questions about your
tire warranty and where to obtain ser-
vice, see the tire manufacturer's book-
let included with your vehicle's Owner's
Manual Literature Kit.
I010A01NF-A
ONF088003
(2.4L)
(3.3L)
ONF088004
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
3
I030A03NF-AAT
RECOMMENDED COLD TIRE INFLA-
TION PRESSURES
Tire label located on the driver's side
center pillar outer panel gives the cold
tire pressures recommended for your
vehicle with the original tire size, the
number of people that can be in your
vehicle and vehicle capacity weight.
I030A01NF-A
Type B
ONF050301N
ONF050300N
Type A
These pressures were chosen to pro-
vide the most satisfactory combination
of ride comfort, tire wear and stability
under normal conditions. Tire pressures
should be checked at least monthly.
Proper tire inflation pressures should
be maintained for these reasons:
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
4
!
CAUTION:
Always observe the following:
o Check pressures when the tires
are cold. (After the vehicle has
been parked for at least three hours
or hasn't been driven more than 1
mile (1.6 km) since starting up.)
o Check the pressure of your spare
tire each time you check the pres-
sure of other tires.
o Worn, old tires can cause acci-
dents. If your tread is badly worn,
or if your tires have been dam-
aged, replace them.
!
WARNING:
Overinflation or underinflation can
reduce the tire life, adversely affect
vehicle handling, and lead to sud-
den tire failure. This could rusult in
loss of vehicle control and potential
injury.
!
WARNING:
o Inspect your tires frequently for
proper inflation as well as wear
and damage. Always use a tire
pressure gauge.
o Tires with too much or too little
pressure wear unevenly causing
poor handling, loss of vehicle
control, and sudden tire failure
leading to accidents, injuries, and
even death. The recommended
cold tire pressure for your vehicle
can be found in this manual and
on the tire label located on the
driver's side of the center pillar.
o Worn tires can cause accidents.
Replace tires that are worn, show
uneven wear, or are damaged. See
page 8-11.
o Remember to check the pressure
of your spare tire. Hyundai recom-
mends that you check the spare
every time you check the pressure
of the other tires on your vehicle.
NOTE:
o Underinflation also results in ex-
cessive wear, poor handling and
reduced fuel economy. Wheel de-
formation also is possible. Keep
your tire pressures at the proper
levels. If a tire frequently needs
refilling, have it checked by your
Hyundai Dealer.
o Overinflation produces a harsh
ride, excessive wear at the center
of the tire tread, and a greater
possibility of damage from road
hazards.
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
5
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gauge firmly
onto the valve to get a pressure mea-
surement. If the cold tire inflation pres-
sure matches the recommended pres-
sure on the tire and loading information
label, no further adjustment is neces-
sary. If the pressure is low, add air until
you reach the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the center
of the tire valve. Recheck the tire pres-
sure with the tire gauge. Be sure to put
the valve caps back on the valve stems.
They help prevent leaks by keeping out
dirt and moisture.
I035A01JM-AAT
CHECKING TIRE INFLATION PRES-
SURE
Check your tires once a month or more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to Check
Use a good quality gauge to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires
are properly inflated simply by looking
at them. Radial tires may look properly
inflated even when they're underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure when
the tires are cold. - "Cold" means your
vehicle has been sitting for at least
three hours or driven no more than 1
mile (1.6 km).
Federal law requires tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on
the sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamen-
tal characteristics of the tire and also
provides the tire identification number
(TIN) for safety standard certification.
The TIN can be used to identify the tire
in case of a recall.
I030B01NF-AAT
TIRE SIDEWALL LABELING
I030B04JM
1
2
3
4
5, 6
7
1
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
6
o V: Speed Rating. The speed rating
denotes the speed at which a tire is
designed to be driven for extended
periods of time. The ratings range
from "A" to "Z" (98 to 186 MPH).
3. TIN (Tire Identification Number) for
new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX
XXXX)
o DOT: Abbreviation for the "Depart-
ment of Transportation". The sym-
bol can be placed above, below or
to the left or right of the Tire Iden-
tification Number. It indicates the
tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation Mo-
tor Vehicle Safety Standards.
o 1st two-digit code: Manufacturer's
identification mark
o 2nd two-digit code: Tire size
o 3rd three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional)
o 4th four-digit code: Date of Manu-
facture
o Four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 3105 means
the 31st week of 2005.
4. Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of
rubbercoated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the materials in the tire, which in-
clude steel, nylon, polyester, and
others. The letter "R" means radial
ply construction; the letter "D" means
diagonal or bias ply construction;
and the letter "B" means belted-bias
ply construction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation pres-
sure.
1. Manufacturer or Brand name
o Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
2. Tire size
(example: P215/60R16 94V)
o The "P" indicates the tire is de-
signed for passenger vehicles.
o Three-digit number (215): This num-
ber gives the width in millimeters
of the tire from sidewall edge to
sidewall edge.
o Two-digit number (60): This num-
ber, known as the aspect ratio,
gives the tire's ratio of height to
width.
o R: The "R" stands for radial.
o Two-digit number (16): This num-
ber is the wheel or rim diameter in
inches.
o Two digit number (94): This num-
ber is the tire's load index. It is a
measurement of how much weight
each tire can support.
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
7
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7. Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(UTQG):
Tire manufacturers are required to
grade tires based on three perfor-
mance factors: treadwear, traction
and temperature resistance. For more
information, see Uniform Tire Qual-
ity Grading on page 8-14.
I030D01JM-AAT
TIRE TERMINOLOGY AND DEFINI-
TIONS
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside
the tire pressing outward on the tire. Air
pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the
combined weight of optional accesso-
ries. Some examples of optional ac-
cessories are, automatic transmission,
power seats, and air conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a
tire's height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that
is located between the plies and the
tread. Cords may be made from steel or
other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel
wires wrapped by steel cords that hold
the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which
the plies are laid at alternate angles
less than 90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air
pressure in a tire, measured in pounds
per square inch (psi) or kilopascals
(kPa) before a tire has built up heat from
driving.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of
a motor vehicle with standard and op-
tional equipment including the maxi-
mum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the
sidewall of a tire signifying that the tire
is in compliance with the U.S. Depart-
ment of Transportation motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code in-
cludes the Tire Identification Number
(TIN), an alphanumeric designator which
can also identify the tire manufacturer,
production plant, brand and date of
production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating
for the front Axle.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating
for the rear axle.
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
8
Occupant Distribution: Designated
seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of
an asymmetrical tire that has a particu-
lar side that faces outward when
mounted on a vehicle. The side of the
tire that contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering or bears manufacturer,
brand and or model name molding that
is higher or deeper than the same mold-
ings on the other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used
on passenger cars and some light duty
trucks and multipurpose vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure:
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended
tire inflation pressure as shown on the
tire placard.
Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the ply cords that extend to the
beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire upon
which the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between
the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code
assigned to a tire indicating the maxi-
mum speed at which a tire can operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire
and the road surface. The amount of
grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes
into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands,
sometimes called "wear bars," that show
across the tread of a tire when only 2/32
inch of tread remains.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards, a tire information system
that provides consumers with ratings
for a tire's traction, temperature and
treadwear. Ratings are determined by
tire manufacturers using government
testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side
of an asymmetrical tire, that must al-
ways face outward when mounted on a
vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for
air pressure.
Load Index: An assigned number rang-
ing from 1 to 279 that corresponds to
the load carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The
maximum air pressure to which a cold
tire may be inflated. The maximum air
pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rat-
ing for a tire at the maximum permis-
sible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The num-
ber of occupants a vehicle is designed
to seat multiplied by 150 pounds (68
kg).
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
9
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number
of designated seating positions multi-
plied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the rated
cargo and luggage load.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire:
Load on an individual tire due to curb
and accessory weight plus maximum
occupant and cargo weight.
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:
That load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each axle
its share of the curb weight, accessory
weight, and normal occupant weight
and dividing by 2.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently
attached to a vehicle showing the origi-
nal equipment tire size and recom-
mended inflation pressure.
I050A04Y-AAT
TIRE CHAINS
Tire chains, if necessary, should be
installed on the front wheels. Be sure
that the chains are the proper size and
that they are installed in accordance
with the manufacturer's instructions.
To minimize tire and chain wear, do not
continue to use tire chains when they
are no longer needed.
I040B01JM-AAT
ALL SEASON TIRES
Hyundai specifies all season tires on
some models to provide good perfor-
mance for use all year round, including
snowy and icy road conditions. All sea-
son tires are identified by ALL SEASON
and/or M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire
sidewall. Snow tires have better snow
traction than all season tires an may be
more appropriate in some areas.
I040A01O-AAT
SNOW TIRES
If you equip your car with snow tires,
they should be the same size and have
the same load capacity as the original
tires. Snow tires should be installed on
all four wheels; otherwise, poor han-
dling may result.
Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa)
more air pressure than the pressure
recommended for the standard tires on
the tire label on the driver's side of the
center pillar , or up to the maximum
pressure shown on the tire sidewall,
whichever is less.
Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120
km/h) when your car is equipped with
snow tires.
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
10
I070A01A-AAT
TIRE BALANCING
A tire that is out of balance may affect
handling and tire wear. The tires on your
Hyundai were balanced before the car
was delivered but may need balancing
again during the years you own the car.
Whenever a tire is dismounted for re-
pair, it should be rebalanced before
being reinstalled on the car.
!
I060A02A-AAT
TIRE ROTATION
Tires should be rotated every 7,500
miles (12,000 km). If you notice that
tires are wearing unevenly between ro-
tations, have the car checked by a
Hyundai dealer so the cause may be
corrected.
After rotating, adjust the tire pressures
and be sure to check the wheel nut
torque.
WARNING:
o Do not use the temporary spare
tire for tire rotation.
o Do not mix bias ply and radial ply
tires under any circumstances.
This may cause unusual handling
characteristics that could result in
death, serious injury, or property
damage.
I060A02NF
!
WARNING:
o When driving on roads covered
with snow or ice, drive at less than
20 mph (30 km/h).
o Use the SAE "S" class or wire &
plastic chains.
o If you have noise caused by chains
contacting the body, retighten the
chain to avoid contact with the
vehicle body.
o To prevent body damage, retighten
the chains after driving 0.3~0.6
miles.
o Don't use a tire chains on a vehicle
equipped with aluminium wheels.
If it is unavoidable use wire-type
chains.
o Use wire chains less than 15mm to
prevent damage to the chain's con-
nection.
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
11
!
WARNING:
To reduce the chance or serious or
fatal injuries from an accident caused
by tire failure or loss of vehicle con-
trol:
o Replace tires that are worn, show
uneven wear, or are damaged.
Worn tires can cause loss of brak-
ing effectiveness, steering con-
trol, and traction.
o Do not drive your vehicle with too
little or too much pressure in your
tires. This can lead to uneven
wear and tire failure.
o When replacing tires, never mix
radial and bias-ply tires on the
same car. You must replace all
tires (including the spare) if mov-
ing from radial to bias-ply tires.
HNF5015
I090A04JM-AAT
WHEN TO REPLACE TIRES
The original tires on your car have tread
wear indicators. The location of tread
wear indicators is shown by the "TWI"
or " " marks, etc. The tread wear
indicators appear when the tread depth
is 0.06 in. (1.6 mm). The tire should be
replaced when these appear as a solid
bar across two or more grooves of the
tread. Always replace your tires with
those of the recommended size. If you
change wheels, the new wheel's rim
width and offset must meet Hyundai
specification.
Tread wear
indicator
0.06 in. (1.6 mm)
I080A01A-AAT
TIRE TRACTION
Tire traction can be reduced if you drive
on worn tires, tires that are improperly
inflated or on slippery road surfaces.
Tires should be replaced when tread
wear indicators appear. To reduce the
possibility of losing control, slow down
whenever there is rain, snow or ice on
the road.
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
12
!!
I090B02JM-AAT
TIRE MAINTENANCE
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease tire
wear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly,
have your dealer check the wheel align-
ment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This will
increase vehicle ride comfort and tire
life. Additionally, a tire shoud always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel.
o Using tires and wheel other than
the recommended sizes could
cause unusual handling charac-
teristics and poor vehicle control,
resulting in a serious accident.
o Wheels that do not meet Hyundai's
specifications may fit poorly and
result in damage to the vehicle or
unusual handling and poor ve-
hicle control.
o The ABS works by comparing the
speed of the wheels. Tire size can
affect wheel speed. When replac-
ing tires, all 4 tires must use the
same size originally supplied with
the vehicle. Using tires of a differ-
ent size can cause the ABS (Anti-
lock Brake System) and ESC (Elec-
tronic Stability Control) (If In-
stalled) to work irregularly.
WARNING:
WARNING:
Tires degrade over time, even when
they are not being used. Regardless
of the remaining tread, it is recom-
mended that tires generally be re-
placed after 6 years of normal ser-
vice. Heat caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading conditions can
accelerate the aging process. Fail-
ure to follow this Warning can result
in sudden tire failure, which could
lead to a loss of control and an
accident involving serious injury or
death.
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
13
!
SPARE TIRE AND TOOLS
I100A01NF-AAT
Your Hyundai is delivered with the fol-
lowing:
Spare tire and wheel
Wrench bar (1)
Jack (2)
Wheel nut wrench (3)
Tool receptacle (4)
7I100A01NF-A
I110A01A-AAT
SHOP MANUAL
A Hyundai Shop Manual is available from
your authorized Hyundai dealer. It's written
for professional technicians, but is simple
enough for most mechanically-inclined
owners to understand.
WARNING:
o Underinflated or overinflated tires
can cause poor handling, loss of
vehicle control, and sudden tire
failure leading to accidents, inju-
ries, and even death. Always check
tires are properly inflated before
driving. Refer to pages 2-23 and 8-
3 for proper tire pressures and
further information.
o Driving on tires with no or insuffi-
cient tread is dangerous. Worn-
out tires can result in loss of ve-
hicle control, collisions, and in-
jury and even death. Worn-out
tires should be replaced as soon
as possible and should never be
used for driving. Always check
tire tread before driving your car.
Refer to this page for further infor-
mation and tread limits.
WARRANTIES FOR YOUR
HYUNDAI VEHICLE
I120A03A-AAT
Please consult your Owner’s Handbook
& Warranty Information booklet for your
vehicle’s specific warranty coverage.
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
14
Traction AA, A, B, C - The traction
grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet pave-
ment as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction per-
formance.
!
WARNING:
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead brak-
ing traction tests, and does not in-
clude acceleration, cornering, hy-
droplaning, or peak traction charac-
teristics.
CONSUMER INFORMATION
(U.S.A only)
I130A01A-AAT
This consumer information has been
prepared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration of the U.S.
Department of Transportation. It provides
the purchasers and/or prospective
purchasers of Hyundai automobiles with
information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Hyundai dealer will help answer any
questions you may have as you read this
information.
I130B04A-AAT
Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where appli-
cable on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width.
For example:
TREAD wear 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATUE A
Treadwear - The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under con-
trolled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course. For example, a
tire graded 150 would wear one and a
half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to varia-
tions in driving habits, service prac-
tices and differences in road character-
istics and climate.
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
15
Temperature A, B, C - The tempera-
ture grades are A (the highest), B, and
C, representing the tire's resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under con-
trolled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material of
the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can
lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
!
WARNING:
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Exces-
sive speed, underinflation, or exces-
sive loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading - Qual-
ity grades can be found on the tire
sidewall between the tread shoulder
and the maximum section width.
For example :
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tempera-
ture A
I130D04A-AAT
Hyundai motor vehicles are designed and
manufactured to meet or exceed all
applicable safety standards.
For your safety, however, we strongly urge
you to read and follow all directions in this
Owner's Manual, particularly the
information under the headings "NOTE",
"CAUTION" and "WARNING".
If, after reading this manual, you have any
questions regarding the operation of your
vehicle, please contact your nearest
Hyundai Motor America Regional Office
as listed below:
Eastern Region: Connecticut, Delaware,
Maine, Massachusetts, New Hampshire,
New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvania,
Rhode Island, Vermont.
Eastern Region
1100 Cranbury South River Road
Jamesburg, NJ 08831
(800) 633-5151
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
16
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S.A only)
I130C02A-AAT
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA. If
NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles,
it may order a recall and remedy cam-
paign. However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or HYUNDAI MOTOR
AMERICA.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-
hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-
4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-
tor, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue,
SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor ve-
hicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Southern Region: Florida, Georgia, North
Carolina, South Carolina.
Southern Region
270 Riverside Parkway, Suite A
Austell, GA 30168
(800) 633-5151
South Central Region: Alabama, Arkan-
sas, Louisiana, Mississippi, Missouri, New
Mexico, Oklahoma, Tennessee, Texas.
South Central Region
1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400
Coppell, TX 75019
(800) 633-5151
Central Region: Illinois, Indiana, lowa,
Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota, Nebraska,
North Dakota, South Dakota, Ohio, Wis-
consin, Kansas, Missouri.
Central Region
1705 Sequoia Drive
Aurora, Illinois 60506
(800) 633-5151
Western Region: Alaska, Hawaii, Arizona,
Colorado, ldaho, Montana, Nevada, Or-
egon, Utah, Washington, Wyoming.
Western Region
10550 Talbert Avenue
P.O.Box 20850
Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850
(800) 633-5151
California Region: California
California Region
10550 Talbert Avenue
P.O. Box 20850
Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850
(800) 633-5151
8
CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS
17
This Binding Arbitration Agreement shall
not deprive you of any remedies avail-
able to you under applicable law. The
parties are waiving their right to seek
remedies in court, including the right to
a jury trial.
This Binding Arbitration Agreement shall
be governed by and interpreted under
the Federal Arbitration Act, 9 U.S.C.
sections 1-16. Judgment upon any award
may be entered in any court having
jurisdiction.
You may revoke this Arbitration Agree-
ment by (1) written notice or (2) elec-
tronic notice. Written notice must be
delivered (via certified mail) to Hyundai
Motor America, Attn: Consumer Af-
fairs, 10550 Talbert Avenue, P.O. Box
20849, Fountain Valley, CA 92728-0849.
Electronic notice must be submitted at
the following website address: http://
warranty-arbitration.hyundaiUSA.com.
Notice must be received within 90 days
after you purchase your vehicle.
I140A01A-AAT
Any claim or dispute you may have
related to your vehicle's warranty or the
duties contemplated under the warranty,
including claims related to the refund or
partial refund of your vehicle's purchase
price (excluding personal injury or prod-
uct liability claims), shall be resolved
by binding arbitration. Binding arbitra-
tion shall be administered by and through
the National Arbitration Forum (NAF) or
the American Arbitration Association
(AAA), under the Code of Procedure of
the entity you select.
You will not be responsible for paying
filing and hearing fees above $275.00.
All other arbitration costs shall be borne
by Hyundai Motor America. You are not
responsible to pay any of the costs
Hyundai incurs.
BINDING ARBITRATION
(U.S.A only)
9
Measurement ................................................................ 9-2
Engine ........................................................................... 9-3
Lubrication Chart ........................................................... 9-4
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
9
9
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
2
J010A03NF-AAT
MEASUREMENT
J060A01NF-AAT
FUEL SYSTEM
J020A01NF-AAT
POWER STEERING
J030A03NF-AAT
TIRE
in.(mm)
Fuel tank capacity
17.7us.gal (14.7 imp.gal, 67 liter)
18.5 us.gal (15.4 imp.gal, 70 liter)*
ITEM
J050A01NF-AAT
BRAKE
Dual hydraulic with brake booster
Ventilated disc
Disc type
Cable operated on rear wheel
Type
Front brake type
Rear brake type
Parking brake
Type
Wheel free play
Rack stroke
Oil pump type
Rack and pinion
0 ~ 1.18 in. (0 ~ 30 mm)
5.90 in. (150 mm)
Vane type
2.4L/3.3L
189.9 (4800)
72.0 (1830)
58.0 (1475)
107.4 (2730)
61.61 (1565)
61.02 (1550)
Overall length
Overall width
Overall height
Wheel base
Wheel tread
Front
Rear
Inflation Pressure
32PSI (220kPa)
60PSI (420kPa)
Type
Full
Temporary
Size
P215/60R16
P215/55R17
T125/80D16
* : if installed
9
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
3
3.3L
6-Cyl., V-type DOHC
3.62 x 3.29 (92.0 x 83.8)
203.9 (3,342)
1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6
620 ± 100
BTDC 10° ± 5°
0.006 ~ 0.009 in. (0.17 ~ 0.23 mm)
0.01 ~ 0.012 in. (0.27 ~ 0.33 mm)
2.4L
4-Cyl., In-line DOHC
3.46 x 3.81 (88 x 97)
143.9(2,359)
1 - 3 - 4 - 2
650 ± 100
BTDC 8° ± 5°
ENGINE
J070A02NF-AAT
ITEMS
Engine Type
Bore x Stroke in.(mm)
Displacement cu.in.(cc)
Firing order
Valve clearance (cold engine) Intake
Exhaust
Idle speed (rpm)
Ignition timing (Base)
9
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
4
Oil & Grease Standard
API SM or SL, SAE 5W-20, SAE 5W-30 (ALL TEMP. RANGE)
ILSAC GF-3 SAE 10W-30 (ABOVE 0°F(-18°C))
or ABOVE
HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4)
HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other
brands meeting the SP III specification approved by Hyundai Motor Co..
Ethylene glycol base for aluminum radiator
PSF-4 TYPE FLUID
DOT 3 or DOT 4 Equivalent
LUBRICATION CHART
J080A04NF-AAT
Quantity (Us. qts)(Liter)
Drain and refill;
2.4L : 4.54 (4.3) (With oil filter)
3.3L : 5.49 (5.2) (With/Without oil
filter)
1.8 (1.75)
2.4L : 10.0 (9.5)
3.3L : 11.52 (10.9)
2.4L : 6.87 (6.5)
2.4L : 6.66 (6.3)
3.3L : 8.66 (8.2)
0.95 (0.9)
1.0 (0.9)
Item
Engine Oil
Recommends
Transaxle
Coolant
Power steering
Brake and clutch fluid
Manual Transaxle
Automatic Transaxle
Manual
Automatic
10
INDEX
10
10
INDEX
2
A
Advanced Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG) System
(SRS) .................................................................................. 1-35
Curtain airbag ................................................................. 1-47
Driver's and passenger's front airbag ............................ 1-36
Occupant classification system ...................................... 1-41
Side impact airbag ......................................................... 1-46
Air Cleaner Filter ................................................................ 6-11
Air Conditioning
Care................................................................................. 6-18
Operation ............................................................ 1-101, 6-18
Switch ............................................................................ 1-101
Antenna ............................................................................ 1-110
Audio System
Audio remote control switch ........................................... 1-95
CD (PA710S) ................................................................ 1-119
CDC (PA760S) ............................................................. 1-131
Radio, Set up, Volume control (PA710S, PA760S)
........................................................................... 1-115, 1-128
Running iPod (PA710S, PA760S) ................... 1-125, 1-138
Using USB (PA710S, PA760S) ........................ 1-121, 1-134
Automatic Heating and Cooling Control System ............ 1-104
Automatic-Dimming Mirror with Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass
Display and HomeLink
®
......................................................................................
1-79
B
Battery ................................................................................. 6-24
Binding Arbitration ............................................................. 8-17
Brake
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ......................................... 2-12
Checking the brakes ...................................................... 6-17
Fluid................................................................................. 6-17
Pedal clearance .............................................................. 6-21
Pedal free-play ............................................................... 6-20
Practices .......................................................................... 2-15
Breaking-In your New Hyundai ........................................... 1-3
C
California Perchlorate Notice ............................................ 5-10
Care of Discs .................................................................... 1-114
Catalytic Converter ............................................................... 7-3
Center Console Compartment ........................................... 1-77
Child Restraint System ...................................................... 1-27
Installing a child restraint system with
"Tether Anchorage" system ........................................... 1-29
Securing a child restraint system with
"Child Seat Lower Anchor" system ............................... 1-30
Child-Protector Rear Door Lock .......................................... 1-6
Cigarette Lighter ................................................................ 1-69
Climate Control Air Fiter ........................................ 1-109, 6-19
Clock ................................................................................... 1-69
Clutch
Pedal free-play ............................................................... 6-21
10
INDEX
3
Combination Light
Auto Light ........................................................................ 1-65
Headlight flasher ............................................................ 1-65
Headlight switch ............................................................. 1-64
High-beam switch ........................................................... 1-65
Lane change signal ........................................................ 1-64
Parking light auto off ...................................................... 1-64
Turn signal operation ..................................................... 1-63
Consumer Information ....................................................... 8-14
Cooling Fans ...................................................................... 6-26
Corrosion protection
Cleaning the interior ......................................................... 4-5
Protecting your Hyundai from corrosion .......................... 4-2
Washing and waxing ........................................................ 4-3
Cruise Control .................................................................... 1-92
D
Day/night Inside Rearview Mirror ...................................... 1-78
Defrosting/Defogging ....................................................... 1-103
Door
Central door locks ............................................................ 1-6
Door locks ......................................................................... 1-4
Front door warning light ................................................. 1-91
Locking and unlocking front door with a key .................. 1-5
Drink Holder ....................................................................... 1-70
Driving
Economical driving ......................................................... 2-16
Smooth cornering ........................................................... 2-17
Winter driving .................................................................. 2-17
E
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) System ........................ 2-13
Emission Control System ..................................................... 7-2
Engine
Before starting the engine ................................................ 2-3
Compartment (2.4 DOHC) ................................................ 6-2
Compartment (3.3 V6) ...................................................... 6-3
Coolant .............................................................................. 6-8
Coolant temperature gauge ........................................... 1-58
If the engine overheats ..................................................... 3-4
Number ............................................................................. 8-2
Oil ...................................................................................... 6-4
Starting .............................................................................. 2-5
Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous! .................................. 2-2
F
Fan Speed Control ................................................. 1-97, 1-107
Fog Light
Front ................................................................................ 1-66
Front Seats
Active headrests ............................................................. 1-16
Adjustable front seats ..................................................... 1-14
Adjustable headrests ...................................................... 1-15
Adjusting seat forward and rearward .................. 1-14, 1-18
Adjusting seatback angle ..................................... 1-14, 1-18
Power driver's seat ......................................................... 1-17
Seat cushion height adjustment ......................... 1-17, 1-18
Seat warmer .................................................................... 1-19
10
INDEX
4
Fuel
Capacity ............................................................................ 9-2
Gauge .............................................................................. 1-58
Recommendations ............................................................ 1-2
Fuel Filler Lid
Remote release .............................................................. 1-87
Fuse Panel Description ..................................................... 6-37
Fuses .................................................................................. 6-22
G
General Checks ................................................................... 6-4
Glove Box ........................................................................... 1-76
H
Hazard Warning System .................................................... 1-68
Headlight
Aiming adjustment .......................................................... 6-27
Replacement ................................................................... 6-28
Switch .............................................................................. 1-64
Heating and Ventilation
Air flow control ................................................... 1-97, 1-108
Air intake control switch ..................................... 1-99, 1-107
Bi-level heating ............................................................. 1-100
Defrosting/Defogging .................................................... 1-103
Fan speed control (Blower Control) .................. 1-97, 1-107
Temperature control ....................................................... 1-96
High-Mounted Rear Stop Light ......................................... 1-87
Hood Release .................................................................... 1-89
Horn .................................................................................... 1-91
I
Ignition Switch ...................................................................... 2-3
Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ............................ 1-50
Instrument Panel Light Control (Rheostat) ....................... 1-69
Interior Light ....................................................................... 1-74
Intermittent Wiper ............................................................... 1-67
J
Jump Starting ....................................................................... 3-3
K
Key ........................................................................................ 1-3
If you lose your keys ...................................................... 3-17
Positions ............................................................................ 2-3
L
Light Bulb Watages ............................................................ 6-36
Light Bulbs Replacement .................................................. 6-28
Lubrication Chart .................................................................. 9-4
M
Maintenance Intervals
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ................ 5-7
Maintenance under severe usage conditions ................. 5-6
Scheduled maintenance .................................................. 5-4
Service requirements ........................................................ 5-2
Manual Heating and Cooling Control System .................. 1-96
10
INDEX
5
Mirrors
Day/night inside rearview ............................................... 1-78
Homelink mirror .............................................................. 1-79
Outside rearview ............................................................. 1-77
Outside rearview mirror heater ...................................... 1-78
Multi Box ............................................................................. 1-76
O
Odometer ............................................................................ 1-59
Outside Rearview Mirror .................................................... 1-77
P
Parking Brake ..................................................................... 1-85
Power Adjustable Pedals .................................................. 2-12
Power Outlets ..................................................................... 1-70
Power Steering Fluid Level ............................................... 6-26
R
Rear Seat
Armrest ............................................................................ 1-92
Folding rear seatbacks ................................................... 1-21
Warning ........................................................................... 1-21
Rear Window Defroster Switch ......................................... 1-68
Reporting Safety Defects ................................................... 8-16
S
Seat
Front ................................................................................ 1-14
Rear................................................................................. 1-20
Seat Belts
3-Point system ................................................................ 1-25
Adjusting your seat belt .................................................. 1-27
Care of seat belts ........................................................... 1-24
Pre-tensioner seat belt ................................................... 1-33
Precautions ..................................................................... 1-22
Seatback Pocket ................................................................ 1-71
Speedometer ...................................................................... 1-59
Starting Procedure ............................................................... 2-5
Steering Wheel
Free-play ......................................................................... 6-20
Tilt and telescopic type ................................................... 1-90
Tilt type ............................................................................ 1-90
Stereo Sound System ...................................................... 1-112
Sunglass Holder ................................................................ 1-75
Sun Visor ............................................................................ 1-89
Sunroof ............................................................................... 1-72
T
Tachometer ......................................................................... 1-59
Theft-Alarm System .............................................................. 1-8
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ........................... 3-5
Tires
All season tires ................................................................. 8-9
Balancing ........................................................................ 8-10
Chains ............................................................................... 8-9
Changing a flat tire ......................................................... 3-10
Checking the inflation pressure ....................................... 8-4
If you have a flat tire ....................................................... 3-10
Information ........................................................................ 8-2
10
INDEX
6
Maintenance ................................................................... 8-12
Pressure ............................................................................ 8-3
Replacement ................................................................... 8-11
Rotation ........................................................................... 8-10
Sidewall labeling .............................................................. 8-5
Snow tires ......................................................................... 8-9
Spare tire .......................................................................... 3-9
Terminology and definitions ............................................. 8-7
Traction ........................................................................... 8-11
Towing
A trailer (or vehicle) ........................................................ 2-20
If your vehicle must be towed ........................................ 3-15
Transaxle
Automatic .......................................................................... 2-8
Automatic transaxle fluid checking ................................ 6-15
Manual .............................................................................. 2-6
Manual transaxle oil checking ....................................... 6-14
Trip Computer .................................................................... 1-61
Trip Odometer .................................................................... 1-60
Trunk Lid ............................................................................ 1-86
V
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................................... 8-2
Vehicle Load Limit ............................................................. 2-24
Vehicle Specifications .......................................................... 9-1
W
Warning and Indicator Lights ............................................ 1-52
Warranties for Your Hyundai Vehicle ............................... 8-13
Windows
Power .............................................................................. 1-12
Windshield Wiper and Washer .......................................... 1-66
Intermittent wiper operation ............................................ 1-67
Mist wiper operation ....................................................... 1-67
Windshield washer operation ........................................ 1-67
Windshield Wiper Blades .................................................. 6-12
279

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Hyundai Sonata 2010 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Hyundai Sonata 2010 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 9,84 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info